E Prism4

PRISM4 for Windows
Microsoft Windows Based

Data Management and Analysis
Software
Supports Software Version 1.35

User Manual Part No. 31828100
Revision A
User Manual
Copyright  1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000

by SKF Condition Monitoring, Inc.
All rights reserved.
4141 Ruffin Road, San Diego, CA 92123-1841 USA
Telephone: (858) 496-3400, Fax: (858) 496-3531
Customer Service: 1-800-523-7514
SKF CONDITION MONITORING
SKF Condition Monitoring

Area Centers
North and South America

4141 Ruffin Road
San Diego, CA 92123 USA
Telephone (858) 496-3400
FAX (858) 496-3531
Europe, Africa, Middle East

Postbox 2091
5300 CB Zaltbommel
The Netherlands
Telephone (+31-418)-681818
FAX (+31-418)-681800
Asia, Pacific
Kawasan Perindustrian Nilai
P.O. Box 26
71807 Nilai
Negeri Sembilan Darul Khusus
Malaysia
Telephone (+60-6)-799-2713
FAX (+60-6)-799-2407
Visit us at our web site

www.skfcm.com
073100 dcs
Table of Contents
Introduction to PRISM4 for Windows 1

About This Manual ..............................................1-1
Chapter Overview ................................................1-2
A Note to Experienced PRISM2 (DOS) Users .......1-4
What is the PRISM4/Microlog System? ................1-5
The Microlog Collector/Analyzer .........................1-6
What is the PRISM4/UCC
CM20 Analysis System?....................................1-7
The UCC CM20 Collector/Analyzer.....................1-8
The Host Computer ..............................................1-9
PRISM4 for Windows Software ..........................1-10
The Support Module ..........................................1-12
Installation and Setup 2

Hardware and Software Requirements..................2-1
Launching the Installation Program .....................2-2
Installation Options Overview ..............................2-3
Typical Installation ..............................................2-5
Custom Installation ............................................2-11
Create a PRISM4 Icon for Remote Network Use .2-13
Network Installation...........................................2-18
“Generic” Network Installation Steps .................2-31
Overview of Database Access Modes..................2-39
Using the Database Interface Driver CD.............2-41
Technical Support ..............................................2-44
Customizing Your PRISM4 Software..................2-44
File / Manual Archive ........................................2-55
PRISM4 for Windows TOC - 1

User Manual
Getting Around in PRISM4 for Windows 3
Starting PRISM4 .................................................. 3-1
The Main Window .............................................. 3-3
Using Your Mouse and Keyboard ........................ 3-6
Review of Standard Windows Operations ............ 3-8
Menu Overview................................................. 3-14
PRISM4 Terminology ........................................ 3-22
Hierarchy List Operations.................................. 3-25
Exiting PRISM4 for Windows............................ 3-41
Building Your PRISM4

for Windows Database 4
Creating a Paper Copy Database.......................... 4-1
Creating a New PRISM4 Database ....................... 4-3
Creating a New PRISM4 Plant ............................. 4-4
Creating a New PRISM4 SET .............................. 4-7
Adding a Machine............................................... 4-8
Adding POINTs to a Machine ............................. 4-9
Adding MARLIN data manager
POINTs to a Machine..................................... 4-52
Adding UCC (OIL) POINTs to a Machine......... 4-70
Modifying POINT Setups .................................. 4-71
Creating a New Workspace ............................... 4-76
Data Collection ROUTEs and

Other Data Transfer Operations 5
Overview............................................................. 5-1
How To Build ROUTEs....................................... 5-2
Downloading ROUTEs
To the Microlog or MARLIN.......................... 5-15
Downloading Directly from an Active Hierarchy 5-25
Checking the Picolog's Status ............................ 5-27
Downloading ROUTEs to the Picolog................ 5-28
Uploading Data from the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager............... 5-30
TOC - 2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Processing Uploaded
Microlog or MARLIN data manager Data .......5-32
Uploading Picolog Data .....................................5-41
Uploading CM20 Data .......................................5-42
Manual Data Transfer ........................................5-43
Displaying Graphic Plots 6

Overview..............................................................6-1
How To Display Graphic Plots .............................6-2
The Machine Attributes Window..........................6-5
Manipulating Graphic Displays..........................6-14
Single Trend Plots..............................................6-15
Overlay Trend Plots ...........................................6-27
FFT Spectrum Plots............................................6-29
Overlay FFT Spectral Plots.................................6-56
Waterfall Plots ...................................................6-58
Multiple POINT Waterfall Plots.........................6-67
Palogram Plots ...................................................6-69
Time Waveform Plots.........................................6-70
Overlay Time Waveform Plots ...........................6-75
Displaying Phase Information ............................6-77
A Note About Windows System Resources .........6-83
Generating and Printing PRISM4 Reports 7

Overview..............................................................7-1
Exception Report..................................................7-3
Displaying Plots from Reports............................7-14
Last Measurement Report...................................7-15
Inspection Report ...............................................7-16
Overdue Report ..................................................7-18
Upload Report....................................................7-20
History Report....................................................7-22
ROUTE Statistics Report....................................7-23
SET Statistics Report .........................................7-25
Database Setup Report .......................................7-27
UCC Test ID Report...........................................7-28

User Manual
Quick Report ..................................................... 7-29
Importing / Exporting PRISM4 Data A

Overview............................................................ A-1
Export ................................................................ A-2
Import ................................................................ A-6
General File Layout – ASCII Plant Hierarchy....A-10
General File Layout – Route Hierarchy..............A-12
General File Layout – Workspace Hierarchy......A-13
General Layout – MIMOSA.INI
Export Configuration File...............................A-14
General Layout – MIMOSA
Export Data (MED) Files ...............................A-15
Database Conversion Utilities B

2 4
Converting PRISM Data to PRISM Format.......B-1
Converting PRISM4 1.20 or
Newer Data to Version 1.3x Format .................B-9
Toolbar Tools and Important Keystrokes C

Important Keystrokes ..........................................C-1
Toolbar Tools ......................................................C-1
Microlog Detection Methods D

True Peak Detection ........................................... D-1
Network Administrator Options E

Overview.............................................................E-1
Adding or Deleting PRISM4 Users.......................E-2
Assigning a System Password..............................E-4

User Manual
Modem Communications F
Overview............................................................. F-1
PRISM4 for Windows
Communication Preferences............................. F-1
Microlog Communication Preference Settings..... F-2
Modem Communication Settings ........................ F-3
Supported Modems ............................................. F-3
To Upload/Download From a Remote Microlog .. F-4
Troubleshooting Modem Communications .......... F-7
Data Delete Utility G

Overview.............................................................G-1
Deleting Data......................................................G-1
Configuring the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility.......G-7
Utility Programs H
Overview.............................................................H-1
Glossary of Terms
Index

User Manual
User Manual
1
Introduction to PRISM4 for Windows
About This Manual
As you'll soon realize, PRISM4 for Windows is easy to

install and use. Chances are, after reading what you need
to know in order to get going, you won't use this manual
except as a quick reference or reminder.
This manual helps you install your PRISM4 for Windows
software, create your PRISM4 machinery database of
measurement POINTs, download and upload
measurements between PRISM4 and your data collection
device, and generate graphic plots and reports for
analyzing the measured machinery's condition. This
manual's chapters are organized according to the steps in
this process (a chapter overview follows on page 2).
Ø In writing this manual we assume you
are familiar with common DOS and
Windows operations. Refer to your
DOS or Windows guides for information
in these areas.
As you use this manual, you'll discover certain conventions
used:
Bold type is used to indicate text that appears in a
PRISM4 for Windows menu, window, or dialog box.
Italics are used to emphasize important information.
Ø - are used to indicate notes to the reader.
Step-by-step procedures are sequenced using
bullets, •.
4
PRISM for Windows 1-1
User Manual
Chapter Overview
Chapter Overview
This User Manual is divided into 7 chapters and 8

appendices:
Chapter 1, Introduction - Introduces manual conventions
and overviews the PRISM4 for Windows/Microlog System
and the PRISM4 for Windows/UCC CM20 Analysis
System.
Chapter 2, Installation and Setup - Describes how to
install the PRISM4 for Windows software to your
computer's hard disk and how to customize PRISM4 for
Windows' setup.
Chapter 3, Getting Around in PRISM4 for Windows -
Introduces PRISM4 for Windows conventions (main
screens, terminology, menus, and tool bar buttons),
reviews standard Windows operations, introduces the
hierarchy list, and discusses hierarchy list procedures in
detail.
Chapter 4, Building Your PRISM4 for Windows
Database - Describes in detail how to organize your
machinery measurement POINTs into PRISM4 plants,
SETs, machines, and measurement POINTs. Also details
how to establish PRISM4's many alarm criteria, including:
Scalar Alarms
Spectral Band Alarms
Spectrum Alarm Envelopes
Polar Vector Alarm Acceptance Regions
Database editing procedures using PRISM4's Modify
Setup and Modify by Attribute options are also explained
in detail.
Chapter 5, Creating, Downloading, and Uploading
PRISM4 ROUTEs - Describes how to create PRISM4
measurement collection ROUTEs, how to download
ROUTEs to the data collection devices, how to upload
4
1-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Chapter Overview
measurements from the data collection devices, and how to

manually enter data into the PRISM4 database.
Chapter 6, Displaying Graphic Plots - Describes
methods for displaying collected machinery measurements
in graphic plot format, and describes in detail PRISM4's
toolbar and Display menu options for manipulating
graphic plots to obtain useful analysis data.
Chapter 7, Generating and Printing PRISM4 Reports -
Describes in detail how to create report templates and how
to generate and print PRISM4 reports.
Appendix A, Importing / Exporting PRISM4 Data -
Describes export and import procedures for copying
PRISM4 data to other PRISM4 databases.
Appendix B, Database Conversion Utilities - Describes
how to convert PRISM2 (DOS) databases to Windows
format and how to update PRISM4 1.10 databases to
version 1.3x format.
Appendix C, Toolbar Tools and Important Keystrokes -
Offers an overview of PRISM4's toolbars and keystroke
combinations.
Appendix D, Microlog Detection Methods - Details the
Microlog's (version 3.30 or later firmware) true peak and
true peak to peak detection methods.
Appendix E, Network Administrator Options -
Describes how to add or delete users from the PRISM4
system.
Appendix F, Modem Communications - Describes in
detail modem communications between PRISM4 and the
Microlog.
Appendix G, Data Delete Utility - Describes in detail
how to configure the data delete utility and how to delete
data from your database.
4
User Manual
A Note to Experienced PRISM2 (DOS) Users
Appendix H, Utility Programs - Describes the utility

programs automatically installed with PRISM4 for
Windows software.
A Note to Experienced PRISM2 (DOS) Users
PRISM4 for Windows uses the Microsoft Windows

operating environment to provide an easy to use, powerful
machinery condition monitoring software package.
PRISM4's ability to display multiple report and graphic
plot windows on one screen allows easier and more
powerful machinery analysis (imagine easily displaying a
suspect POINT's trend, trend projection, current FFT,
baseline FFT, waterfall plot, and current time waveform,
all on one screen!).
Most PRISM2 features (and many new features) are
present in PRISM4 for Windows, however, the manner in
which the two programs operate is very different. Many
familiar methods of operation have been replaced by
Windows type methods of operation (point and click, drag
and drop, using the toolbar, etc).
Allow yourself time to become familiar with these
powerful new Windows operations. In time you will
appreciate how PRISM4 for Windows provides you with an
easy to use, powerful machinery condition monitoring
solution.
4
User Manual
What is the PRISM4/Microlog System?
What is the PRISM4/Microlog System?
A PRISM4/Microlog System (Figure 1-1) consists of three

components:
1. A Microlog Collector/Analyzer,
2. A host computer with PRISM4 for Windows (or
equivalent software), and
3. A Support Module.
Figure 1 - 1.
The PRISM4/Microlog System.
Along with Microlog data transfer, PRISM4 for Windows

also provides MARLIN System and Picolog data transfer,
UCC CM20 data transfer, and Manual data transfer.
These methods are discussed in detail later in this manual.
4
User Manual
The Microlog Collector/Analyzer
The Microlog Collector/Analyzer
The Microlog is a lightweight, hand-held, data acquisition

and storage terminal (Figure 1-2). It collects machinery
vibration and temperature measurements and performs
detailed analyses in harsh industrial environments.
Figure 1 - 2.
The Microlog Portable Data Collector.
The Microlog performs all the tasks required of a

machinery predictive maintenance program. It collects
both dynamic (vibration) and static (temperature, flow,
pressure) measurements.
4
User Manual
What is the PRISM4/UCC CM20 Analysis System?
Vibration measurements are collected with a hand-

held/magnetic-held probe or from an installed monitoring
system. Temperature measurements are collected with a
non-contact infrared sensor or with a contact probe.
Values read from machinery gauges and indicators are
entered into the Microlog using the alphanumeric keys on
the Microlog's keyboard. Observations can be recorded in
plain language or as coded notes.
The Microlog automatically performs all filing, trending,
and reporting of measurement data, with minimum effort
and with minimum interaction.
In addition to its data collection features, the Microlog is a
powerful analyzer. It is capable of displaying Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) frequency spectra and time domain
waveforms on its liquid crystal display (LCD) screen.
Ø At times this manual refers to the
Microlog Collector/Analyzer. Microlog
operations are not discussed in this
PRISM4 for Windows User Manual. For
information on the Microlog
Collector/Analyzer, reference your
Microlog User Manual.
What is the PRISM4/UCC CM20 Analysis System?
A PRISM4/UCC CM20 Analysis System consists of two

components:
1. A UCC CM20 Data Collector/Analyzer, and
2. A host computer with PRISM4 for Windows (or
equivalent software).
4
User Manual
The UCC CM20 Collector/Analyzer
The UCC CM20 Collector/Analyzer
The UCC CM20 is a portable 6-channel data acquisition

and storage device with a removable and rechargeable
battery pack. The UCC CM20 collects and counts
particles from oil to provide accurate contamination
measurement results.
For PRISM4 for Windows software use, the CM20’s cable
connects directly to your host computer’s standard serial
port.
The CM20 has two probes which you detach from the unit
and insert directly into the machinery while it is running.
One provides the oil’s access into the CM20 from the
machine, the other returns the oil to the machine after
flowing through the CM20 for analysis. As it flows
through the CM20, the oil drops into a chamber where
particles are counted in six different ranges: from 100µ to
2µ. The CM20’s six channels refer to the six distinct
particle sizes: 100µ, 50µ, 25µ, 15µ, 5µ, and 2µ (µ =
micron) particles.
A detachable hand-held device allows you to print test
results using a built-in printer on the CM20 (for stand-
alone use). Test results are also displayed on the hand-
held LCD display. You can switch between two standard
types of tests, ISO and NAS. With its keypad, you can
input messages and information to the CM20.
Ø At times this manual refers to the UCC
CM20 Collector/Analyzer. CM20
operations are not discussed in this
PRISM4 for Windows User Manual. For
information on the UCC CM20
Collector/Analyzer, reference your UCC
CM20 User Manual.
4
User Manual
The Host Computer
Using the CM20

The general procedure for using the CM20 is:
4
With PRISM
• Create and configure each machine’s particle count
POINTs and their alarm settings (up to six POINTs
per machine). A UCC Test ID is automatically
associated with each machine’s particle count
POINTs.
• Run the UCC Test ID report. This report displays the
UCC Test IDs associated with each machine on which
particle count POINTs are set up. You will carry this
report during data collection and input these UCC
Test IDs into the UCC CM20.
On the UCC CM20
• Using the UCC Test ID report, walk the “oil” ROUTE
to collect each machine’s particle count data. As you
run each machine’s particle count “test”, input the
test’s UCC Test ID. The input ID is stored with the
test’s particle count data in the CM20.
4
With PRISM
• Upload data stored in the CM20 to PRISM4’s
database.
• Use PRISM4 to trend particle count POINTs and
generate PRISM4 reports.
The Host Computer
The host computer has a Pentium 166 or higher CPU

(minimum Pentium 100 or equivalent), with 32 Mbytes of
RAM (minimum 16 Mbytes), and a 3 Gbyte hard disk with
at least 30 Mbytes free for the program's installation; and
4
User Manual
PRISM4 for Windows Software
enough free disk space to store your PRISM4 measurement

database (whose size depends on the number of monitored
POINTs). Together, the host computer and PRISM4 for
Windows software perform database management,
trending, display, and reporting functions for the Microlog
System. Host computer specifications and setup are
described in Chapter 2, Installation and Setup.
The easy-to-use PRISM4 for Windows software works with

DADs (Microlog, Picolog, UCC CM20, and MARLIN data
acquisition devices) to assist machinery maintenance
personnel in managing and analyzing their collected data.
PRISM4 for Windows automatically uploads measurement
data from DADs and performs the tedious clerical work
required in sorting, storing, and pre-analyzing
measurement data. PRISM4 for Windows is used to easily
configure measurement POINTs (a machinery location at
which measurement data is collected), for downloading
measurement POINT setups to DADs, for database
manipulation of DADs’ collected data, and to graphically
display and generate reports on DADs’ collected
measurement data.
Exception Reports - PRISM4 for Windows automatically
compares current measurement values to past
measurement values, and to pre-defined alarm setpoints to
detect changes from normal machinery conditions. Using
hierarchy list alarm status indicators and detailed printed
reports, PRISM4 for Windows alerts maintenance
personnel to alarm conditions (exceptions from normal
conditions).
Analysis - PRISM4 for Windows displays and prints
various plots and reports used for analyzing machinery
condition (Figure 1-3).
4
1 - 10 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Figure 1 - 3.
Two Graphic Displays of a PRISM4 Measurement.
Trend plots, FFT spectra (including waterfall and

palogram plots), time waveforms, and polar vector plots
are easily displayed to help determine if machinery
condition changes are occurring, and if so, to help with
analyzing the cause of machinery condition changes.
For the easiest and most effective use of the Microlog,
Picolog, UCC CM20, or MARLIN System, you should:
Use PRISM4 for Windows to:
• Organize your plant into database plants, SETs and
machines.
• Add measurement POINTs to these database
machines, configuring each POINT's measurement
and alarm settings as it is created.
• Create a collection ROUTE of measurement POINTs.
4
PRISM for Windows 1 - 11
User Manual
The Support Module
• Download the collection ROUTE to the Microlog,

MARLIN data manager, or Picolog data collector.
Use the Microlog, Picolog, or MARLIN data manager
to:
• Walk the ROUTE, collecting data for each
pre-determined measurement POINT.
Use PRISM4 for Windows to:
• Upload the collected data to PRISM4 for Windows.
• Use PRISM4 for Windows plots and reports to
analyze, trend, report, and store measurement data.
The Support Module
The Support Module (Figure 1-4) provides a connection

between the host computer and the Microlog. The Support
Module contains the system battery charger and a spare
battery for the Microlog. This spare battery is charging
whenever the Support Module/battery charger is connected
to an AC power source.
Ø The Microlog's internal battery is
constantly being charged through its data
collection cables whenever it is attached
to the powered-on Support Module.
4
User Manual
The Support Module
Figure 1 - 4.
The Microlog Support Module.
Ø For more information on Microlog

Support Modules, reference your
Microlog User Manual.
4
User Manual
The Support Module
User Notes
4
User Manual
2
Installation and Setup
Hardware and Software Requirements
We highly recommend the following hardware

configurations for maximum PRISM4 for Windows
performance.
• A Pentium 166 or higher CPU (minimum Pentium
100).
• A recommended 32 megabytes of RAM (minimum
16).
• A super VGA card and monitor must be installed to
view high resolution plots. To view these images, a
Windows video driver capable of 256 colors must be
installed. These video drivers are usually supplied
with the video board.
• A math co-processor is mandatory.
• A 3 gigabyte hard disk drive with at least 30
megabytes of free disk space to install the PRISM4 for
Windows program, the associated support files, and
the demo database; and enough free disk space to store
your PRISM4 measurement database (whose size
depends on the number of monitored POINTs).
• A CD-ROM drive is necessary for installation.
• A tape backup system.
The following is a list of software requirements:
• MS DOS version 5.0 or newer.
• Microsoft Windows 95 or newer.
PRISM4 for Windows 2-1

User Manual
Launching the Installation Program
Launching the Installation Program
The PRISM4 1.35 installation program is available on CD

only. Launching the PRISM4 version 1.35 installation
program differs depending upon your version of Windows
(Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows 95/NT). Each
type of installation is described below.
To launch the install program using Windows

95, Windows 98, or Windows NT:
• With your computer running in Microsoft Windows
95 or Windows NT, insert the CD into your CD drive.
The install program automatically launches.
Installation options are:
Install Applications - Lists PRISM4 Solutions
applications that may be installed from the CD.
Click an application’s name to launch its installation
program.
SKF-CM Web Site - View SKF’s Web Site from the
CD.
Install Utilities - Lists PRISM4 Solutions utilities
that may be installed from the CD. Click a utility’s
name to launch its installation program.
Ø Utility installations utilized the same
procedures described for application
installations.
Training - Includes the following:
PRISM4 1.35 Features - Opens a help file from
which you can run movies describing PRISM4 1.35's
new features.
Speed Tagging - Opens a help file from which you
can run movies describing PRISM4 1.35's Speed
Tagging function.
2-2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Installation Options Overview
• To install PRISM4 1.35, select the Install Applications

option, then select PRISM4 1.35. The setup program
displays the Welcome screen.
Ø When the install program is properly

launched and the Welcome screen
displays, the PRISM4 for Windows
installation process is identical for all
Windows versions ( 95, 98, and NT).
Figure 2 - 1.

User Manual
• Read the Welcome screen information carefully, then

click the Next command button to proceed with the
installation.
The installation program displays the Software License
Agreement screen.
• Read the license agreement carefully and click Yes to
accept the license terms. The Setup Type screen
displays.
Figure 2 - 2.
Options in the Setup Type dialog are:

Create Icons - Allows the network system
administrator to create PRISM4 program icons on
workstations accessing a network's PRISM4
program.

User Manual
Typical Installation
Custom - Allows you to specify which component(s)

of the PRISM4 installation to install, and to specify
directories for their installation.
Typical Installation - Automatically installs the
PRISM4 program, the demo database, and all support
files in a default directory structure.
These installation options are detailed in subsequent
sections.
A Typical Installation automatically installs the PRISM4

program, the demo database, and all support files in a
default directory structure.
• From the Setup Type screen, select the Typical
Installation option, and click the Next command
button.
The Select Installation Options dialog appears and
prompts you to select one of three installation options.
• Install PRISM4 (First Time Installation or Version
Upgrade)
• Upgrade Number of Users
• Add Mimosa Export Capabilities to Existing
Installation
Ø We describe the Install PRISM4 (First
Time…) option in detail. The Upgrade
Number of Users and Add Mimosa
Export… options utilize the same
procedures.
• Select the Install PRISM4 (First Time…) option and
click the Next command button. An Information

User Manual
dialog displays, informing of a required “Product

Key” number:
“You have selected an installation option that
requires a Product Key. If you do not have a
Product Key, you may proceed with this installation
by selecting the ‘Evaluation’ option on the following
screen. Note, ‘Evaluation’ installations are not fully
functional. If necessary, contact your SKF
Condition Monitoring representative to acquire the
proper Product Key.”
• Click Next to proceed. A Choose the Installation

Type dialog displays, prompting you to select either a
Licensed or Evaluation installation. If you select
Licensed, you are prompted to enter the Product Key
number.
Ø An Evaluation installation is for
demonstration purposes only, a Product
Key number is not required.
• After making your installation option selection, click
Next to display the Enter Information dialog, where
you Enter the Product Key number (the 11-digit
number found on a sticker on the CD case)
(i.e., iKey: xxxxxxxxxxx). After entering the product
key number, click the Next command button.
The Select Program Folder screen appears and prompts
you to select the program folder in which to install the
PRISM4 for Windows program.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 3.
• Click the Next command button to accept the default

(PRISM4 Solutions) program folder or select an
existing folder, or create a new program folder by
entering the new program folder name in the
Program Folders: text box.
The installation program prompts you to select the
installation drive and directory in which to install the
PRISM4 for Windows program (default = [windows
drive]:\P4SOL).
Ø To install to a different directory other
than the default, use the Browse button
to quickly locate an existing directory, or
to create a new directory by entering the

User Manual
new directory name in the Path: text box

and clicking OK.
• Point and click on a disk drive and directory with at
least 30 Mbytes of free disk space and click the Next
command button.
Ø You must install PRISM4 for Windows
in a different directory than PRISM4
Surveyor.
The Enter Information screen displays prompting for
your product serial number.
• Enter your serial number (found on a label included
with your software and is included on the packing list)
and click the Next command button. The Select
Components screen displays.
Figure 2 - 4.

User Manual
Ø The Select Components screen only

displays if you are installing to a
directory that does not contain the
PRISM4 program. This screen is
bypassed if you are upgrading from an
earlier PRISM4 version located in the
specified directory.
Ø The PRISM4 1.2X to PRISM4 1.3X
conversion program automatically
installs if an upgrade is detected.
• If database conversion is required, select the necessary
conversion option and click the Next command
button.
The Start Copying Files screen displays.
Figure 2 - 5.

User Manual
• Review the information in the Current Settings area.

If changes are necessary, click the Back button to
return to the previous screen(s).
• When satisfied with the settings, click the Next
command button, the installation program proceeds to
create the specified installation directory (default =
P4SOL) on the specified drive, and additional
subdirectories branching from the specified directory.
Program and sample data files are then copied into
their appropriate directories.
Figure 2 - 6.
PRISM4 Directory Structure.
Ø If the PRISM4 1.20 to PRISM4 1.35

database conversion option was selected,
the 12x_conv directory is created. If the
PRISM2 1.22 or later to PRISM4 1.20
database conversion option was selected,
the p2top4 directory is created.
After all specified files are installed, you are prompted to
view the Readme file. Click Yes to open the Windows
Wordpad (Win 95, Win 98, or NT 4.0) program and
display the Readme file.
• After reading the file, close the Readme file, the Setup
Complete screen displays. Click Finish to complete
and exit the setup program.
2 - 10 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Custom Installation
The installation program creates the PRISM4 Solutions

Windows program group (if none exists), and in this group
creates the PRISM4 for Windows 1.35 program icon, the
PRISM4 User Administrator icon, and the PRISM4
Windows 1.35 Read Me icon.
Ø Existing icons with the same name in the
program group are overwritten.
Ø If conversion options were selected
during installation, icons are created for
the selected conversion program(s).
Custom Installation
The Custom Installation option allows you to specify

which program, demo, and support files to install, and to
specify directories for the installation.
• From the Setup Type screen, select the Custom
option. The Select Components dialog box displays.
PRISM4 for Windows 2 - 11

User Manual
Custom Installation
Figure 2 - 7.
• Use Components check boxes to specify the portions

of the PRISM4 system you wish to install. Select all
appropriate options and click Next.
An Information dialog displays, informing of a required
“Product Key” number:
“You have selected an installation option that
requires a Product Key. If you do not have a
Product Key, you may proceed with this installation
by selecting the ‘Evaluation’ option on the following
screen. Note, ‘Evaluation’ installations are not fully
functional. If necessary, contact your SKF
Condition Monitoring representative to acquire the
proper Product Key.”
• Click Next to proceed. A Choose the Installation

Type dialog displays, prompting you to select either a

User Manual
Custom Installation
Licensed or Evaluation installation. If you select

Licensed, you will need to enter the Product Key
number.
Ø An Evaluation installation is for
demonstration purposes only, you do not
need to enter a Product Key number.
• After making your installation option selection, click
Next to display the Enter Information dialog, where
you Enter the Product Key number (the 11-digit
number found on the sticker on the CD case)
(i.e., iKey: xxxxxxxxxxx). After entering the product
key number, click the Next command button.
program folder in which the PRISM4 for Windows
program is to be installed.
• Click Next to accept the default program folder
(PRISM4 Solutions) or select an existing folder, or
create a new program folder by entering the new
program folder name in the Program Folders: text
box.
installation drive and directory in which to install the
• Point and click on a disk drive and directory with at
least 30 Mbytes of free disk space and click the Next
command button.
• If PRISM4 is detected in the specified directory, you
are prompted whether to upgrade the files in this
directory to 1.35. Click Yes to upgrade.
Ø Click No if you wish to keep existing
files and install to a different directory.
Use the Browse button to select a
different directory, or create a new

User Manual
Create a PRISM4 Icon for Remote Network Use
directory by entering a new directory

name in the Path: text box.
The Start Copying Files screen displays. The Current
Settings area displays the user specified information.
• Review the information in the Current Settings area.
If changes are necessary, click the Back button to
return to the previous screen(s).
• When satisfied with the settings, click the Next
command button, and the installation program installs
the selected components.
After all specified files are installed, the Setup Complete
dialog displays.
• Click Finish to complete and exit the setup program.
After a network installation, the system administrator uses

the Create Icons option to create a PRISM4 Solutions
group and PRISM4 for Windows program icon (on
computers accessing the PRISM4 for Windows program
installed on the network's fileserver).
Ø The Setup Type dialog's Create Icons
option must be run using a CD-ROM
drive. However, the Setup Type dialog's
Custom installation option allows you to
select to install the Create Icons Setup
(the create icons installation program)
onto the network. The system
administrator may then create icons on
remote workstations using the network.
This option is useful when remote
workstations do not have CD-ROM
drives.

User Manual
To create a PRISM4 Solutions group and

PRISM4 for Windows program icon:
• From the installation program's Setup Type screen,
select the Create Icons option and click the Next
button. The Select Program Folder dialog box
displays.
• Click the Next command button to accept the default
program folder (PRISM4 Solutions) or select an
existing folder, or create a new program folder by
entering the new program folder name in the
Program Folders: text box.
The installation program prompts you to select the drive
and directory in which to install the PRISM4 for Windows
program.
Ø If you don't wish to install in the P4SOL
directory, use the Browse button to
specify a different existing directory than
the default directory (P4SOL).
• Click Next. The Create Icons - Select Components
screen displays.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 8.
• Select the program for which to create an icon

(PRISM4 for Windows 1.35, PRISM4 Surveyor
1.35, PRISM4 LMU-MIM Driver 1.35, or Lock
Manager) and click Next.
You are prompted whether to specify a user name if you
selected PRISM4 for Windows 1.35 or PRISM4
Surveyor 1.35.
Ø If Lock Manager is selected, you are not
asked to specify a user name.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 9.
• Click Yes to specify a user name.

• Enter up to eight alphanumeric characters in the
Create Icon - Enter Information screen and click
Next.
You are prompted whether more than one user needs
access to the database simultaneously.
• Choose Yes for simultaneous database access.
You are prompted to select the access mode you wish to
use.
• Select the appropriate access mode and click the Next
command button.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 10.
Ø If Shared mode with database

password is selected, the following Lock
Manager information screens are
bypassed.
You are prompted whether to name a Lock Manager.
Ø If Lock Manager using TCP/IP is
selected, you must enter a Lock Manager
name.
• Select Yes to name a Lock Manager, and click Next.
• Enter the Lock Manager name, and click Next.
• Enter text that identifies the icon and click Next.

User Manual
Network Installation
The Icon Creation Confirmation screen displays the

selected information for the icon.
• Click Next to complete the icon creation. You are
prompted whether to create another icon.
• Click No, and the Setup Complete screen displays.
• Click Finish to exit the setup program.
IMPORTANT:
Network installation should be attempted only by a
qualified network system administrator. Call SKF
Condition Monitoring Technical Support if you have
any questions regarding your network installation.
Network Requirements:
Network requirements are minimal to operate PRISM4 in
Network mode:
Ø The network operating system (Novell,
3COM, NT, Pathworks, etc.) must fully
emulate the DOS file system.
The term “DOS File System” identifies a system that
supports all DOS file attributes (Archive, Hidden, System,
Read Only, and Directory (a directory is a file with this
attribute set), and that supports the file functions supplied
by DOS (open, close, rename, delete, etc.). Also, the
network operating system (OS) must not interpret certain
characters as commands to the system. For example, some
UNIX-based networks interpret the ~ character to signal a
command to be executed by the network.

User Manual
Network Performance
The network's configuration affects system performance.
Known factors that adversely affect system performance
are installation on a WAN (Wide Area Network),
installation on a 4-bit LAN, or installation on a highly
loaded LAN.
Wide Area Networks connect computers over great
distances. Data communication technology utilized in
these networks is typically slower than the type used in
modern LAN systems. This communication bottleneck
can adversely affect system performance.
Older 4-bit LAN systems do not have the performance of
modern 8 or 16 bit LAN systems. Though rarely seen
today, PRISM4 should not be installed on these types of
network systems.
Installing PRISM4 on a heavily loaded LAN system is not
recommended. System performance will generally not be
acceptable. Steps should be taken to shift the system to
another LAN system with adequate capacity.
Simultaneous Database Access

There are two ways of installing PRISM4 for simultaneous
database access:
• Database password
• RAIMA Lock Manager program

User Manual
The following table lists available password protection for

PRISM4 for Windows operations.
OPERATION P4ADMIN DATABASE //SECLVL1

AVAILABLE IN VERSION: 1.00 + 1.23+ 1.30+
Change Databases Protected Protected P
Set Speed (Spectrum) Protected * Protected *
Export Files Protected Protected Protected +
Import File Protected Protected Protected +
Manual Archive Protected Protected Protected +
Event Log - Edit POINT Setup Protected Protected Protected +
Event Log - Clear Protected Protected Protected +
Workspace - Add/Delete Protected Protected Protected +
Routes - Protected Protected Protected +
Add/Delete/Create/Route Info
Routes/Workspace - Protected Protected Protected +
Add/Copy/Move POINTS
Plants - Protected Protected Protected +
Add/Delete/Create/Plant Info
Plants - Move/Copy/Add Protected Protected Protected +
/Delete Nodes
Sets - Create/Delete/Set Info Protected Protected Protected +
Machine - Create/Delete Protected Protected Protected +
/Machine Info
Machine Notes Protected * Protected *
Modify by Attribute Protected Protected Protected +
POINTS - Create/Delete Protected Protected Protected +
/POINT Setup
Duplicate Toolbar Protected Protected Protected +
Clear Bearing/Spectral Protected+
Bands/Envelope Alarm/Speed
Reference
Assign Bearing/Frequency Protected+
Marker/Spectral
Bands/Spectral Bands from
POINT/Link Speed Reference

User Manual
Modify Coded Notes/Operator Protected+

IDs
Manual Entry Protected Protected D
Process Data from Microlog Protected Protected D
Picolog Upload & Process Protected Protected D
UCC CM20 Upload & Process Protected Protected D
FAM frequency Changes in Protected Protected D
Spectra Display
Download by Plant Protected D
Exception Reports Protected D
Quick Reports/Exception Protected D
Upload Picolog (by ROUTE) Protected D
Filtering Protected D
NOTES:
• DATABASE password protection takes precedence
over P4ADMIN protection (use
PRISM4.EXE /P4PRO or PRISM4.EXE /DBPASS
command line parameters).
• /SECLVL1 is a command line parameter that turns
off protection checks for Machine Notes and Set
Speed features. This command line supersedes any
password set for P4ADMIN protection or
DATABASE protection.
• The “Protected” symbol indicates that the function
requires a password prior to completion of the
operation (if the 30 minutes since the last password
entered timer has expired). Note - changing from or
to a database that is password protected resets the
timer.
• The “Protected +” symbol indicates that password
protection only occurs if P4ADMIN or DATABASE
protection is active.

User Manual
• The “Protected *” indicates that these functions are

only password protected if the /SECLVL1 protection
is not active.
• The “Protected P” symbol indicates that password
protection only occurs if P4ADMIN protection is
active and DATABASE protection is not active.
• The “Protected D” symbol indicates that password
protection only occurs if DATABASE protection is
active.
Simultaneous Database Access - Database Password
(one user has write privileges; many have read
privileges)
On systems where only one user has access to write to a
database, but many users have read privileges, the
/DBPASS switch ensures that a password is required
before writing to the database.
Ø This method requires a system
administrator to supervise database
access using passwords. PRISM4 does
not prevent database corruption if two
users know the password and are writing
to the database simultaneously.
PRISM4 for Windows uses a database engine called
RAIMA produced by dbVista of Issaquah, Washington.
RAIMA handles multiple access writes to a database
through an independent program, Lock Manager for
Windows. RAIMA creates a file, VISTA.TAF in each
database. Lock Manager uses this file and a file list in
memory to ensure that only one user is writing to a file at
any one time.

User Manual
THE RAIMA DATABASE MANAGER

CANNOT MANAGE TWO PEOPLE WRITING
TO THE SAME FILE AT THE SAME TIME.
DATABASE CORRUPTION OCCURS IN THIS
CONDITION.
The database protection method ensures that a user must
enter a password any time a database operation that could
involve writing to the database occurs. Once a password is
given, the user is given 30 minutes of database access
before the password is required again.
If two users have the password (rights to change a
particular database at the same time), there is the potential
for database corruption.
Ø SKF Condition Monitoring strongly
recommends that the password be private
to one individual.
Because the database is limited to one user having write
privileges (through the database password protection),
Lock Manager is no longer needed to ensure database
integrity. Database integrity is passed to the system
administrator. To allow RAIMA to think the databases are
shared, PRISM4 needs the command line parameter
/DBPASS. This command line parameter (formally
/P4PRO), will not allow writing to any database without
the password. If a database does not have the password
set, the database is read-only.
Simultaneous Database Access - RAIMA Lock
Manager Utility (write privileges)
This type of network installation allows a number of users
to share the database at the same time (allowing them to
upload, download, process, create, and delete items
simultaneously).
To ensure database integrity while operating in the multi-
user access mode, the RAIMA Lock Manager utility must
be running in the background. Lock Manager, supplied

User Manual
with PRISM4, intercepts read and write requests to the

PRISM4 database files and sequences their execution to
preserve data integrity. Lock Manager is a Microsoft
Windows product that communicates to other PRISM4
programs (for example, PRISM4 Pro) on the network via
the network communication protocols NETBIOS or
TCP/IP. Lock Manager must be running at all times when
PRISM4 or the PRISM4 On-Line System are accessing a
PRISM4 database. It is recommended that Lock Manager
be run from a workstation that is never routinely shut
down. This is particularly important for the PRISM4 On-
Line System, which operates on a 24-hour basis.
The /N (NETBIOS protocol) or /TCP (TCP/IP protocol)
command line parameter must be added if Lock Manager
is operated on the network.
Ø When using the /TCP command line
option, the /A:[domain address or name]
must be added to the command line. If
the domain address or name is unknown,
run Lock Manager. The Lock Manager
window's title bar displays the domain
address (numeric portion) and the
domain name (alphabetic portion).
Using the installation program's Create
Icon option does this automatically.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 11
Lock Manager Operation:

In the following figure, Lock Manager displays its General
Status mode which displays users logged into PRISM4, the
database files, and system statistics.
Lock Manager is run with a -mb command line parameter
for NETBIOS operations or a -mc command line
parameter for TCP/IP operations.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 12.
The User Report button displays the following screen.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 13.
The User Report screen displays a list of each user

currently accessing the database and their user status.
• Click the View User button to display the files and
their lock status by user.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 14.
Information contained in this screen is stored in the

VISTA.TAF file. The VISTA.TAF file contains
information as to which users are accessing the database,
and the mode /N (NETBIOS) or /TCP (TCP/IP) of access.
IMPORTANT:
The VISTA.TAF file must never be deleted while
PRISM4 or PRISM4 On-Line is running.

User Manual
On this screen, L(5) indicates that there are five files

currently locked by the user, roofuser. One of these five
locked files is PRISM4DB.D04. The “w” character
indicates that the file is being currently written to.
• Press the File Report button to display the following
screen.
Figure 2 - 15.
This display shows all the locked files for a given

database. It also shows which user controls a given
database file and any users waiting for files.

User Manual
Ø In PRISM4 On-Line, the preferred Lock

Manager location is the workstation that
is also running the PRISM4 On-Line
System. This ensures that Lock
Manager is available if the PRISM4 On-
Line System is running. Another
advantage to this setup is that no other
computers are required. The
disadvantage to this setup is that other
workstations that require Lock Manager
while running PRISM4 may experience
time-out errors if the PRISM4 On-Line
System is communicating extensively
with its data acquisition devices. This
situation should be rare and can be
corrected by pressing the OK button on
the error dialog box. In some cases,
PRISM4 may have to be restarted.
Lock Manager can also be operated from a workstation
running PRISM4. The advantage of this option is that no
other computer is required and the user of this workstation
can easily see what users are logged into the PRISM4
system. The chief disadvantage is that if this workstation
goes down or loses power, all users are disconnected from
the database and would need to reboot their system.
Running Lock Manager on a dedicated, secured
workstation is the optimum setup with regard to system
reliability. Performance is also enhanced with this option.
The main disadvantage with this setup is in devoting a
single computer to the task. This can be mitigated
somewhat by using an older computer which is not
acceptable for normal operation by users; for example, an
older 386 computer.

User Manual
“Generic” Network Installation Steps
Below are the basic steps required to install PRISM4 on

most networks.
Acquire Network Rights

• Before installing PRISM4 (and if applicable the
PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver), you must first decide
where on the network to install the PRISM4 files.
Your MIS department may need to grant appropriate
rights for access to this location.
For a Novel network, necessary rights are: Create, Erase,
File Scan (may not be needed on other systems), Modify,
Read, and Write.
Install PRISM4
• Create user names with P4ADMIN.EXE - Create one
user name for every user on the network.
• Create the appropriate icons in the PRISM4 Solutions
group window.
∗ If Lock Manager is required, add the /N
(NETBIOS) or /TCP (TCP/IP) /A:[domain
address or name] switch.
∗ Add the /U:<user name> switch, so users won’t
be confused and log on as the wrong user.
Ø Using the installation program's Create
• If using the LMU/MIM driver, verify the LAN card is
installed, and write down the DIP switch setting for
the IRQ and port number (reference the Installing the
Local Area Network (LAN) section in Chapter 1 of
your PRISM4 On-Line Systems User Manual).

User Manual
• If applicable, ensure the PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver

starts automatically when the computer powers up.
∗ Verify the computer can start and run Windows
without any user input.
∗ Place the PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver icon in
Window’s Startup group.
∗ Assign the LMU/MIM Driver icon the
appropriate command line parameters.
/N (NETBIOS) or /TCP (TCP/IP)
/A:[domain address or name] for Lock
Manager, if necessary
/U:<user name>
/D:<download option>
1 - Download on startup
2 - Download with new schedule on startup
3 - Download by list on startup
4 - Do not Download on startup
Convert Existing PRISM2 (DOS) Databases

• Run PRDIAGS on the PRISM2 database to verify
there are no errors.
• “Pack” the PRISM2 database.
• Create a directory in which the new PRISM4 database
will reside.
• Run P2TOP4.EXE and convert the PRISM2 database.
Enable NETBIOS or TCP/IP Network

Communication Protocol
Novel 3.X
• If NETBIOS communication protocol is desired, a
program called NETBIOS.EXE is supplied with the

User Manual
network operating system. NETBIOS.EXE is a TSR

that is loaded from the AUTOEXEC.BAT file before
Windows is called.
Ø TCP/IP communication does not require
an executable program, it is built into the
Novell Network/Windows 95 operating
system.
Other Networks
• Reference network specific documentation
∗ Windows Resource Kit
∗ Network documentation at the site
∗ Contact SKF Condition Monitoring Technical
Support
Install Lock Manager for Windows (LMW)

• Identify what type of Lock Manager system setup is to
be used. Options are:
∗ LMW installed on PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver
Computer.
∗ LMW installed on a dedicated Workstation.
∗ LMW installed on NT Server.
• LMW is installed in the P4SOL directory. Create an
icon for it in the Startup group using the -MB
(NETBIOS) or -MC (TCP/IP) command line
parameter.
Ø Using the installation program's Create

User Manual
Figure 2 - 16.
• Double-click the LMW icon to start the LMW

program.
The LMW program controls database access requests in a
first come first serve method, queuing subsequent requests
until primary request are satisfied.

User Manual
Test PRISM4 and, if applicable, the PRISM4

LMU/MIM Driver
• Run PRISM4 from its icon and verify that it runs and
can access the demo database using LMW.
∗ In PRISM4, select the proper database.
∗ Set up any other preferences necessary (see the
Customizing Your PRISM4 Software section
later in this chapter).
∗ Finish the conversion process by opening the
Select Plant dialog box. Click on the plant to
open and click the checkmark button. This may
take some time depending on the database’s
size.
• If applicable, run the PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver and
verify that it runs and can access the demo database
using LMW.
∗ Create an icon that is assigned the No
Download option.
Ø If a download is attempted, the program
will automatically try to use the LAN
card to communicate. We don’t want to
do this yet.
∗ Choose the On-Line System’s Setup Mode
when the system starts.
∗ Enter the File menu’s System Preferences and
select the appropriate database for the on-line
program.
∗ In On-line Preferences, verify that the IRQ and
port number match the SKF LAN card
(reference the Installing the Local Area
Network (LAN) section in Chapter 1 of your
PRISM4 On-Line Systems User Manual).

User Manual
∗ Set other Preferences as needed (reference the

Customizing Your PRISM4 Software section
later in this chapter).
If Applicable, Run the PRISM4 LMU/MIM

Driver from Startup
If the PRISM4 LMU/MIM driver is installed, your next
task is to verify that the P4OLS.EXE program starts and
downloads all of the LMUs/MIMs automatically.
• Exit Windows and reboot the computer. If everything
has been properly configured, P4OLS.EXE should
initiate and download all of the POINTs in the
database to all the LMUs and MIMs.
Verify the LMU/MIM Driver

If the PRISM4 LMU/MIM Driver is installed, run PRISM4
and verify it is working properly with the database
currently collecting live data from the PRISM4 LMU/MIM
Driver.
Lock Manager Tool - WCONSOLE.EXE

When everything is operating properly, run
WCONSOLE.EXE to view the Lock Manager window.
Ø Creating an icon for this program is
optional.
If the computer running LMW is at a remote site and not
easily accessed, you may add it as an icon for the user.
Lock Manager and SKF RAIMA Database

Programs
PRISM4 for Windows (P4WIN) and PRISM4 LMU/MIM
Driver (P4OLS) are SKF programs that use a RAIMA
database. RAIMA has been set up to use a Lock Manager
(LMW.EXE) program to resolve concurrent database use.

User Manual
The following is intended to explain how Lock Manager

and P4WIN and P4OLS work together.
Lock Manager has two command line parameters that
affect its communication protocol:
-mX - Mode X where X equals
b (netBios - default)
c (TCP) (Version 4.05 and higher)
-a NAME - Renames Lock Manager to be NAME (has no
effect on TCP mode). Defaults to lockmgr in netBios
mode, and is ###,.###.###.###xxxxx.xxxxxx.xxx in TCP
mode. In TCP Mode, Lock Manager automatically assigns
a two-part name, the first part is the IP address (i.e.,
123.456.78.9); the second part is the symbolic name
assigned to the computer by the network administrator
(i.e., joesmith.ext.company.com).
Examples:
Command Line Lock Manager Window Title
1. \P4SOL\LMW.EXE Lock Manager - 'lockmgr'
2. \P4SOL\LMW.EXE -mb Lock Manager - 'lockmgr'
3. \P4SOL\LMW.EXE -mb -a George Lock Manager - 'George'

4. \P4SOL\LMW.EXE -mc Lock Manager - '123.456.78.9 joesmith.ext.abc.com'
5. \P4SOL\LMW.EXE -mc -a George Lock Manager - '123.456.78.9 joesmith.ext.abc.com'
123.456.78.9 is the IP address, joesmith.ext.abc.com is the symbolic TCP address.
Ø As in example 7, the -a command line

parameter has no effect when using
TCP/IP mode.
PRISM4 for Windows and the LMU/MIM Driver have two
command line parameters that effect which protocol is
used to communicate with Lock Manager:
/XXX - Mode XXX where XXX equals

User Manual
N - Netbios
TCP - TCP/IP protocol (version 1.22 or higher)
/A:NAME - Uses Lock Manager NAME. Must be set
when using TCP/IP. Default values (lockmgr) will not
work in TCP/IP mode.
Examples:
Using the examples above, the correct PRISM4 for
Windows command line is:
1. \P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /N
2. \P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /N
3. \P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /N /A:George
4. \P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /TCP /A:123.456.78.9
or
5. \P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /TCP
/A:joesmith.ext.abc.com
Ø Both examples 6 and 7 are functionally
equivalent. The last one is preferable if
dynamically allocated IP addresses are
used in the target system (the user should
ask his network system administrator).
PRISM4 Pro reads a P2TOPRO.CFG file (located in the
P4PRO directory) to determine which protocol is used to
communicate with Lock Manager. The format of the
ASCII configuration file is:
Line 1: /MMM
Line 2 (optional): /A:Lock.Manager.Name
Where:
/ Forward slash - must be in the first
character
MMM Mode MMM where MMM equals
N - Netbios

User Manual
Overview of Database Access Modes
TCP - TCP/IP protocol (version 2.21 or

higher / 1.22 or higher)
Lock.Manager.Name - Optional. If present, must be
on the second line immediately after /A: (forward
slash, capital A, colon).
Examples:
1. /N
2. /N
3. /N
/A:George
4. /TCP
/A:123.456.78.9 or
5. /TCP
/A:joesmith.ext.abc.com
Ø Both examples 6 and 7 are functionally
equivalent. The last one is preferable if
dynamically allocated IP addresses are
used in the target system (the user should
ask his network system administrator).
PRISM4 databases can be accessed as follows:
No Locking
Databases are single user exclusive.
Advantages: Speed, smaller more
manageable databases.
Problems: No simultaneous access to
databases.
Requirements: None.
Command Line: None.

User Manual
DBPASS
Allows simultaneous database read access with one user
having write privileges.
Advantages: Does not require Lock
Manager.
Problems: Database corruption can occur
if password is used by two
users simultaneously.
Requirements: Requires a Network
Administrator to supervise
database access through
passwords. Passwords must be
set for every database directory.
Command Line: /DBPASS
NETBIOS Locking
Allows full simultaneous database access.
Advantages: Uses a stay resident program to
control access through
memory. Full simultaneous
database access that is
relatively quick.
Problems: NETBIOS is not easy to install
on some systems.
Requirements: Requires NETBIOS to be set
up by a competent Network
Administrator. Requires Lock
Manager to be installed and
running on a dedicated
computer.
Command Line: /N

User Manual
Using the Database Interface Driver CD
TCP/IP Locking
Allows full simultaneous database access.
Advantages: Uses a stay resident program to
control access through
memory. Full simultaneous
database access that is
relatively quick.
Problems: None.
Requirements: Requires Lock Manager to be
installed and running on a
dedicated computer.
Command Line: /TCP /A:[domain address or
name]
This driver is used if you have both PRISM4 Pro and

PRISM4 for Windows installed on your computer.
If you use PRISM4 Pro with PRISM4 for Windows data,
you must install the Database Interface Driver program
(which is supplied with both PRISM4 for Windows and
PRISM4 Pro). Before installing this program, verify that
you are using the latest version of this program by
checking the version number on the CD.
Ø You must know which type of network
communications protocol your system is
using.
If you do not know your network’s communications
protocol, check with your network administrator. If
PRISM4 for Windows has already been set up to use your
network communication protocol, you can display the
program icon properties to determine the simultaneous
database access method used. In Windows 95, this

User Manual
information is displayed in the program icon’s Properties

/ Shortcut / Target field.
To install the Database Interface Driver:

• With your computer running Microsoft Windows 95
or newer, insert the latest version PRISM4 CD into the
CD drive. The install program automatically
launches.
• Select the appropriate language.
• From the main menu, select Install Utilities.
• From the Utilities menu, select Database Interface
Driver 1.XX.
The setup program prompts you for the location of your
PRISM4 Pro program.
Lock Manager / Program Relationships

The following table displays the relationships between
Lock Manager command line parameters, PRISM4 for
Windows command line parameters, and the PRISM4 Pro
P2TOPRO.CFG file to allow PRISM4 Solutions programs
to communicate using different network protocols. It also
shows the expected Lock Manager Window title under the
various protocols.

User Manual
Protocol Lock Manager Lock Manager Window PRISM4 for PRISM4 Pro
Command Line Title Windows P2TOPRO.CFG1
Command Line
None2 Not Applicable Not Applicable PRISM4 [/S] /S
Netbios LMW [-mb] Lock Manager - PRISM4 /N /N

‘lockmgr’
Netbios3 LMW [-mb] Lock Manager - ‘XXX’ PRISM4 /N /N
[-a XXX] /A:XXX /A:XXX
TCP / IP LMW -mc Lock Manager - PRISM4 /TCP /TCP

‘123.456.78.9 /A:123.456.78.9 /A:123.456.78.9
jdoe.abc.com’
OR4 PRISM4 /TCP /TCP

/A:jdoe.abc.com /A:jdoe.abc.com
1. The format of the P2TOPRO.CFG file is ASCII text.

It is formatted for 2 Lines. Line one is /MMM where
character 1 is the forward slash character and MMM
represent the Mode. Line two is optional and has the
format /A:LockManagerName where characters 1
through 3 are forward slash, capital A, and colon, and
the LockManagerName that follows is the same as the
one that appears in the Lock Manager Window Title.
Ø For TCP / IP protocol, use either the IP
address or the symbolic name - not both.
2. No Protocol represents single user mode.
3. Use the Lock Manager -a switch to change the name
of the lock manager from ‘lockmgr’ to a user defined
name. This is only required if another system on the
network is using the default Lock Manager for another
program. This option only works in Netbios mode.
4. Using the IP address (123.456.78.9) or the symbolic
name (jdoe.abc.com) are functionally equivalent under
TCP / IP. Use the symbolic name if your IP addresses
are assigned dynamically.

User Manual
Technical Support
Technical Support
If you have questions regarding the installation or

operation of PRISM4 for Windows, contact SKF Condition
Monitoring's customer support staff.
Phone Support
North and South America
1-800-523-7514, 8 a.m. - 5 p.m. PST Monday to
Friday.
Europe, Africa, Middle East
(+31-418) 681818
Asia, Pacific
(+60-6) 799-2713
Fax Support
(858) 496-3531, 24 hours a day.
Address your fax to SKF Customer Support.
Include information on your hardware / software
environment, and describe your problem or question
in detail. Also, leave a phone number, fax number,
or website where we may return your call.
Internet Support
www.skfcm.com
Customizing Your PRISM4 Software
Ø During installation, PRISM4's Demo

database plant is installed. This database
allows new users of PRISM4 for
Windows to familiarize themselves with
the software using the supplied “sample”
PRISM4 data. If you wish to practice
with the Demo database before creating

User Manual
your own PRISM4 database, you may

skip over the remainder of this chapter
and proceed with Chapter 3, Getting
Around In PRISM4 for Windows.
Now that you have installed your PRISM4 software, it is
time for you to “set up” or customize your PRISM4
software for your specific PRISM4 applications. In
PRISM4's File menu, Preferences options allow you to
customize PRISM4's settings. PRISM4 Preferences
options include:
System settings
Spectrum settings
Communication settings
Display Color settings, and
Select Databases settings
System Settings
Use the File menu's Preferences/System option to display
the System Preferences dialog box.
Figure 2 - 17.
The System Preferences Dialog Box.

User Manual
System preferences include:

Data Directory
A text box in which you type the directory path for the
PRISM4 default data directory (or use the Browse
command button and normal Windows path operations to
specify the default data directory).
Unit System (either English or Metric)
Determines the system's units of measurement. For
example, if English is selected, velocity measurements are
measured in in./sec. If Metric is selected, velocity
measurements are measured in mm/sec.
Frequency Scale (either Hz or CPM)
Determines frequency units for all input fields, graphic
displays, and reports.
Default DAD (Microlog, Picolog, UCC (OIL), Manual,
MIM, LMU, MARLIN)
Establishes the POINT Setup dialog box's default DAD
setting for faster creation of new measurement POINTs.
Enter PRISM4's System settings as described above, then
select the checkmark command button to save the settings
and exit the System Preferences dialog box.
Enable Downloads from Multiple DBs (databases)
Ø For MARLIN version 2.0 and Microlog
Version 3.81 only.
Enable this option to allow ROUTEs to be
downloaded/uploaded from multiple databases to the
Microlog or MARLIN data collectors.
Ø Use the File/Preferences/System/Data
Directory field to select each database
from which to upload/download.

User Manual
Ø When mulitple database downloads are

enabled, you must use the
Transfer/Status/Clear option to clear
Microlog or MARLIN data collectors
prior to downloading multiple databases.
Spectrum Settings
Use the File menu's Preferences/Spectrum option to
display the Spectrum Preferences dialog box.
Figure 2 - 18.
The Spectrum Preferences Dialog Box.
Spectrum configuration options are:

Order Normalization (Yes or No)
A Yes selection causes frequency X-axis values to be
displayed as orders of running speed rather than as a
frequency range (Hz or CPM).

User Manual
Waterfall Slant
This parameter is applicable for multiple spectra displays
only. Defines the waterfall plot's lower left corner angle
(45-90 degrees) - Enter a value.
Ø 45 ° recommended for initial use.
45o sets the normal left skewed perspective.
90o places spectra in a vertical strip chart format.
Threshold %
Establishes the default placement of the Label Peaks
threshold. Enter a value as a percent of the full scale
range as established in your POINT setup for the default
Label Peaks threshold %. When the Display menu's
Label/Label Peaks option is selected, a horizontal
threshold line displays in the active spectrum plot. Only
those spectral peaks above the threshold are labeled.
Autoscale (Yes or No)
Yes automatically scales the initial amplitude axis so
the largest component is approximately 80% of full
scale.
No displays the spectrum on the same full scale
vertical axis used when it was recorded.
Palogram Angle
This parameter is applicable for multiple spectra displays
only. The internal angle at the lower left corner of the
palogram plot. Enter a value from 20 to 45.
Ø 45 degrees recommended for initial use.
Number of Orders
(not active at this time) Enter the maximum number of
orders you wish for the X-axis scale. Acceptable values
are those from 0.0 (not included) through 100.0.

User Manual
Y-Scale (Linear or Logarithmic)

Sets the default Y-axis scaling.
Logarithmic scaling is used advantageously to
display the full dynamic range of the data collector
and emphasizes low level spectral components.
Linear scaling emphasizes high level components.
Grids (Yes or No)
Yes causes a display of “dotted” horizontal and
vertical grid lines on the spectrum screen.
FAM Data
On spectral displays with FAM markers, select to display
either FAM marker Labels Only, marker Data Boxes
Only, or both Labels and Boxes.
FAM Data Initially
For measurements set up with FAM markers, select
whether to display FAM markers automatically when the
spectral display appears (Yes), or not (No).
Speed Label Initially
For spectral measurements, select whether to display the
running speed indicator automatically when the spectral
display appears (Yes), or not (No).
Data Display Range
Select one of three options for establishing the number of
historical measurements displayed in graphic plots.
All Measurements - Includes all stored
measurements for a given measurement POINT.
Last # Measurements - Enter the number of most
recent measurements to include in a spectrum plot.
Today to - Enter the date range from today for
measurements to include in a spectrum display plot.

User Manual
• Enter PRISM4's Spectrum settings as described

above, then select the checkmark command button to
save the settings and exit the Spectrum Preferences
dialog box.
Communication Settings
Communication options control data communication
between PRISM4 and the Microlog.
Use the File menu's Preferences/Communication option
to display the Communication Preferences dialog box.
Figure 2 - 19.
The Communication Preferences Dialog Box.
Communication settings are:

Modem Mode (None, Originate, or Auto Answer)
None - Used for a direct, hard-wired connection
between the Microlog and host computer.
Originate - Works in a like manner to the hard-
wired situation where the Microlog is operating at a
distance from the host computer over communication
lines. See your modem manual for instructions on
originating communications.

User Manual
Auto Answer - Used for modem connection over

communication lines between the Microlog and host
computer in attended mode. To make the
connection, the Microlog operator dials the host
computer.
• Select None for direct Microlog communications.
Ø If you use other than a hard-wired
connection, refer to your Microlog User
Manual for assistance.
Command
Used in originate mode to dial a Microlog in a remote
location. See your modem manual for instructions on
originating communications.
Com Port (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4)
Specify the host computer's COM port you are using.
Baud Rate
Set the baud rate for direct, hard-wired communications.
This setting must match the Microlog’s Baud Rate setting.
Data Bits (Eight or Seven)
Set to Eight.
Parity (None, Even, or Odd)
Set to None.
Stop Bits (1 or 2)
Set to 1.
Enter PRISM4's Communication settings as described
above, then select the checkmark command button to save
the settings and exit the Communication Preferences
dialog box.

User Manual
Display Colors Settings

PRISM4 allows you to change colors of items appearing in
graphic display plots, and colors of alarm indicators (on
the hierarchy lists and in graphic displays).
• Use the File menu's Preferences/Display Colors
option to display the Display Colors dialog box.
Figure 2 - 20.
The Display Colors Dialog Box.
At the top of the Display Colors dialog box is the Current

Color palette from which you select a color to apply.
The remainder of the dialog box is divided into four
groups of related items to which you may apply the
selected Current Color. The four groups are:
Trace Color Items - Specify colors for Traces 1
through 8 (plot colors) on graphic display plots. On

User Manual
single or multiple plots, each plotted measurement

conforms to its Trace color.
Cursor Color Items - Specify colors for Cursors 1
through 8 on graphic display plots.
Plot Component Color Items - Select colors for
graphic display components.
Alarm Indicator Colors - Select alarm indicator
and setpoint colors for display in hierarchy list alarm
status indicators and graphic displays.
To assign a color:
• In the Current Color palette, click the color to assign.
• In the four component groups, click the item to
receive the color.
• When finished changing colors, click the dialog box's
checkmark command button to save your color
changes and exit the Display Colors dialog box.
Ø After changing display colors, you must
close and reopen graphic display plots
and plant hierarchy list windows to view
new color assignments.
Select Databases Settings

PRISM4 allows you to display, report on, and
import/export data stored in its three databases. The
File/Preferences/Select Database option allows you to
specify data use from one, two, or all three databases.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 21.
The Select Databases Dialog Box.
Database choices are:

Scheduled database
The normal PRISM4 database (default). All
scheduled measurements (in or out of alarm) are
stored in the Scheduled database. Use this database
for most analysis.
Ø If the data in the current database is in as
alarm, it is uploaded to the Scheduled
database normal. Thus, the Scheduled
database may contain alarm data, as well
as non-alarm data.
Unscheduled database
For On-Line Systems use, reference your On-Line Systems
User Manual for more information.

User Manual
File / Manual Archive
Archive database
The Archive database consists of the same POINTs as in
the Scheduled database, but contains only archived data.
The POINT Setup dialog box's Storage Depth field
determines the number of dynamic records stored for
a POINT before a FIFO (first in first out) process
begins. The Archive database allows data (older
than the FIFO queue) to be kept for an historical
record (using the Manual Archive option or, in
PRISM4 On-Line, the Automatic Archive option).
Ø PRISM4 On-Line software provides an
automatic archiving feature that allows
the latest overall, spectrum, time
domain, polar vector, orbit, and shaft
centerline data to be saved to the Archive
database file on a regular time schedule.
The archive's data type and schedule
interval are user selected.
In addition to the automatic archive feature described in

the PRISM4 On-Line manual's Chapter 4, PRISM4 allows
you to manually archive selected data to its Archive
database. The Manual Archive feature adds flexibility as
it allows you to specify POINTs to archive, and allows you
to archive the newest data in addition to the oldest data.
To manually archive selected data:
• Select the File menu's Manual Archive option. The
Manual Archive dialog box displays.

User Manual
Figure 2 - 22.
The Manual Archive Dialog Box.
Options in the Manual Archive dialog box fall into three

categories:
Select Data to Archive
Select Data Source
Select Age of Data
Select Data to Archive
Overall, Dynamic - Check box options allow you to
specify which stored measurement data is archived to the
Archive database.
Ø Dynamic data includes spectra, time,
phase, orbit, and shaft centerline data.

User Manual
Select Data Source

Option buttons allow you to specify POINTs to archive
from one of three sources:
Selected Nodes - Archive selected (highlighted)
items in the hierarchy list and all items that branch
from the selected item(s).
Open Nodes - Archive all open POINTs (displayed
POINTs) in the hierarchy list.
All Nodes - Archive all POINTs (displayed or not)
for the current Plant.
Select Age of Data
Option buttons allow you to specify whether to archive:
Oldest Data - Store the oldest data for the specified
POINTs and measurements in the Archive database.
Current Data - Store the most recent (current) data
for the specified POINTs and measurements in the
Archive database.
After configuring the above Manual Archive parameters,
click the dialog box's checkmark command button to
immediately perform the archive.
Ø While archiving proceeds, the IDs of the
POINTs being archived display in an
Archiving Progress dialog box.

User Manual
3
Getting Around in PRISM4 for Windows
Starting PRISM4
Ø If you are running PRISM4 On-Line or

PRISM4 Pro, you must exit these
programs before running PRISM4 for
Windows.
To start the PRISM4 for Windows program:
• In the Windows Program Manager window,
double-click on the PRISM4 Solutions group
icon to open the group window.
• In the group window, double-click on the
PRISM4 for Windows program icon.
On a multiple user PRISM4 system, if a user name is not

specified in the program command line (for example,
C:\P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE /U:DOUG), the Select User
Name dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Starting PRISM4
Figure 3 - 1.
• Highlight your user name and click the OK command

button (or double-click your user name). The PRISM4
for Windows Main window appears.
Ø Logging on with your user name causes
File menu Preferences settings to
default to your setup. Also, no other user
(logged in under a different user name)
may process your uploaded data. Also,
while you are logged on, no other
workstation may log on using your user
name.
4
User Manual
The Main Window
The Main Window
control menu box title bar minimize/maximize buttons
toolbar
menu bar
window frame
prompt/status line
Figure 3 - 2.
The Main Window with a Plant Hierarchy Window Displayed.
All PRISM4 windows and dialog boxes open from the

Main window. Main window components are described
below.
Title Bar
Identifies the PRISM4 for Windows Main window and the
current user's login name.
Ø To move a window or dialog box, drag
its title bar to a new position.
4
User Manual
The Main Window
Control Menu Box

Click on the Control Menu box at the left of the
title bar to display the Control Menu. The
Control Menu provides options for keyboard
control of the window's dimensions and
placement (because of the mouse's ease of use,
keyboard controls are rarely used).
Minimize/Maximize/Restore Buttons
Minimize Button
Click on the minimize button to shrink the active
window to icon size on the task bar. A
minimized window is not closed (exited), it is
merely shrunk to create more room in the Main
window. Click on the minimized window's icon
to restore the minimized window to its original
size.
Maximize Button
Click on the maximize button to enlarge the
window to full-screen size. Once maximized, the
window's maximize button changes to a restore
button.
Tip:
Ø Always maximize the Main window.
Restore Button
Displays for maximized windows only. Click on
the restore button to restore the maximized
window to its original size (the size it was before
it was maximized).
4
User Manual
The Main Window
Menu Bar
Displays the names of PRISM4's drop-down menus. Click
on a menu name to display its drop-down menu. Click on
a menu option to select it.
Figure 3 - 3.
PRISM4 Menu Names.
Ø An overview of each main menu is found

later in this chapter.
Toolbar
Displays buttons that provide fast access to PRISM4's often
used procedures. Toolbar buttons change depending on
the active window type. To preview a toolbar button's
function, place the mouse pointer over the toolbar button
and read the main window's prompt/status line.
Figure 3 - 4.
Example of a PRISM4 Toolbar.
Individual toolbar buttons are referenced in

appropriate chapters later in this User Manual and
overviewed in Appendix C, Toolbar Tools and
Important Keystrokes.
4
User Manual
Using Your Mouse and Keyboard
Window Frame
Used to resize the window. To resize a window,
drag and drop its window frame to the new
dimensions.
Working Area
The area in which all other PRISM4 windows appear
(Figure 3-5).
Figure 3 - 5.
Two Windows in the Working Area.
Mouse
PRISM4 for Windows is designed to be used with a two
button mouse. The left mouse button is active, the right
4
User Manual
mouse button is not used. PRISM4 observes standard

Window's rules for mouse use.
For example:
To select a menu option, point and click on the
menu's name, then point and click on the option to
select.
To close a menu, point and click outside the
displayed menu.
To move an item, drag and drop the item to its new
location.
Keyboard Controls
Keyboard controls are provided in the event that mouse
problems develop, and to quickly select often used
features. PRISM4 observes standard Windows rules for
keyboard use. For example:
• To move from field to field, use Tab and
Shift/Tab.
• To pull down a menu, hold down Alt and type
the underlined character in the menu name.
• To select a menu option, type the underlined
character in the option name.
• To close a menu, press Esc.
Ø It is strongly recommended that you use
a mouse for PRISM4 procedures. This
manual is written for mouse procedures.
Ø For more instruction on using mouse and
keyboard procedures, reference your
Microsoft Windows User's Guide.
4
User Manual
Review of Standard Windows Operations
Shortcut Keystrokes
Shortcut keystrokes are provided for frequently used menu
options. PRISM4 keyboard shortcuts are displayed as key
sequences to the right of often used menu options (see
Figure 3-6).
OK and Cancel Command Buttons
In PRISM4 for Windows, dialog box OK and Cancel
command buttons appear graphically as a “green
checkmark” (OK), and a red X (Cancel).
On-Line Help Buttons

PRISM4 dialog boxes offer an on-line help button (?) that,
when selected, accesses PRISM4's context sensitive on-line
help feature.
Using the Menus

Dimmed Options
Dimmed (gray) options are not currently available
(or not applicable) for the procedure you are
attempting. You may have to select another item (or
type of window) before the dimmed option becomes
available.
4
User Manual
ellipsis
shortcut keys
dimmed
options
Figure 3 - 6.
Example of shortcut keystrokes, ellipsis, and a dimmed menu option.
Right Arrow
When selected, an option displaying a right arrow to
its right opens another menu.
Ellipsis
Some PRISM4 for Windows menu options display an
ellipsis (...) after the option name. This indicates
that a dialog box appears when the option is selected.
Using Dialog Boxes

Dialog boxes are used to request information from you or
to provide information to you. In most dialog boxes, you
select options for the procedure you are attempting.
4
User Manual
Figure 3 - 7.
The POINT Setup Dialog Box.
4
User Manual
Figure 3 - 8.
The Exception Criteria Setup Dialog Box.
4
User Manual
Figure 3 - 9.
The Machine Search Dialog Box.
Moving in a Dialog Box

To move from field to field:
With the mouse pointer, click the field or area to move to.
Keyboard
Press Tab to move forward one field at a time;
Shift/Tab to move back one field at a time, or
Press Alt and the underlined letter in the name of the
feature you wish to select.
Choosing Options in a Dialog Box
There are many ways to select dialog box options:
Text Boxes - (see Figure 3-7) Type information into the
text box. If the text box already contains text, you can use
Delete or ←Backspace to delete the existing text, or drag
the mouse pointer over the text and press Delete.
List Boxes - (see Figure 3-9) Display a list of choices.
Click on the item(s) to select and, if necessary, choose the
appropriate command button. At times, more choices exist
than can be viewed in the list box. In this case, a scroll
bar appears. Use the scroll bar's arrows and scroll button
to scroll the list until the desired item(s) comes into view.
4
User Manual
Keyboard
Use the arrow keys to scroll to the item and press ↵ Enter
to select it.
Ø Drop-down list boxes (see Figure 3-9)
initially display as a rectangular box
showing the current selection, and a
down arrow in a square box to the right.
Click on the down arrow (or on the
rectangular box) to view additional list
box choices.
Keyboard
Alt/↓↓ pulls down a drop down list box.
Option Buttons - (see Figure 3-8) A group of option
buttons display options from which only one is available at
a time.
Keyboard
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the option you
want.
Check Boxes - (see Figure 3-8) In a group of check boxes,
you may select as many options as needed.
Keyboard
Press Tab to move to the check box.
Press the SPACEBAR to select the option, press the
SPACEBAR again to toggle the selection off.
Command Buttons - (see Figures 3-7, 8, and 9) Initiate
the immediate response described on the command button.
Keyboard
Press Tab to move to the desired button.
Press ↵ Enter to initiate its action.
Ø A command button followed by an
ellipsis opens another dialog box.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
Ø A command button with greater than

signs (>>) expands the active dialog box.
Menu Overview
Following is a brief overview of each PRISM4 for

Windows pull-down menu. Each menu is discussed in
more detail later in this manual.
The FILE Menu
The File menu is divided into three sections.

The top section provides options that allow you to Import
data from another PRISM4 database, or Export data for
later import into another PRISM4 database.
The middle section provides a Preferences option that
allows you to customize PRISM4's settings (System,
Spectrum, Communications, Display Colors, and Select
Databases), a Print Setup choice for setting printer
options, the Print command for printing the contents of
the active window, and a Manual Archive choice that
allows you to specify POINTs to archive, and allows you to
archive the newest data in addition to the oldest data.
The bottom section provides the Exit from PRISM4 option.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
Ø You can also exit PRISM4 for Windows

by double-clicking on the Main window's
Control Menu box, or by pressing
Alt/F4.
The EDIT Menu
The Edit menu is divided into two sections.

The top section provides a Copy command which copies a
graphic image to the Windows “clipboard” as a bitmap,
and a Delete command for deleting highlighted items
(POINTs, machines, SETs, and plants) from the current
plant or ROUTE hierarchy list.
The bottom section provides three options:
The Clear option removes any bearing, spectral
bands, envelope alarms, and speed references
assigned to selected hierarchy items.
The Assign option allows you to assign bearing,
spectral bands, envelope alarms, and speed
references to selected hierarchy items.
The Modify option allows you to edit the
configuration of selected hierarchy items, edit a
bearing's fault frequencies in the FAM (Frequency
Analysis Module) database, edit coded notes to be
used during data collection, and to edit operator IDs.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
The VIEW Menu
The View menu provides options for viewing the Plant

List, ROUTE List, and Workspace List, for Searching
for a specific SET, Machine, or POINT in the hierarchy
list, for Filtering the hierarchy List to display only items
that meet specific filter criteria, and to view and edit
Machine Notes.
The CREATE Menu
The Create menu is divided into two sections. The top

section provides options that allow you to create new
ROUTEs, Plants, Workspaces and SETs.
The bottom section provides options for creating new
Machines and POINTs.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
The DISPLAY Menu
The Display menu is divided into three sections. The top

section provides options for displaying Trends, FFT
Spectra, Time waveform, Phase, Orbit, and Shaft
Centerline plots for highlighted POINTs in a plant's
hierarchy list. Trend plot formats include Single, Overlay,
and Spectral Band trends. Spectral plot formats include
Single, Overlay, Waterfall, and Palogram. Single and
Overlay Time waveform plots are available, as are Polar
Vector Phase plots and Magnitude/Phase trend plots. The
last two options in the top section, Orbit and Shaft
Centerline, display data collected with On-Line
monitoring systems (LMU/MIM systems). Orbit displays
include single, overlay, and filtered orbit displays;
mag/phase trend orbit displays; and smax polar and
mag/phase trend orbit displays. Shaft centerline displays
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
include shaft centerline trends and shaft centerline

clearance plots.
The middle section provides options that help you
manipulate graphic plot displays to obtain useful analysis
data. Display menu options allow you to add a Cursor to
the displayed plot (available cursors include Single, Band,
Sideband, Harmonic, Relative, and Difference (not
active)), to project a trend into the future (Curve Fit), to
Extract single spectrum plots, frequency trend plots, and
overall vibration trend plots from a waterfall or palogram
plot, to view a displayed plot's Alarm settings (alarm
Envelopes, Spectral Bands, and Magnitude/Phase
acceptance regions), to integrate or differentiate a
displayed spectrum between displacement, velocity, and
acceleration display and Units, to display frequency
Labels on spectral Peaks, on displayed bearing
Frequencies, and at the 1X Running Speed frequency, to
change a plot's Scaling between linear and logarithmic, to
accurately Set the POINT's running Speed from a
spectrum display, to change a plot's Y-Axis scaling to
display as a % of the POINT's FullScale value, and to
overlay a displayed spectrum with the POINT's Baseline
Spectrum.
The option in the bottom section, Event Log, is for
displaying an On-Line system’s Event Log.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
The REPORT Menu
Report menu choices provide setup options and controls

that allow Opening and printing various reports in a
variety of formats.
Report options include: Exception, Last Measurement,
Inspection, Overdue, Upload, History, ROUTE
Statistics, SET Statistics, Database Setup, UCC Test
ID, and Quick Report.
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
The TRANSFER Menu
The Transfer menu is divided into two sections. The top

section offers options for PRISM4 data transfer to and from
the Microlog, Picolog, MARLIN, and UCC CM20 data
collectors.
The bottom section allows Manual data Entry, and
provides commands that initiate data transfer (Download
and Upload). Other options include Status (allows you to
view, clear, reset, or update the data collector's status),
Disconnect Modem (for disconnecting from an active
modem after Microlog modem communications), and
Process Upload Data (after uploading from the Microlog
or MARLIN, this command processes the uploaded data to
PRISM4's database and updates hierarchy list alarm status
indicators).
4
User Manual
Menu Overview
The WINDOW Menu
The Window menu is divided into two sections. The top

section provides commands that control the arrangement
of PRISM4's windows and icons (Cascade, Tile
Horizontal, Tile Vertical, Arrange Icons, and a
command that Closes All open windows). The bottom
section offers the Refresh command that updates the
hierarchy list to reflect the latest changes (moved, copied,
or deleted POINTs) made by another user on the network.
Ø Windows are quickly closed by
double-clicking on their Control Menu
box.
The HELP Menu
The Help menu is divided into two sections. The top

section provides PRISM4 Help options (a Help table of
Contents, Search for Help On, and How to Use Help).
4
User Manual
PRISM4 Terminology
The bottom section provides the About PRISM4 option

that displays a title screen detailing the PRISM4 for
Windows version number.
PRISM4 Terminology
Figure 3 - 10.
A Plant's Hierarchy List.
Database
An organized collection of data. PRISM4 organizes
machinery measurement data in hierarchical format.
4
User Manual
PRISM4 Terminology
Hierarchy
A plant's list of measurement POINTs organized by SETs,
sub-SETs, and machines. A hierarchy usually has three or
four organizational levels branching from the plant ID.
When setting up your PRISM4 database, you must follow
certain hierarchical rules:
• All hierarchy lists start at the plant level. Each
PRISM4 plant has its own window in which its
database items list. Only one plant per window.
• All hierarchy lists must contain a machine level from
which measurement POINTs branch.
IMPORTANT!
Measurement POINTs cannot branch from a SET,
sub-SET, or plant. They must branch from a
“machine” hierarchy item.
Plant Window
Each plant has its own window in which its organization
of SETs, machines, and POINTs lists. You may open as
many plant windows as needed. Of all open plant
windows, only one may be active at a time.
As with any window, click on a plant window to make it
the active window. With most PRISM4 operations, only
“open” POINTs listed in the “active” plant window are
acted upon.
POINT
Defines a machinery location at which measurement data
is collected and the measurement type (vibration,
temperature, SEE, etc). Each reading is taken at a
specific measurement POINT on the machine. A
descriptive POINT ID is issued for each POINT (for
example, “GAS TURBINE INLT 1HV” might specify a
4
User Manual
PRISM4 Terminology
Velocity measurement taken in the Horizontal direction on

a bearing at the driven end of a gas turbine).
Machine
The final organizational level from which all POINTs
branch.
SET
Machines may be grouped into SETs for organizational
purposes. SETs do not require data collection, they are
used to organize machines to help you locate specific
machines and POINTs quickly. Sub-SETs or machines
branch from a SET.
Sub-SETs allow you to further organize the plant's
machines and POINTs.
Sub-SETs, machines, and POINTs are affected by
any actions on their “parent” SET (for example,
delete a SET and all its sub-SETs, machines, and
POINTs are also deleted).
In the plant window, “open” plants, SETs,
sub-SETs, and machines display an open door.
“Closed” items display a closed door. To open or
close a hierarchy item, click the item's door icon.
ROUTE
A POINT collection sequence. ROUTEs are downloaded
to the Microlog to simplify and organize measurement
POINT collection.
Ø In the hierarchy list, POINTs disabled
from downloading are “lined through”.
Workspace
An individual “work area” hierarchy window created by
the user, containing a collection of user selected POINTs.
4
User Manual
Hierarchy List Operations
A Workspace window allows all Plant hierarchy window

operations (including all display and report features).
Workspace windows allow the user to filter and select a
group of POINTs with which to work, without the clutter
and confusion of all other POINTs in the plant hierarchy.
Almost all PRISM4 operations initiate by selecting

machines or POINTs from a plant's hierarchy list. It is
therefore important for you to become comfortable with
hierarchy list operations.
Figure 3 - 11.
A Plant's Hierarchy List.
4
User Manual
Open/Closed Door Icons

In a hierarchy list, an open or closed “door icon” button
appears to the left of each item's name (except for
measurement POINT items). If the icon is a closed door,
it indicates more hierarchy items branch from the item
(the item branches into sub-items). If sub-items exist, you
can display them by clicking on the closed door icon.
When this is done, the hierarchy structure expands to
display the hidden sub-items, and the closed door icon
changes to an open door icon. This indicates the item is
“open” and displaying its sub-items. Open items may be
closed by clicking the open door icon (which hides
branching sub-items and changes the open door icon back
to a closed door icon).
In short, you open a closed door to display hidden
sub-items. You close an open door to hide sub-items you
are not currently working with (simplifying the list).
Ø Keyboard keystrokes may also be used to
control the display of items in the
hierarchy list.
Up/Down Arrows - Move the hierarchy

list highlight up and down the list.
Numeric keypad (+) and (−) keys - Open

and close hierarchy items.
− - Open and close all

Ctrl/+ and Ctrl/−
items branching from the highlighted
item.
Alarm Status Indicators

In the hierarchy list, alarm status indicators display next to
hierarchy item names to provide quick and easy feedback
on a plant's, machine's, or POINT's alarm status.
4
User Manual
Alarm status indicators appear as three rectangles stacked

on top of one another. Each of the three rectangles
represents a PRISM4 alarm status for the hierarchy item it
accompanies. From top to bottom, alarm status rectangles
indicate:
Danger Alarm Red
Alert Alarm Yellow
No Alarm Green
Ø Alarm indicators that show no colors (no
green, yellow, or red rectangles) indicate
POINTs without stored data.
The default colors assigned to each of the alarm rectangles
are noted above (these colors may be changed using the
File menu's Preferences/Display Colors option). When a
measurement is stored for a POINT, PRISM4 compares the
measured value to the POINT's alarm criteria (as
determined in the POINT Setup and Exception Criteria
Setup dialog boxes) and displays the appropriate alarm
status color on the POINT's alarm status indicator. This
visual representation allows you to determine a
measurement POINT's alarm status at a glance.
Ø Alarm indicators are automatically
updated when uploaded data is processed
(using the Transfer menu's Process
Upload Data option), or when a change
is made to a POINT's alarm settings.
In the hierarchy structure:
Measurement POINT alarm indicators display the
specific measurement POINT's alarm status.
Machine, SET, and plant level alarm indicators
display alarm levels for all measurement POINTs
branching from them.
4
User Manual
For example, if just one measurement POINT is in

danger alarm, that POINT's machine, SET (if
present) and plant level hierarchy items also indicate
a danger alarm. If a plant hierarchy item shows all
three alarm indicators (green, yellow, and red), then
it has measurement POINTs in each alarm state.
Selecting Hierarchy List Items

Many PRISM4 operations act only on “selected” items in
the hierarchy list.
To select a hierarchy list item:
• Click the mouse pointer on the item. The selected
item highlights.
Ø To select multiple measurement POINTs
in a plant's hierarchy list, hold down
Ctrl and click additional POINTs. Each
selected POINT highlights.
Ø Also use Ctrl click operations to unselect
multiple POINTs in the hierarchy list.
Searching a Plant's Hierarchy List

In a hierarchy list, specific SETs, machines, and POINTs
can be quickly located using the View menu's Search
options.
To quickly locate a machine in the hierarchy list:
• Activate (click on) the plant window for the hierarchy
item to locate, and
• Select the View menu's Machine Search option (or
select the toolbar's Machine Search button). The
Machine Search dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Figure 3 - 12.
• In the Search dialog box, use the list box's scroll bar
to locate the desired machine from the alpha-numeric
list.
Ø To quickly locate an machine in a long
list, type the first letter/number of the
desired machine's name. The pointer bar
quickly locates the first machine in the
list whose name starts with the typed
letter/number. Then use the arrow keys
to locate the desired machine.
• In the list, single-click on the desired machine's name,
then click the Find command button. The selected
machine is located and highlighted in the plant's
hierarchy list.
• Click the cancel command button to close the dialog
box.
To quickly locate a SET in the hierarchy list:
item to locate, and
• Select the View menu's Set Search option. The Set
Search dialog box appears.
Ø Operations for the Set Search option are
identical to those previously described
for the Machine Search option.
4
User Manual
To quickly locate a POINT in the hierarchy list:

item to locate, and
• Select the View menu's POINT Search option. The
POINT Search dialog box appears.
• Operations for the POINT Search option are identical
to those previously described for the Machine Search
option.
Filtering the Hierarchy List

The View menu's List Filter option allows you to establish
filter criteria that determine which POINTs list in the
active hierarchy list.
To filter a hierarchy list:
• Open the plant, ROUTE, or workspace hierarchy list
to filter. The hierarchy list displays.
• Select the View menu's List Filter option (or select
the toolbar's List Filter button). The Filtering
Criteria Setup dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
Figure 3 - 13.
The Filtering Criteria Setup Dialog Box.
In version 1.30 or newer, you may filter any active

hierarchy list using criteria established from POINT setup
parameters, current alarm conditions, overdue status, etc.
For example; filter the active list to display only velocity
measurements, or display only velocity measurements with
an end frequency of 500 Hz, or display only velocity
measurements with and end frequency of 500 Hz whose
overall alarms are exceeded.
Specifying filter criteria is easy.
Ø When you first enter the Filtering
Criteria Setup dialog, filter criteria
settings reflect the settings of the
4
User Manual
previous filter effort. If desired, use the

Clear Selections button to quickly clear
all previous selections.
• Use the Filtering Criteria drop down list box at the
top of the dialog to select a pre-defined filter criteria
settings file to use. Filtering Criteria settings files
allow quick and easy future selection of stored filter
criteria settings.
Ø In addition to the default settings file
initially shipped with the software, you
are allowed to configure and store as
many Filtering Criteria settings files as
necessary.
IMPORTANT
We strongly suggest you only use the "default"
Filtering Criteria settings file for random/one-time-
only filter efforts.
Any changes made to filter criteria settings (in the
dialog's Criteria/Settings areas) are automatically
updated to the currently selected Filtering Criteria
settings file when the filter is performed (when you
click the dialog's checkmark button). Use the
"default" settings file for random filter efforts so as
not to inadvertently update user defined Filtering
Criteria files.
If necessary, use the left side of the dialog (Criteria area)

to make changes to the selected Filtering Criteria settings
file's current criteria settings (again note, these changes
are automatically updated to the settings file).
• Double click a parameter in the Criteria area to select
it as a filter criteria (double-click a selected criteria to
unselect it). A + indicator appears to its left showing
that it is selected as a filter criteria, and while it is
highlighted its available settings display in the
Settings area on the right side of the dialog box.
4
User Manual
Ø You may also select the highlighted

criteria using the spacebar to toggle the
setting, or the + and - keys to select and
unselect.
• Use the right side of the dialog (Settings area) to
specify the highlighted parameter's setting upon which
to filter. Only those hierarchy items matching the
specified Settings for the selected Criteria will
display once the filter is performed.
Ø When specifying Point ID and/or
Description settings, you may use the
wildcard characters ? and *. Where ?
replaces a single character, and *
replaces multiple characters. Note - the
filter option is case sensitive.
• When finished specifying criteria and their settings,
ensure the Apply Filter to Window option is selected
in the dialog's upper right, then click the dialog box's
checkmark button to perform the filter. The active
hierarchy list adjusts to show only those items
matching the specified filter criteria and settings. The
filtered hierarchy's title bar reflects its filtered
condition.
To disable Filtering criteria:
• Open the filtered plant, ROUTE, or workspace
hierarchy list for which you wish to disable all filter
criteria. The filtered hierarchy list displays.
• Select the View menu's List Filter option (or select
the toolbar's List Filter button). The Filtering
Criteria Setup dialog box displays.
• At the upper right of the Filtering Criteria Setup
dialog box, click the Clear Window's Filter option,
then click the dialog's checkmark button. The
hierarchy list reverts to its unfiltered form.
4
User Manual
Creating/Storing Filter Criteria Setup Files

At the top of the dialog box a Filtering Criteria drop
down list box allows you to select a pre-configured filter
criteria setup. This allows quick and easy future selection
of stored filter criteria settings.
To create pre-configured filter criteria setups:
At the bottom of the Filtering Criteria Setup dialog box,
two command buttons allow you to name and save the
current filter criteria settings to a file for quick and easy
future selection of the same filter criteria settings.
Name Criteria Settings File - changes the Filtering
Criteria drop down list box (at the top of the dialog) to a
text box, allowing you to enter a new file name. You'll
use this file name for future selection of the filtering
criteria file. Observe all DOS file naming rules.
Save Criteria Settings File - Saves the current filter
criteria settings to a file for future selection, naming the
new filter criteria file as specified in the Filtering
Criteria text box.
• Using the two command buttons, first name then save
the filter criteria settings to a new filter criteria file.
The Filtering Criteria text box changes back to a
drop down list box. The specified name appears in
the Filtering Criteria list box for future selection.
Ø Old Filtering Criteria settings files may
be deleted from the P4SOL directory on
your computer's hard disk. PRISM4
automatically issues each filename an .ftr
extension.
Copying Items in the Hierarchy List

Copying items within a hierarchy list, between two
hierarchy lists, or between a hierarchy list and ROUTE list
allows you to make an exact copy of an existing POINT
4
User Manual
(including bearing fault frequency and spectral banding

data) or a copy of an existing machine, SET, or plant
(including all subordinate SETs, machines, and
measurement POINTs).
Ø Copying items between two ROUTE lists
is not allowed. ROUTE items must be
copied from plant hierarchy lists.
Copying can be a considerable time saver when creating
your PRISM4 database. For example, if multiple similar
POINTs need to be created for a machine, create the first
POINT, then copy it multiple times. Then edit the copied
POINTs for specific measurements.
WARNING
During the copy process, any interruption, loss of
power, etc., may create an incomplete file structure.
Backup your PRISM4 files on a regular basis to avoid
data loss.
Ø In the hierarchy list, machine names
must be unique. When copying a
machine item, the machine that is
created from the copy is automatically
given a numerical extension. The same
is true for measurement POINTs
branching from a specific machine, each
POINT must have a unique ID.
Ø For example, if the PUMP #4 machine is
copied, the new machine is named
PUMP #4.1. Likewise, if a POINT
branching from PUMP #4 is copied, and
its destination machine is also PUMP
#4, the new POINT is automatically
issued a .1 suffix to its ID.
4
User Manual
To copy hierarchy items:

Hierarchy and ROUTE list items are easily copied within a
window or between two windows using mouse drag and
drop operations.
Ø When copying hierarchy list items,
remember PRISM4's hierarchy rules:
• One plant item only must start each
plant's hierarchy list.
• SETs or machines may branch from the
plant item.
• Machine names must be unique.
• POINTs must branch from a machine.
• Only POINTs may branch from a
machine.
Ø Use Ctrl click operations to select
multiple hierarchy items to copy.
To perform a drag and drop copy:
• Hold down Ctrl, then click and hold the mouse button
on the list item you wish to copy (keep Ctrl
depressed).
• With Ctrl and the mouse button depressed, drag the
mouse pointer to the hierarchy position you wish the
copy of the item to branch from (in the same
hierarchy list, or between any two lists). As you move
the mouse, note that the mouse pointer changes to a
thick vertical arrowhead. This arrowhead only
displays when the mouse pointer identifies a legal
hierarchy placement. If the vertical arrowhead
disappears, the selected placement is illegal according
to the above rules.
4
User Manual
• When the vertical arrowhead is on the desired

hierarchy placement, release the mouse button and
Ctrl. The item (and all its sub-items) is copied to the
selected hierarchy location.
Ø If the copy and destination hierarchy
items are at the same hierarchy level, the
copy is inserted before the destination
hierarchy item.
To quickly copy an item to the same hierarchy location:
The toolbar's Copy Item button copies the highlighted
hierarchy item(s) to the same hierarchy location as their
original.
multiple hierarchy items to copy.
For example, for a machine with 10 POINTs:
If you highlight one POINT ID and select the Copy
Item toolbar button, the POINT is copied to the end
of the machine's list of POINTs to become the 11th
POINT.
If you highlight two POINT IDs and select the Copy
Item toolbar button, both POINTs are copied to the
end of the machine's list to become POINTs 11 and
12.
Moving Items in the Hierarchy List

At times you may wish to move items in the hierarchy list
or move items from one hierarchy list to another.
Hierarchy list items are easily moved within a window or
between two windows using the same mouse drag and drop
operations described for copying items (except Ctrl is not
held down when moving items).
4
User Manual
Ø When moving hierarchy list items,

remember PRISM4's hierarchy rules:
• One plant item only must start the
hierarchy list.
• SETs or machines may branch from the
plant item.
• POINTs must branch from a machine.
• Only POINTs may branch from a
machine.
multiple hierarchy items to move.
To perform a drag and drop move:
• Click and hold the mouse button on the hierarchy list
item you wish to move.
• With the mouse button depressed, drag the mouse
pointer to the hierarchy position you wish to move the
item to. As you move the mouse, note that the mouse
pointer changes to a thick vertical arrowhead. This
arrowhead only displays when the mouse pointer
identifies a legal hierarchy placement. If the vertical
arrowhead disappears, the selected placement is
illegal according to the above rules.
• When the vertical arrowhead is on the desired
hierarchy placement, release the mouse button. If the
targeted hierarchy item is empty, you are prompted
whether to move the item to the Same hierarchy Level
as the targeted item, or whether to have the item
branch from the targeted hierarchy item (Sub Level)
After making this selection, the item (and all its
sub-items) is moved to the specified hierarchy
position.
4
User Manual
If the targeted hierarchy item is not empty, its

open/closed status determines where the moved items
are placed. If the target item is closed (closed door),
the moved items are placed at the Same Level as the
target item. If the target item is open (open door), the
moved items are placed so they branch from the target
item (Sub Level).
Ø With Same Level moves, if the
destination hierarchy item is located
below the source hierarchy item on the
hierarchy list, the moved item is placed
after the target item. If the destination
item is above the source item, the moved
item is placed before the target item.
Deleting Items From the Hierarchy List

WARNING
Deleting items from a plant's hierarchy list is
permanent. Back up your database on a regular
basis.
Plant - Deleting items from a plant's hierarchy list

permanently deletes individual POINTs (including
all measurement records), machines with their
subordinate POINTs, SETs with their subordinate
machines and POINTs, or entire plants with all
subordinate items from the PRISM4 database.
ROUTE - Deleting items from a ROUTE's
hierarchy list only removes the items from the
ROUTE, it does not remove the items from the
PRISM4 database. Configuration and measurement
records remain intact in the database and in any
hierarchy lists.
4
User Manual
To delete a plant's hierarchy list item:

• In the hierarchy list, click to highlight the item to
delete.
Ø In a plant hierarchy list, be sure the
exact item you wish to remove is
highlighted, it will be permanently lost.
• Select the Edit menu's Delete option, a confirmation
prompt displays.
• In a plant list, confirm the deletion only if you are
absolutely certain you want the item (and all its
sub-items and data) permanently removed from the
PRISM4 database.
Ø During the deletion process, press the
CANCEL button to stop deleting the
highlighted items (for items not yet
deleted).
Printing the Hierarchy List

Printing a plant's or ROUTE's hierarchy setup or statistics
discussed in Chapter 7, Generating and Printing
PRISM4 Reports.
However, the File menu's Print option may be used at any
time to print the contents of the “active” window
(including plant and ROUTE hierarchy list windows).
To print a hierarchy list:
• Open the plant or ROUTE window.
• Open SETs and machines whose sub-items you wish
to appear on the print.
Ø Use Ctrl/+ and Ctrl/− − keystrokes to
open or close all hierarchy items.
• Select the File menu's Print option. The hierarchy
list prints.
4
User Manual
Exiting PRISM4 for Windows
To exit PRISM4 for Windows:

• Double-click on the Main window's Control Menu
box, or
• Select the File menu's Exit option, or
• Press Alt/F4.
4
User Manual
User Notes
4
User Manual
4
Building Your PRISM4 for Windows
Database
Selecting which of your machinery requires monitoring,
what measurements to perform on the selected machinery,
and how often to perform these measurements requires a
careful study of the needs of the plant. It is necessary to
know each machine's history and its response to change.
Ø If necessary, contact your SKF Condition
Monitoring representative for help with
organizing your plant's condition
monitoring program.
Creating a Paper Copy Database
It is advisable to create a paper copy database before

creating your PRISM4 database. This paper copy database
of your machinery measurement POINTs should be
organized by plants, machines, and measurement POINTs
for each machine.
For each plant, use an outline format to create your
database's organizational hierarchy, with measurement
POINTs branching from machines, which branch from
SETs, which branch from the main Plant.
4
User Manual
Building Your PRISM4 for Windows Database
Creating a Paper Copy Database
PLANT NUMBER 1
POWER GENERATION
GAS TURBINE
GT INLT 1HV
GT INLT 1VV
GT INLT 1XV
GT INLT 2HV
GT INLT 2VV
GT INLT 2XV
MAIN PUMP
WATER TREATMENT
Take time to organize your paper copy database
thoroughly. A complete and organized paper copy
database makes building your PRISM4 database much
easier. Plant, SET, machine, and POINT IDs are limited
to 20 characters maximum. When naming POINTs, it is
helpful to keep machine names and POINT identifiers in
columns (as exampled above).
Ø If you have several machines with the
same title (for example, GAS
TURBINE), use an alpha or numeric
prefix or suffix to uniquely identify one
machine only (for example, GAS
TURBINE INLT).
About POINT IDs

In the Microlog/PRISM4 system, each measurement must
be identified by a descriptive ID. This can be
accomplished by adding a suffix to each equipment ID to
denote the specific location, measurement orientation, and
type of measurement.
Suffixes such as AHV, 1VD, and so on, can be used to
identify specific measurements, with letters denoting
which end of the machine (A, B, 1, 2, etc.), direction (H -
horizontal, V - vertical, or A - axial), and type of
measurement (V - velocity, D - displacement, etc.).
4
User Manual
Creating a New PRISM4 Database
Pressures and temperatures required to define condition

are generally identified with the instrument ID from the
plant list.
Ø In a plant's hierarchy list, POINTs
branching from the same machine must
have unique IDs. However, POINTs
branching from different machines may
share the same ID. Also, each machine
must have a unique name. If you try to
create a machine with the same name as
another in the plant list, PRISM4
automatically adds a suffix to the
machine's name. The same holds true
for POINTs branching from the same
machine.
Ø For example, if you have a machine
named test plant and try to name
another machine with the same name,
PRISM4 adds a suffix, and the new
machine is named test plant.1.
Creating a New PRISM4 Database

4
When installed, PRISM 's installation program creates a
"demo" database. You should create a new database to
store your machinery vibration measurements.
To create a new PRISM4 database:

• Use Window's File Manager (Explorer with
Windows 95) or other utility program to create a
4
new subdirectory. Each PRISM database must
reside in its own subdirectory.
4
User Manual
Creating a New PRISM4 Plant
4
• In PRISM for Windows, select the File menu's
Preferences/System options. The System
Preferences dialog box displays.
• In the Data Directory field, specify the
directory path for the new directory created to
store the new database files, and click the OK
button (green checkmark).
Ø If you use the Browse button to specify
the directory path, you must use the
Locate Database dialog's List Files of
Type drop down list box to specify a
New Database before clicking OK.
4
• You are prompted whether to have PRISM
create the new database files in the specified
directory. Confirm this prompt and the new
4
PRISM database is created.
Ø Be sure to specify the correct directory.
4
If you specify an existing PRISM
4
database directory, the existing PRISM
database is erased to create the new
database.
After creating your paper copy database, your next task is

to use your paper copy database to input your plant's
organizational hierarchy into PRISM4, to build your
PRISM4 database. The remainder of this chapter walks
you through the usual PRISM4 steps for creating a new
database. These steps are:
• Create one or more new database Plants.
• Create each plant's organizational SETs
(optional) and machines.
4
User Manual
• Add measurement POINTs to their appropriate

machine, configuring each POINT as it is
created.
IMPORTANT:
When creating a new plant hierarchy, observe these

hierarchy rules:
* Each plant has its own hierarchy list, one plant

item only must start the hierarchy list.
* SETs or machines may branch from the plant item

(SETs are not necessary to the hierarchy structure,
they are used for organizational purposes only).
* Machines must have unique names.
* POINTs must branch from a machine.
* POINTs branching from the same machine must

have unique IDs.
To create a new plant:

• Use the File menu's Preferences/System/Data
Directory option to specify the database for the new
plant.
• Select the Create menu's Plant option. The Plant
Attributes dialog box appears, or
• Click the Select Plant toolbar button. The Select
Plant dialog box appears. Then click the + button to
add a new plant. The Plant Attributes dialog box
appears.
4
User Manual
Fields in the Plant Attributes dialog box are:

Name
Enter up to 20 characters that identify the plant. The
plant's name will appear in the Select Plant dialog box
and will start the plant's hierarchy list.
Description (optional)
Enter up to 32 characters that help identify the plant.
Enable (on/off)
Toggles the entire plant (including all measurement
POINTs) between enable and disable download status.
When enabled, the plant's enabled POINTs may be
downloaded. When disabled, the plant's POINTs may not
be downloaded.
After entering the above information, click the checkmark
button to save your settings (or click the cancel button if
you wish to cancel the plant creation). The new plant's
window displays, with the plant's name starting the
hierarchy list.
Opening Plant Windows

• Use the View menu's Plant List option to display the
Select Plant dialog box (or use the toolbar's Select
Plant button).
• In the Select Plant dialog box, click on the plant
name(s) to open (selected plants highlight), then click
the checkmark button. The selected plants open in
their respective windows.
To unselect a plant, click its highlighted name. The
highlight disappears.
4
User Manual
Creating a New PRISM4 SET
Creating a New PRISM4 SET
If you wish, you may use SETs to further organize your

plant's measurement hierarchy. SETs are not necessary to
the hierarchy structure (machines may branch directly
from the plant item), they are used for organizational
purposes only.
Where Do New SETs Appear?

New SETs are added below the highlighted item in the
hierarchy list. SETs must branch from a plant or from
another SET. SETs cannot branch from a machine or
POINT.
• Click to highlight the plant or SET under which you
wish the new SET to display.
Same Hierarchy Level - To create a new SET at the
same hierarchy level as the highlighted SET, click to
close the highlighted SET (closed door icon).
Subordinate Hierarchy Level - To create a new
SET that branches from the highlighted SET (to
create a sub-SET of the highlighted SET), click to
open the highlighted SET (open door icon).
To add a SET to the hierarchy list:

• Position the pointer bar in the hierarchy list as
described above.
• Select the Create menu's SET option (or click the
toolbar's Create SET button). The SET Attributes
dialog box displays.
Ø If a machine ID or measurement ID is
highlighted, the Create menu's SET
option and the Create SET button are
dimmed. SETs must branch from plants
or other SETs.
4
User Manual
Adding a Machine
Fields in the SET Attributes dialog box operate identical

to those already described for the Plant Attributes dialog
box.
• Enter appropriate information and click the
checkmark button to save your settings (or click the
cancel button if you wish to cancel the SET creation).
The new SET's ID displays in the hierarchy list.
Adding a Machine
Use the Create menu's Machine option to add new

machines to a plant's hierarchy list (or click the toolbar's
Create Machine button).
Where Do New Machines Appear?

As with SETs, new machines are added below the
highlighted item in the hierarchy list. Machines must
branch from a plant or SET. Machines cannot branch
from another machine or POINT.
To Add a New Machine

• Click to highlight the plant or SET under which you
wish the new machine to display.
• Select the Create menu's Machine option (or click
the toolbar's Create Machine button). The Machine
Attributes dialog box displays.
Ø If a machine ID or measurement ID is
highlighted in the hierarchy list, the
Create menu's Machine option and the
Create Machine button are dimmed.
Machines must branch from plants or
SETs.
4
User Manual
Adding POINTs to a Machine
Fields in the Machine Attributes dialog box operate

identical to those already described for the Plant
Attributes dialog box (except machine names must be
unique).
• Enter appropriate information and click the
checkmark button to save your settings (or the cancel
button if you wish to cancel the machine creation).
The new machine displays in the hierarchy list.
Use the Create menu's POINT option to add

measurement POINTs to your database machines (or click
the toolbar's Create POINT button).
Where Do New POINTs Appear?

New POINTs are added sequentially, below the
highlighted machine in the hierarchy list. POINTs must
branch from a machine. POINTs cannot branch from a
SET or plant.
Ø Re-arrangement of POINTs in the

hierarchy list is easily accomplished with
drag and drop operations described in
Chapter 3, Getting Started with
PRISM4 for Windows.
To add a POINT to a machine:

• In the hierarchy list, click to highlight the machine
you wish the POINT to branch from.
• Select the Create menu's POINT option (or click
the toolbar's Create POINT button). The POINT
Setup dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
Ø If anything except a machine ID is

Create menu's POINT option and the
Create POINT button are dimmed.
POINTs must branch from machines.
Figure 4 - 1.
Example of the POINT Setup Dialog Box.
• Configure the new POINT with options in the POINT

Setup dialog box's fields.
4
User Manual
Ø For a new POINT, POINT Setup dialog

box fields default to settings for the most
recently edited POINT.
POINT Setup Options

Fields in the POINT Setup dialog box are organized into
two areas (top and bottom):
The Top Area - Offers fields that help identify the POINT,
control the POINT's download status and collection
schedule, specify the POINT's data acquisition device, and
specify the POINT's measurement type.
Top section fields include:
ID
Enter up to 20 characters that identify the POINT. The
POINT ID appears in the hierarchy list.
Description (optional)
Enter up to 32 characters that help identify the POINT.
Download Enabled (on/off)
When PRISM4 downloads data to the collection
instrument, the POINT's Enabled choice determines
whether it is downloaded or ignored.
Ø In the hierarchy list, POINTs disabled
from downloading are “lined through”.
DAD
Specify the measurement POINT's data acquisition device
(Microlog, Picolog, UCC (OIL), Manual, MIM, LMU,
or MARLIN ).
Changing the Data Acquisition Device setting from
Microlog to Picolog, Manual, or UCC (OIL) causes all
setup fields except Full Scale to disappear (the Full Scale
4
User Manual
setting is the only setup parameter for Picolog and Manual

data entry).
The MIM and LMU DAD options, specify either a
Monitor Interface Module (MIM) or Local Monitoring
Unit (LMU) as the data acquisition device for a
PRISM4/On-Line monitoring system.
The MARLIN DAD option specifies a MARLIN data
manager as the data acquisition device.
POINT Type
Specify the POINT's measurement type (available choices
depend upon the specified DAD).
Changing the POINT Type may cause any or all setup
fields to change. Not all fields are displayed (or used) for
all POINT types.
Also, once data is stored for the measurement POINT, its
POINT Type may not be changed.
Ø The Wild Card POINT type is provided
to allow you to configure any
measurement type and any units (use
manual input to enter non-Microlog
acquired data).
Ø Set Input mV/EU: as specified on your
transducer (sensor) data sheet.
Ø If you select an enveloped vibration
measurement (ENV (Acc) or ENV
(Vel)), an additional data field displays:
Input Filter Range. Select the bandpass
filter to apply to the incoming signal
before the enveloping is processed.
Ø Use the following chart to determine
which band to select:
4
User Manual
Speed Range Freq. Band Analyzing

Range
(RPM) (Hz) (Hz)
0-50 5-100 0-10
25-500 50-1000 0-100
250-5000 500-10,000 0-1000
2500-... 5000-40,000 0-10,000
Schedule
Specify how often data should be collected.
The POINT Setup dialog box’s top area also offers ten
command buttons that alter the bottom area’s setup fields,
depending upon the selected command button. The ten
command buttons are:
Setup Overall
Bands FAM
Envelope Baseline
Phase DAD
Ch 2 Setup Ch 2 Alarm
Each command button represents one of PRISM4's data
collection or analysis features and, when selected, alters
the POINT Setup dialog box's bottom area to display
fields that configure the selected feature.
Ø Depending on the measurement POINT's
POINT Type selection, some “features”
command buttons may be dimmed (not
applicable).
“Setup” Command Button
Displays fields that set up the POINT's measurement
collection and signal processing.
4
User Manual
“Overall” Command Button

Displays fields that set up the POINT's Overall alarm
setpoints. Overall alarms include:
Off
Level
In Window
Out of Window
“Bands” Command Button
For measurements that process an FFT spectrum (all
non-Picolog vibration POINTs except HFD, including SEE
and enveloping POINTs), displays fields for setting up the
POINT's spectral band alarms.
“FAM” Command Button
Allows you to assign and edit bearing and other fault
frequencies (and their alarm settings) to the POINT.
“Envelope” Command Button
(available when spectral data is stored for the POINT) For
measurements that process an FFT spectrum (all
non-Picolog vibration POINTs except HFD, including SEE
and enveloping POINTs), displays fields that set up the
POINT's FFT spectrum envelope alarm.
“Baseline” Command Button
(available when spectral data is stored for the POINT) For
measurements that process an FFT spectrum, allows the
selection of one of the POINT's stored spectra for use as
the baseline spectrum.
“Phase” Command Button
(available when the Save Data option is set to FFT and
Phase) For phase measurements, displays fields that set
up alert and danger alarm acceptance regions for phase
angle alarming.
4
User Manual
Ø The last three command buttons on the

bottom row (DAD, Ch2 Setup, and Ch2
Alarms) are for configuring on-line data
collection system hardware, reference
your On-Line Systems User Manual for
more information.
Bottom section “setup” fields change according to the
specified DAD, and the active “feature” command button
(Setup, Overall, Bands, FAM, Envelope, Baseline, or
Phase). Each feature's setup fields are discussed in detail
in following sections.
“Setup” Fields
• Click on the Setup command button to display the
following POINT setup fields:
Full Scale
Enter a number to define the maximum amplitude value
(Y-axis). (In the Microlog, this default value may be
altered from the spectrum display using autorange with the
up and down arrow keys.)
Ø For SEE measurements, initially set the
Full Scale value at 100 SEEs. You may
change this value as you gain experience
with measuring SEEs.
Detection
Click on the list box to view the choices (Peak, Peak to
Peak, and RMS). Select the method of dynamic signal
detection from the list.
Input mV/EU
Enter a value for the sensitivity of the pickup to be used in
making the measurement.
Ø 100 mV/EU is used for most acceleration
sensors, 200 mV/EU for most
4
User Manual
non-contact displacement sensors, and

1,000 mV/EU if the input is volts and
the scale is to be read directly.
Low Freq. Limit
Enter a low frequency cutoff filter value for dynamic (AC)
measurements. Although values are allowed from 0.0
CPM to 1200 kCPM, the range for normal measurements
is from approximately 200 CPM to 600 CPM, or the
equivalent in Hz.
Save Data
Determines whether the Microlog collects FFT data, Time
Record data, or both. An additional FFT and Phase
option is available for Order Tracking POINTs.
Ø To upload Time Record data, the
Microlog must have firmware Version
3.13 or greater.
• Click the list box to view your options, FFT, Time,
FFT and Time, or FFT and Phase (for order tracking
POINTs).
Freq Type
Click the list box to view the choices (Fixed Span or
Order Track).
Order Track - Specifies orders as the unit of
measure for the horizontal axis of the FFT spectrum,
requires a phase reference input to collect the
measurement.
Fixed Span - Specifies frequency as the unit of
measurement for the horizontal axis of the FFT
spectrum.
Start/End Frequency
Order Track/Orders - If Freq Type is Order
Track, enter the lower and upper, full scale order
4
User Manual
range of the FFT between 0 and 100.0 orders. For

optimum results, use values from approximately 2 to
10 orders.
Fixed Span/Frequency - If Freq Type is Fixed
Span, enter the lower and upper, full scale frequency
range of the FFT between 0.06 kCPM and 1200
kCPM, or the equivalent in Hz. Unless you are
making a very unusual measurement, the upper full
scale frequency should always be greater than
running speed.
Window
Select the type of window used in the FFT processing.
Click the list box to view the choices (Uniform, Hanning,
or Flat top). A window function must be applied to any
periodic time record prior to performing an FFT. The
Hanning and Flat Top window functions attenuate to zero
both the leading and trailing edges of the sample in order
to prevent leakage error caused by discontinuities in the
time record.
Uniform - A dynamic signal analyzer window
function with uniform weighting across time. Useful
for measuring transients or mechanical response
measurements.
Hanning - A dynamic signal analyzer window
function that provides better frequency resolution
than Flat Top, but with reduced amplitude accuracy.
Useful for machine vibration measurements, general
purpose measurement, and measurements containing
random noise.
Flat Top - A dynamic signal analyzer window
function which provides the best amplitude accuracy
for measuring discrete frequency components.
Useful for calibration or machine vibration
measurements using displacement probes in
fluid-film bearings.
4
User Manual
Auto Capture
Click the list box to view the choices (Off, On Overall
Alarm, Always). Determines when the Microlog
automatically records an FFT spectrum.
Off - The Microlog will never automatically collect a
spectrum.
On Overall Alarm - When either overall alarm
setpoint is exceeded (alert or danger), the Microlog
will collect an FFT spectrum.
Always - The Microlog will collect an FFT spectrum
every time a measurement is collected.
Speed
Enter the nominal machine running speed in CPM or Hz.
Lines
The spectrum's FFT resolution. Click the list box to view
the choices (note - the higher the resolution, the slower the
data collection):
100 200 400 800
1600 3200 6400 (n/a for MIM)
Storage Depth
Enter a number to establish the number of overall, spectra,
time records, and phase data to be stored for the POINT.
When the number selected is exceeded, a first-in-first-out
replacement sequence takes effect. Typically set to store 2
years data. For example: for dynamic POINTs, this
number sets the number of overalls and the number of
dynamic data elements indicated by the Save Data field
(FFT, Time, FFT & Time, FFT & Phase).
Averages
Enter the number of FFT averages to be collected (from 1
to 99). Four to six averages are adequate and are normally
4
User Manual
used for machine monitoring. The higher the number of

averages, the slower the data collection.
Speed POINT ID
(For Microlog use only) Displays the speed reference
POINT linked to the measurement.
The Edit menu’s Assign/Link Speed Reference option
allows you to quickly select multiple POINTs (Microlog
DAD dynamic POINTs) from the hierarchy list to
associate with (link to) a specific Microlog DAD dynamic
or manual input speed reference POINT. Data collected
for these linked POINTs reflect the rotating speed of their
associated speed reference POINT.
IMPORTANT - The speed reference POINT must be
collected (by the Microlog) prior to collecting its linked
dynamic data POINTs. Set up your PRISM4 ROUTE or
database hierarchy to facilitate data collection of speed
POINTs prior to data collection of POINTs associated
with speed POINTs.
To link multiple dynamic Microlog POINTs to a
specific speed reference POINT:
• From the hierarchy list, use Ctrl click
operations to select multiple dynamic Microlog
POINTs.
• From the Edit menu, select Assign/Link Speed
Reference. The pointer changes to a cross.
• In the hierarchy list, double-click the speed
reference POINT to link to all the highlighted
POINTs. A message prompts for confirmation
of the link, click Yes to establish the link. Click
No to cancel.
Once a link is established, use the Edit menu’s
Clear/Speed Reference to unlink any speed references.
4
User Manual
To unlink speed references:

• From the hierarchy list, use Ctrl click
operations to select multiple dynamic Microlog
POINTs.
• From the Edit menu, select Clear/Speed
Reference.
Ø The Edit menu’s Assign/Link Speed
Reference and Clear/Speed Reference
options applicable to dynamic Microlog
POINTs only. When multiple selecting
POINTs, any POINTs other than
dynamic Microlog POINTs are ignored.
Speed Ratio
Enter the machine’s speed ratio. The Microlog determines
the actual running speed for the POINT being configured
using the Speed POINT ID speed multiplied by the
specified Speed Ratio.
“Overall” Alarm Fields

• Click on the middle section's Overall command
button to display the overall alarm setpoint setup area.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 2.
The Overall Alarm Setup Fields.
Alarm Method
Determines when an alarm is registered in relation to
lower and upper alarm levels. Click the list box to view
the choices (Off, Level, In Window, Out Of Window).
Each selection displays a graphic representation of the
selected alarm type, and check and text boxes for entering
Alarm Values.
4
User Manual
Off - Turns off the POINT's alarms, no Alarm Value

check boxes or text boxes display.
Level - Provides two alarm levels (Alert High and
Danger High). An appropriate alarm is registered if
the measured value is greater than either. Typically
used for vibration measurements.
When selected, two Alarm Value check boxes
display, one to set the alert high alarm setpoint, and
one for the danger high alarm setpoint. To set alarm
levels:
• Click the appropriate alarm's check box, its text
box displays.
• Type the alarm setpoint value in the text box.
Ø The graphic display area to the left
shows a graphic representation of the
specified alarm setup.
In Window - Provides four alarm levels:
Clear High
Alert High
Alert Low
Clear Low
An appropriate alarm is registered if the measured
value is between the Clear High and Clear Low
values.
Out of Window - Provides four alarm levels:
Danger High
Alert High
Alert Low
Danger Low
value does not fall between the alert high and alert
4
User Manual
low alarm settings. Typically used for axial position

and lube oil temperature.
Ø High and Low alarm setpoints may be
negative as well as positive.
“Bands” Setup Fields

For measurement POINT types that process an FFT
spectrum:
• Click the middle section's Bands command button to
display the spectral banding setup area (Figure 4-3).
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 3.
The Point Setup Dialog Box's Spectral Band Setup Fields.
PRISM4's spectral banding feature provides alert and

danger alarms on both peak and overall spectral values
within a defined frequency band. You can define an
unlimited number of spectral bands per POINT.
4
User Manual
To define spectral bands:

• Press the + command button to add a new spectral
band to the FFT measurement. A spectral band
configuration column appears.
Ø Only 3 setup columns fit on the screen.
If more than 3 bands are created, a scroll
bar appears that allows you to scroll
through your spectral band setups.
Fields in a spectral band configuration column are:
Name
Up to 10 characters that identify the spectral band on
reports and displays.
Minimum Frequency
The band's lower frequency parameter entered as an
absolute whole number (for example, 12000) in units
specified using the File menu's Preferences option,
or as a relative reference to the POINT's running
speed (for example, 1.6X for 1.6 times the running
speed).
Ø It is important to use the Display menu's
Set Speed option when relative
referencing spectral bands.
Maximum Frequency
The band's upper frequency parameter.
Peak Alert
The Peak alert setpoint (peak alert alarm) for the
signal within the defined band. Units are
determined by the POINT's “POINT Type”.
Peak Danger
The Peak danger setpoint (peak danger alarm) for
the signal within the defined band.
4
User Manual
Overall Alert
The alert setpoint for overall vibration within the band.
Overall Danger
The danger setpoint for overall vibration within the band.
• To specify a band's parameters, click the mouse
pointer in the field to edit and type the new setting.
• After entering your spectral band settings, click the
checkmark button to exit the POINT Setup dialog
box and save your settings (or click the cancel button
if you wish to cancel the spectral band creation).
The Edit menu provides two menu options for assigning
spectral band setups to POINTs in the hierarchy list. One
for assigning new spectral bands to selected (highlighted)
POINT(s), and one for copying an existing POINT's
spectral band settings to selected (highlighted) POINTs.
Edit/Assign/Spectral Bands
The Edit menu’s Assign/Spectral Bands option allows
the user to create new spectral bands to assign to selected
POINTs in the hierarchy list.
To define spectral bands using the Assign/Spectral
Bands option:
• From the hierarchy list, select the POINT(s) to which
you wish to assign spectral bands, then select the Edit
menu's Assign/Spectral Bands option. The Spectral
Bands Definition dialog box displays.
• Set up the spectral bands.
Ø Refer to the "Bands" Setup Fields
section previously described.
• Click the checkmark button to assign the spectral
band settings to all POINTs selected (highlighted) in
the hierarchy list.
4
User Manual
Edit/Assign/Spectral Bands from POINT

The Edit menu’s Assign/Spectral Bands from POINT
option allows the user to specify an existing measurement
POINT whose spectral bands setups are copied to other
specified measurements (highlighted POINTs) in the
hierarchy list.
To assign an existing POINT's spectral band setup to a
single POINT, or to multiple POINTs:
• From the hierarchy list, use Ctrl click operations to
select those POINTs to which you wish to assign
another POINT's spectral band settings.
• From the Edit menu, select Assign/Spectral Bands
from POINT. The pointer changes to a cross hair
pointer.
• In the hierarchy list, double-click the spectral band
reference POINT (the one whose spectral band
settings you wish to copy). The specified POINT’s
spectral band setup displays in the POINT Setup
dialog.
Ø Any changes made to the selected
POINT’s spectral band setup are copied
to the destination POINTs (but not saved
back to the reference POINT).
• Click the dialog’s checkmark button to copy the
specified POINT's spectral band setup (as it appears in
the POINT Setup dialog) to all the highlighted
POINTs.
To delete a spectral band:
• Click the mouse pointer in any field of the spectral
band column you wish to delete (any row), then click
the − command button. The spectral band column is
deleted.
4
User Manual
To delete all spectral band settings for POINTs selected

in the hierarchy list:
• In the hierarchy list, highlight POINTs whose spectral
band settings you wish to delete.
• Use the Edit menu's Clear/Spectral Bands option to
delete spectral banding information for selected
POINTs in the hierarchy list.
Ø Displaying spectral bands is discussed in
Chapter 6, Displaying Graphic Plots.
“FAM” Setup Fields

As a vibration analyst, you typically consult a number of
sources for information about the components of each
machine you regularly monitor. From these sources, you
can determine what vibration frequencies are likely to be
present within a machine's vibration spectra. Large
frequency differences often separate common machinery
defect vibration (fault) frequencies.
Imbalance generates a high vibration at machine running
speed. Anti-friction bearing defects generate frequencies
often ten times machine running speed. Misalignment
generates running speed and twice running speed
frequency components. Gear mesh frequencies and
turbine blade pass frequencies may be twenty times
running speed or higher.
Based on these common defect vibrations, and using
PRISM4's Assign Bearing feature, you can select or create
groups of fault frequencies that may be overlayed on
spectral displays to help identify common faults for the
POINT. Each group represents a defect frequency group,
such as, a gear mesh group, a turbine blade pass group, or
a bearing group.
Creating groups of limited, well thought out fault
frequencies can make it easier to find machine defects. If
anti-friction bearings are installed in a machine, you can
4
User Manual
build bearing fault frequency groups for the four types of

bearing defects (inner race, outer race, ball, and spin) and
attach those frequencies to the machine's measurement
POINTs. PRISM4's on-line Bearing Manufacturer's
Catalog automatically supplies approximate bearing fault
frequencies from the major bearing manufacturers.
Building frequency groups, or classes, which display
marker lines and labels on PRISM4 vibration spectra,
simplifies analysis and greatly clarifies the meaning of that
spectrum.
Assigning and displaying a POINT's bearing fault
frequency data is a three step process:
• Assign a specific manufacturer's bearing and its fault
frequencies to the measurement POINT.
• Display the POINT's FFT spectrum.
• On the displayed FFT spectrum, display the POINT's
assigned bearing fault frequencies.
We will first discuss assigning a bearing to a POINT, then
how to edit the assigned bearing's fault frequency settings.
To Assign a Bearing to a POINT
• Click the middle section's FAM command button to
display the fault frequency setup area (Figure 4-4).
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 4.
The Point Setup Dialog Box's FAM Setup Fields.
Initially, fields in the FAM setup area appear blank. At

this point you have two options:
Use the Assign Bearing command button to access
the FAM database and assign previously stored fault
frequency settings (specific to a bearing or other type
fault) to the POINT, or
4
User Manual
Click the + button and enter fault frequency

information directly into the displayed FAM setup
fields. Note, entered information is not stored in the
FAM database for easy application to other POINTs.
• Click the Assign Bearing command button to access
the Bearing Selection dialog box.
Ø From the hierarchy list, you can use the
Edit menu's Assign/Bearing option to
access the Bearing Selection dialog box.
Ø Use Ctrl click operations to highlight
multiple POINTs to be assigned the same
bearing fault frequencies.
Figure 4 - 5.
The Bearing Selection Dialog Box.
The Bearing Selection dialog box is divided into two

sections, a left “bearing manufacturer catalog” section
(from which you select a specific bearing manufacturer
and bearing model number), and a right “fault frequency”
section (where the selected bearing model's fault frequency
settings are displayed and edited).
4
User Manual
To select a bearing manufacturer:

In the left “bearing manufacturer catalog” section, the
current bearing manufacturer's catalog is indicated in the
File field (see previous figure). The list box beneath the
File field lists bearing model numbers produced by the
selected bearing manufacturer.
• Click the Browse command button. The Select a
Bearing Database dialog box displays.
Figure 4 - 6.
Selecting a Bearing Database Dialog Box.
Bearing manufacturer's catalogs list to the left (bearing

catalog names have a .brg extension).
• Highlight the catalog to use and select it with the OK
command button (or double-click on the catalog
name). The dialog box closes, the selected catalog's
name appears in the Bearing Selection dialog box's
File field, and the selected manufacturer's bearing
models list.
Ø If other bearing databases exist in other
directories, use standard Windows
procedures to select the sub-directory
that holds additional bearing
4
User Manual
manufacturer catalogs, then follow the

above procedure.
To select a bearing model number:
• In the Bearing Selection dialog box, use scroll bar
operations or the Name Search text box to locate the
desired bearing in the manufacturer's model list.
Ø In the Name Search text box, type the
name of the desired bearing, the list's
highlighter locates the bearing as you
type its name.
• Double-click on the model number to select it and
remain in the Bearing Selection dialog box.
You are able to view and edit the selected bearing's fault
frequency settings that appear on the dialog box's right
side.
Ø Editions made in this dialog box are used
for the current bearing assignment(s)
only, they do not update the supplied
manufacturer's bearing frequencies
setup.
Fault frequency fields include:
Name - The bearing's catalog number.
Description - The catalog's description of the type of
bearing.
BPFO - Ball pass frequency of the outer bearing race.
This defect frequency is generated by balls or rollers
passing over defects in the outer race.
BPFI - Ball pass frequency of the inner bearing race. This
defect is generated by balls or rollers passing over
defects in the inner race.
BSF - Ball spin frequency. This defect frequency is
generated by defects in a ball or roller.
4
User Manual
FTF - Fundamental train frequency. This defect frequency

is generated by defects or improper movements of the
cage.
Multiples - Enter the desired number of multiples of the
bearing frequencies to be examined. For example, if
BPFO = 7.5000 orders and multiples are 1 - 2,
markers will appear in the POINT's spectrum at 7.5
and 15.0 times shaft rotation speed.
BW (bandwidth) - Total width of a search range about the
bearing's center frequencies (Fc). One-half bandwidth
appears on each side of each center frequency.
BW = C * Fc + D where
C is a ratio of Fc
C*Fc defines a bandwidth that varies with
center frequency
D is a fixed bandwidth.
Ø BW is typically set to 5% or 10%.
Ø It is not typically required that you edit a
bearing's fault frequency settings.
Spectral Display Label Method
IMPORTANT:
The /FAMDISPLAY command line parameter must
be added to enable Spectral Display Label colors.
For example, C:\P4SOL\PRISM4.EXE
/FAMDISPLAY. Otherwise, FAM labels default to
the color specified in File/Preferences/Display
Colors for Cursor 8.
Determines whether frequency markers display the

frequency's alarm status. Options are:
Off - Frequency markers default to the color for
Cursor 8 specified in File/Preferences/Display
Colors.
4
User Manual
Level - Indicates whether frequency markers are in

alarm according to their Alert and Danger settings.
Markers display appropriately in the colors assigned
to Danger, Alert, and Reference alarm color
settings specified in File/Preferences/Display
Colors.
Alert - Lower/Alert alarm level.
Danger - Higher/Danger alarm level.
If necessary, change fault frequency, multiples, or
bandwidth field settings.
Select the checkmark command button to assign the
bearing and it's fault frequencies to the POINT and exit
the Bearing Selection dialog box and return to the
POINT Setup table.
Ø You may assign multiple bearings to a
measurement POINT using the above
procedure.
To edit fault frequency settings for an assigned
bearing:
For POINTs with assigned bearing fault frequency data,
the POINT Setup dialog box's FAM options allow you to
edit the significant frequencies and alarm settings for the
POINT's assigned bearing/fault frequencies.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 7.
The FAM Frequency Setup Fields.
Bearing frequencies setup fields allow viewing or

changing the assigned bearing's fault frequency settings.
Bearing frequency fields include:
Entry - Use this drop down list box to select a fault
frequency to edit or delete. Each entry is an assigned
fault frequency and is identified with the Label field.
For example, Entry 1 shows settings for the 2*FTF
fault frequency, Entry 2 may show settings for the
2*BSF fault frequency, etc.
4
User Manual
Identifier - Displays the bearing manufacturer's model

number.
Label - Identifies the selected fault frequency (selected
with the Entry drop down list box). Assigned fault
frequencies are automatically labeled as multiples of
FTF, BSF, BPFO, and BPFI (for example, 2*FTF).
This label identifies the fault frequency on the
POINT's FFT spectrum.
Frange calculation (Frequency range)
Frange = Fc + BW/2 where
Frange (Frequency Range) is the zone between two
frequencies in which a highest peak is searched.
Fc is the center frequency of the search range.
Fc = A * RPM + B where
A is a fraction of running speed (often 1x, 2x, 3x,
etc.).
A * RPM defines a center frequency that varies
with running speed.
B is a fixed frequency like a structural resonance.
Some sample Fc's might appear as:
1 x RPM  Fc = 1.0000*RPM + 0.00
1 x BPFO  Fc = 6.7300*RPM + 0.00
Resonant Frequency  Fc = 0*RPM + 3520.0
Sideband Frequency  Fc = 1*RPM + 1200.0 or
Fc = 1*RPM − 1200.0
BW = C * Fc + D where
BW is a spreading bandwidth centered on Fc.
C is a percent of Fc.
C * Fc defines a bandwidth that varies with
center frequency.
D is a fixed bandwidth.
4
User Manual
To delete fault frequency markers:

Add Command Button - The + command button adds a
new fault frequency Entry for the POINT.
Delete Command Button - The − command button opens

a dialog box displaying all frequencies assigned to
this POINT. Select the frequencies to be deleted and
click the checkmark button to exit the Select
Frequency Assiciations to Delete dialog box and
delete the selected frequencies.
Figure 4 - 8.
The Select Alarms to Delete Dialog Box.
Using the above fields and command buttons, edit the

assigned bearing's fault frequency settings as desired.
Select the checkmark button command button to save the
edited fault frequency settings to the POINT and exit the
POINT Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Ø Displaying fault frequency data is

discussed in Chapter 6, Displaying
Graphic Plots.
Editing Bearing Frequencies in the FAM Database
The Edit menu's Modify/Bearing option allows you to
add new, edit existing, or delete bearing fault frequency
settings in the FAM database. New/edited bearing fault
frequencies may then be stored in the FAM database for
easy assignment to PRISM4 POINTs.
To add or edit FAM fault frequencies:
• Select the Edit menu's Modify/Bearings option. The
Edit Bearing dialog box appears.
Figure 4 - 9.
The Edit Bearing Dialog Box.
Like the Bearing Selection dialog box, the Edit Bearing

dialog box is divided into two sections, a left “bearing
manufacturer catalog” section (from which you select a
specific bearing manufacturer and bearing model number
for which to edit fault frequencies), and a right “fault
4
User Manual
frequency” section (where the selected bearing model's

fault frequency settings are displayed and edited).
To edit an existing bearing's fault frequencies:
To edit fault frequencies for a specific bearing in the FAM
database, you must first specify the bearing's manufacturer
and model number. To do so, follow the procedure
previously described for assigning a bearing to a POINT.
After the desired bearing is listed in the manufacturer's
model list:
• Double-click to select the bearing. The selected
bearing's Name, Description, and fault frequency
parameters display in the right “fault frequencies”
section.
Ø Bearing geometry parameters (Number
of Balls, Ball Diameter, etc.) apply
when adding a new bearing to the FAM
database (not when modifying existing
bearings).
• Edit each fault frequency in its appropriate field
(BPFO, BPFI, BSF, and FTF).
• Click the Save to Disk command button to save the
bearing's edited fault frequencies in the FAM
database.
To add a new bearing to the FAM database:
• Use the Browse button to select the bearing
manufacturer for which you wish to add a new bearing
and its fault frequencies.
• In the Name text box, enter the new bearing's name.
• (optional) In the Description text box, enter a
description of the new bearing.
At this point you have two options, you can:
4
User Manual
• If fault frequencies are known, enter each fault

frequency in its appropriate field (BPFO, BPFI, BSF,
and FTF), or
• Use the bearing geometry fields to enter the bearing's
geometry settings (Number of Balls, Ball Diameter,
Pitch Diameter, and Contact Angle), then click the
Calculate button to calculate fault frequencies for a
bearing with the entered geometry.
After entering/calculating fault frequencies:
• Click the Save to Disk command button to save the
bearing's edited fault frequencies in the FAM
database.
To delete a bearing from the FAM database:
Specify the bearing's manufacturer, and click to highlight
the bearing's model number.
• Click the Delete command button to delete the
highlighted bearing from the FAM database (you are
prompted to confirm the deletion).
When finished editing, adding, or deleting bearings from
the FAM database, click the dialog box's checkmark
command button to exit the dialog box.
Assigning a Single Frequency Marker
To assign a single fault frequency to a POINT:
• Highlight the POINT in the hierarchy list.
• Select the Edit/Assign/Frequency Marker option,
the Frequency Marker Assignment dialog displays.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 10.
The Frequency Marker Assignment Dialog Box.
• Set up the new frequency marker as explained in the

To Assign a Bearing to a POINT section in Chapter
4.
The new frequency marker is automatically active when
frequency labels are viewed for the POINT.
“Envelope” Setup Fields

Ø (Alarm envelope setup fields are only
available when spectral data is stored for
the POINT).
4
User Manual
For measurements that process an FFT spectrum (all

non-Picolog vibration POINTs except HFD, including
SEE and enveloping POINTs), the Envelope button
displays fields that set up the POINT's FFT spectrum
alarm envelope.
The established spectrum alarm envelope may be
designated as an exception criteria. That is, if the
measurement's spectrum transgresses its spectrum alarm
envelope, the measurement is placed in an alarm state.
• Click on the middle section's Envelope command
button to display the spectrum alarm envelope setup
fields.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 11.
The Point Setup Dialog Box's Alarm Envelope Setup Fields.
The spectrum alarm envelope setup area displays two rows

of fields used to set up the alarm envelope (each row with
its own enable command button) and a graphic display
area that displays the configured alarm envelope
superimposed on one of the POINT's stored spectra
(selected from the Displayed Spectrum drop down list
box).
4
User Manual
Displayed Spectrum - Use this drop down list box

to select which of the POINT's stored spectra is to be
used to create the POINT's spectrum alarm envelope.
Ø If available, the POINT's baseline
spectrum is typically used to set up the
POINT's spectrum alarm envelope.
Row 1 alarm envelope setup fields configure the initial
spectrum alarm envelope around the selected spectrum,
they are:
Overdrive % - Enter the percent of full scale value
to increase the height of the alarm envelope. The
smaller the number specified, the tighter the
comparison envelope conforms to the designated
spectrum.
Spreading % - Enter the percent of full scale (or
center) frequency to increase the width of a peak.
The smaller the number specified, the tighter the
comparison envelope conforms to the designated
spectrum.
Spread Type (either Center Frequency or Full
Scale) - If Center Frequency is selected, the
bandwidth about each center frequency increases
with higher frequencies. If Full Scale is selected,
the bandwidth about each center frequency is a
constant, based on a percent of the full scale
frequency.
Row 2 alarm envelope setup fields allow you to edit the
alarm envelope level for specified frequency ranges, they
are:
Start Frequency - Sets the beginning of the
frequency range whose envelope level you wish to
alter.
End Frequency - Sets the end of the frequency range
whose envelope level you wish to alter.
4
User Manual
Envelope Level - Sets the new alarm level for the

frequency range described in the first two fields.
To create a spectral alarm envelope:
• Use the Displayed Spectrum drop down list box to
designate and display a spectrum around which to
create the alarm envelope.
• Using row 1 fields, set the alarm envelope's
Overdrive %, Spreading %, and Spread Type
setting (either Center Frequency or Full Scale).
• When row 1 settings are established, click the
“enable” command button to the left of row 1. The
graphic display area shows the configured alarm
envelope superimposed on the designated spectrum.
Ø The alarm envelope's lower amplitude is
defined by the Threshold % setting
established in the File menu's
Preferences/Spectrum dialog box.
To edit the spectral alarm envelope:
• Using row 2 fields, set the Start Frequency, End
Frequency, and Envelope Level for the first
frequency range to edit.
• Click the “enable” command button to the left of row
2. The graphic display area shows the specified
frequency range's edited alarm level.
• Repeat this procedure for all frequency range's whose
alarm envelope level you wish to edit.
To clear editions to the spectrum alarm envelope:
• Click row 1's “enable” command button. In the
graphic display area, the alarm envelope reverts to its
original configuration as described in row 1 fields.
4
User Manual
To save the POINT's spectrum alarm envelope:

• Click the POINT Setup dialog box's checkmark
command button. The POINT Setup dialog box
closes and all changes to the POINT's setup are saved.
To delete the POINT's spectrum alarm envelope:
• Click the  button, you are prompted to confirm the
deletion.
From the hierarchy list, you can use the Edit menu's
Clear/Envelope Alarms option to delete spectrum alarm
envelope information for all POINTs selected
(highlighted) in the hierarchy list.
Ø Displaying spectrum alarm envelopes is
discussed in Chapter 6, Displaying
Graphic Plots.
“Baseline” Setup Fields

Ø (Available when spectral data is stored
for the POINT).
For measurements that process an FFT spectrum, allows
the selection of one of the POINT's stored spectra for use
as the baseline spectrum. The baseline spectrum is a
spectrum taken when the machine was in known good
running order and is used for comparison to current
spectra.
• Click the middle section's Baseline command button
to display baseline spectrum setup fields.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 12.
The Point Setup Dialog Box’s Baseline Spectrum Setup Area.
The Baseline setup area provides the Displayed Spectrum

drop down list box and a graphic display area.
• Use the Displayed Spectrum drop down list box to
select one of the POINT's stored spectra as its baseline
spectrum. The selected spectrum is displayed in the
Baseline setup's graphic display area.
Ø Use the Display menu's Baseline
Spectrum option to overlay a displayed
4
User Manual
spectrum with the POINT's selected

baseline spectrum, see Chapter 6,
Displaying Graphic Plots.
“Phase” Setup Fields

Ø (Available when the POINT's Save Data
field is set to FFT and Phase).
Polar vector plots show vibration amplitude and phase.
Phase is the angular difference between a known mark on
a rotating shaft and the shaft's vibration signal. This
relationship provides valuable information on shaft orbit
and shaft position and is used for analysis, for balancing,
and for shaft orbital analysis.
In a polar vector plot, an alarm is initiated when the head
of an operating vector leaves a defined acceptance region
(if Phase Angle alarm is specified in the Exception
Criteria Setup dialog box).
For measurement's whose Save Data option is set to FFT
and Phase:
• Select the POINT Setup dialog box's Phase
command button to establish alert and danger alarm
acceptance regions. The bottom area displays fields
for setting up these acceptance regions.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 13.
The Phase “Acceptance Regions” Setup Area.
Phase vector acceptance region fields allow you to set up

Alert and Danger acceptance regions for up to 4 Orders
of the phase measurement. For each alert and danger
acceptance region, you define:
Minimum Magnitude
Maximum Magnitude
Minimum Phase Angle
Maximum Phase Angle
4
User Manual
The POINT Setup dialog box's Phase setup area provides

a graphical display of the defined alert and danger
acceptance regions. Each region's color conforms to alert
and danger colors set in the Preferences/Display Colors
dialog box.
To set up an Alert or Danger acceptance region:
• In the POINT Setup dialog box's Phase setup area,
click the Alert or Danger check box to enable setup
of an alert or danger acceptance region. The selected
region's setup fields become available.
• Use the Order drop down list box to assign the new
acceptance regions to a specific order of the phase
measurement (1, 2, 3, or 4).
• Use text box operations to enter the Min Mag., Max
Mag., Min Phase, and Max Phase settings.
• Click the newly defined acceptance region's “enable”
command button to enable the defined acceptance
region. The graphic display area updates to show the
enabled acceptance region.
After setting up and enabling the phase measurement's
polar vector acceptance regions:
• Click the POINT Setup dialog box's checkmark
command button to save the alert and danger
acceptance regions and exit the POINT Setup dialog
box.
Ø Displaying phase vector acceptance
regions is discussed in Chapter 6,
Displaying Graphic Plots.
4
User Manual
Adding MARLIN data manager POINTs to a Machine
Adding MARLIN data manager POINTs to a

Machine
SKF Condition Monitoring’s MARLIN System (Machine

Reliability and Inspection System) works with PRISM4 to
provide an inexpensive, easy-to-use machinery data
collection, inspection, fault detection, and trend analysis
system.
Complete with alarm capabilities, the MARLIN System
allows very easy machinery data input, automatic detection
of abnormal conditions, trending, and analysis not only for
machinery vibration and temperature data, but also for
machinery process data (i.e., pressure, flow, rpm,
operating hours, etc.), and machinery inspection results
(i.e., pH level, noise level, lubricant condition, etc.).
Alarm and trend results may be viewed as data is collected
in the field and, after uploading, in PRISM4 version 1.30
and newer.
Four components make up SKF’s MARLIN System;
MARLIN Condition Detector Probe (MCD)
MARLIN Quick Connect Stud (MQC)
MARLIN data manager hand held computer
(MDM), and
PRISM4 for Windows Software (1.30 and newer)
MARLIN System components are designed to work in
concert (all components interacting) or independently of
each other.
MARLIN Condition Detector Probe (MCD)

The MCD is a portable probe-like sensor instrument
capable of measuring, displaying, and alarming on two
types of machinery vibration, and machine temperature
(overall velocity vibration for monitoring and detection of
4
User Manual
general machinery faults like imbalance, misalignment,

and looseness; and enveloped acceleration vibration for
early detection of machinery bearing and gear faults).
The MCD probe is capable of performing these three
measurements simultaneously. Measurement results are
immediately displayed alpha-numerically on the MCD’s
LCD display. Alert, and danger alarm levels may be
programmed into the MCD, which displays alarm results
both on its LCD display, and on green, yellow, and red
indicator lights.
The MCD probe is capable of working independently, or
with the MARLIN data manager (MDM) for ROUTE data
collection, data storage, and in the field trend review
capabilities. The MCD probe also works with the
MARLIN Quick Connect stud (MQC) for more precise
alarm control and more efficient and consistent data
collection.
MARLIN Quick Connect Stud (MQC)

The MQC stud enhances data collection speed and
accuracy, and provides very precise alarm control for
MARLIN Condition Detector vibration and temperature
POINTs (MCD probe POINTs).
The MQC is a small stud like device that mounts
permanently to a machinery measurement POINT
(typically a bearing cap). The system’s MCD probe
mounts quickly and securely to the installed MQC stud
using a ¼ turn screw mount (hence the name, MARLIN
Quick Connect). This mounting method ensures proper
probe location and orientation, and provides more accurate
vibration signals (especially for higher frequency rolling
element bearing defect and gearmesh vibration signals).
In addition, MQC studs may contain computer memory,
and are programmable for individual alert and danger
alarm levels specific to the monitored POINT. For
4
User Manual
example, when monitoring different types of motors, or

any combination of motors, pumps, and fans, mount MQC
studs on each machine’s bearings and precisely set each
POINT’s vibration and temperature alarm levels in its
MQC’s memory. When the MCD probe is connected and
measurements performed, MCD alarm indicator lights
react to alarm levels specifically set for the monitored
POINT(s).
Again, MQC studs and the MCD probe may be used
independently, or with the MARLIN data manager
(MDM).
MARLIN data manager (MDM)

The MARLIN data manager (MDM) is a hand held
machinery data input, storage, and review computer.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 14.
The MARLIN data manager.
The MDM allows you to easily input, store, and display

inspection, vibration, temperature, process, and note data
in both numerical and trend formats. Using the provided
interface cable, vibration and temperature measurements
are input directly from the MCD probe, while process data
and visual inspection data are entered using the MARLIN
data manager’s pen interface and touch sensitive display.
4
User Manual
Collected data, alarm status, and alarm messages are

immediately displayed on the MDM’s LCD display for in-
the-field detection of abnormal conditions.
Like the SKF Microlog, the MARLIN data manager can
collect both ROUTE and non-ROUTE data. MCD
vibration and temperature POINTs, process POINTs,
inspection POINTs, and alarm settings are set up in
PRISM4 and downloaded to the MDM as a data collection
ROUTE to facilitate the most efficient data collection
sequence. After data collection is complete, collected
measurement and alarm data may be uploaded to the
PRISM4 database for long term storage and PRISM4
analysis.
Ø MDM POINTs may also be easily
collected in random sequence using the
MARLIN data manager’s built in
barcode scan device or MQC studs.
Each automatically identifies machines
and measurement POINTs in-the-field.
Reference your MARLIN data manager
Setting Up MCD Probe POINTs for MDM

Data Collection
To store MCD Probe measurements in the PRISM4
software’s database, you must utilize the MARLIN
System’s MDM hand held computer.
4
User Manual
To add an MCD Probe Vibration/Temperature

POINT:
• In the plant hierarchy list, click to highlight the
machine from which you wish the MCD POINT to
branch.
• Select the Create menu's POINT option (or click the
toolbar's Create POINT button). The POINT Setup
dialog displays.
Ø If anything except a machine ID is
Create menu's POINT option and the
Create POINT button are dimmed.
POINTs must branch from machines.
• In the POINT Setup dialog, set the DAD field to
MARLIN, and the POINT Type field to MCD
(MARLIN Condition Detector). POINT Setup
configuration fields change to reflect MCD POINT
settings.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 15.
MARLIN data manager MCD POINT Setup Screen.
As previously described, the MCD probe is capable of

collecting and alarming on three measurements
simultaneously for each MCD POINT:
4
User Manual
• Enveloped acceleration vibration (high

frequency bearing and gearmesh vibration)
• Vibration velocity
• Temperature
Each measurement’s settings (alarms settings and
temperature units) are configured in an area unique to the
measurement (see previous figure).
In addition to these measurement alarm settings, the MCD
POINT's “general setup” fields are located at the top of the
dialog.
MCD POINT “General Setup” Fields
ID - Enter up to 20 characters that identify the MCD
POINT.
Description - Enter up to 32 characters that help identify
the MCD POINT.
Schedule - Specify how often data should be collected for
the POINT’s measurements.
Download Status
At the top right, an Enabled check box allows you to
enable all three MCD measurements to be downloaded
to the MDM .
Location Method - Select the method for locating and
identifying the MCD POINT. Choices are None,
Barcode, or MQC ID (MARLIN Quick Connect
stud).
None - While collecting data, the POINT is located
and identified in the MARLIN data manager
(MDM) hierarchy list using normal cursor
procedures.
Barcode - The POINT is automatically located and
identified in the MDM hierarchy list using the
4
User Manual
MDM’s built in barcode scan device.

Reference your MARLIN data manager User
Manual for more information.
MQC ID - The POINT is automatically located and
identified in the MDM hierarchy list when the
MCD probe is connected to an MQC stud.
Reference your MARLIN data manager User
Location Tag
Ø If Location Method is set to None, the
Location Tag field does not display.
If “Barcode” Location Method is selected, type the
POINT's barcode ID (as alpha numeric text) in the
Location Tag text box. This associates the database
POINT to the barcode label affixed to the machine.
Ø The Location Tag's alpha numeric text
is duplicated (as bar code) on a label that
is permanently affixed to the machine.
Many sources are available to generate
barcode labels. Many software packages
serve this purpose and many barcode
service companies exist that provide this
service.
If Location Method is set to MQC ID (MARLIN
Quick Connect stud), the location tag automatically
uploads when data is collected and uploaded from
the MARLIN data manager, and cannot be edited.
MCD POINT Measurement Setup Fields
Alarms
The MCD probe supports Level alarms. Each of the
three MCD measurements allow two alarm settings,
Alert High (AH) and Danger High (DH). An
appropriate alarm is displayed if the measured value is
greater than either.
4
User Manual
To set MCD measurement alarms:

• Enable the alarm setting using the DH and AH
checkboxes below each measurement’s graphic
alarm display. The enabled alarm setting’s
Value textbox appears and the enabled alert or
danger alarm is represented graphically in the
graphic alarm display.
• Type each alarm setting in its Value text box.
• Repeat these steps to set alarm levels for all
appropriate measurements.
Units (temperature measurements only)
For enveloped acceleration measurements, units are
displayed as gE.
For velocity measurements, units displayed as IPS
(English) or mm/s (metric).
For temperature measurements units are Fahrenheit
(English) or Celcius (metric).
After configuring the MCD POINT, click the dialog’s
checkmark button to save the settings to the PRISM4
database.
Adding MARLIN Process POINTs

MARLIN data manager process POINTs are created by
setting the POINT Setup dialog’s DAD field to MARLIN
and selecting a process POINT Type (Temperature,
Current, Pressure, Flow, RPM, Volts AC, Volts DC,
Counts, Count Rate, Operating Hours, or Wild Card).
When correct settings are specified, the POINT Setup
dialog displays MARLIN process POINT setup
parameters.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 16.
MARLIN data manager Process POINT Setup Dialog.
Process POINT “General Setup” Fields

ID - Enter up to 20 characters that identify the MARLIN
Process POINT.
the MARLIN Process POINT.
4
User Manual
Enabled Download Status

At the top of the POINT Setup dialog, an Enabled
check box allows you to enable the measurement to be
downloaded to the MARLIN data manager (MDM).
Schedule - Specify how often data should be collected for
the POINT.
Location Method - Select the method for locating and
identifying the MARLIN Process POINT. Choices
are None or Barcode.
None - While collecting data, the POINT is located
and identified in the MARLIN data manager
hierarchy list using normal cursor procedures.
Barcode - The POINT is located and identified in
the MARLIN data manager hierarchy list
using the MARLIN data manager’s built in
barcode scan device. Reference your MARLIN
data manager User Manual for more
information.
Form Type - Select Gauge, Slider, Bar, or Keypad as
the data entry form type. Each form provides a
unique method for entering and displaying machine
process data on the MARLIN data manager and in
PRISM4. Reference your MARLIN data manager
Location Tag
If Barcode Location Method is selected, type the
process POINT’s barcode ID (as alpha numeric text)
in the Location Tag text box. This associates the
database POINT to the barcode label affixed to the
machine.
4
User Manual
Ø The Location Tag's alphanumeric text is

duplicated (as barcode) on a label that is
permanently affixed to the machine.
service.
Process POINT Measurement/Alarm Setup Fields
Full Scale - Enter the highest anticipated value for the
measurement.
Min. Scale - Enter the lowest anticipated value for the
measurement (must be lower than Full Scale).
Input mV/EU (not applicable for RPM, Count, Count
Rate, or Operating Hours POINT types)
With 4-20mA input process data, enter the millivolt
(mV) per Engineering Unit (EU) ratio for inputs
from a directly connected pickup.
Zero Offset (not applicable for RPM, Count, Count Rate,
or Operating Hours POINT types)
If necessary, enter a value in millivolts to offset the
zero point of the measurement.
Alarm Method - Determines when an alarm is registered
in relation to alert and danger alarm levels. Click
the list box to view the choices (Off, Level, In
Window, Out Of Window). Each selection displays
a graphic representation of the selected alarm type,
and check and text boxes for entering alarm values.
Off - Disables the process POINT's alarms, no alarm
Value check boxes or text boxes display.
Level - Provides two alarm levels (Alert High and
Danger High). An appropriate alarm is registered if
the measured value is greater than either.
4
User Manual
When selected, two alarm Value check boxes

display, one to set the alert high alarm setpoint, and
one for the danger high alarm setpoint. To set alarm
levels:
• Click the appropriate alarm's check box, its text
box displays.
• Type the alarm setpoint value in the text box.
In Window - Provides four alarm levels:
Clear High
Alert High
Alert Low
Clear Low
value is between the Clear High and Clear Low
values. Use the previously described method for
enabling and setting each alarm level.
Out of Window - Provides four alarm levels:
Danger High
Alert High
Alert Low
Danger Low
value does not fall between the alert high and alert
low alarm settings. Typically temperature
measurements. Use the previously described method
for enabling and setting each alarm level.
Ø High and Low alarm setpoints may be
negative as well as positive.
After configuring the MARLIN Process POINT, click the
dialog’s checkmark button to save the settings to the
PRISM4 database.
4
User Manual
Adding MARLIN Inspection POINTs

In addition to using the MARLIN System’s Condition
Detector sensor (MCD probe), or using its stylus and touch
sensitive display to manually input process data read from
machinery gauges or control panels, MARLIN Inspection
POINTs allow the operator to use the stylus and touch
sensitive display to record visual observations or perform
and record a physical test of some sort.
Alert and danger alarm settings can be assigned to specific
anticipated inspection results and provide immediate
feedback messages to the data collection person when the
inspection results in an alarm condition.
Create MARLIN inspection POINTs by setting the DAD
field to MARLIN and selecting a Single-Select
Inspection or Multi-Select Inspection “POINT Type”.
When the correct settings are specified, the POINT Setup
dialog displays MARLIN Inspection POINT setup
parameters.
4
User Manual
Figure 4 - 17.
MARLIN Inspection POINT Setup Dialog.
4
User Manual
Single-Select vs. Multi-Select Inspection POINTs

Single-Select Inspection POINTs and Multi-Select
Inspection POINTs both utilize five Inspection Result
fields, each of which has an Alarm Condition field.
With inspection POINTs, you use the Inspection Result
fields to define up to five expected results for the specific
inspection or test.
With Single-Select Inspection POINTs, the data
collection person can select only one of the five pre-
defined Inspection Results as the one most accurate
for the present inspection POINT condition.
With Multi-Select Inspection POINTs, the data
collection person can select as many of the five pre-
defined Inspection Results as are appropriate to
describe the present inspection POINT condition.
Alarm Conditions and Messages
An alert or danger Alarm Condition may be assigned to
each of the five pre-defined Inspection Results. In
addition, an alert message may be assigned to alert alarms,
and a danger message may be assigned to danger alarms.
The appropriate message displays to the operator when the
inspection results in alarm.
If, while performing the inspection, the operator selects an
Inspection Result that is associated with an alert or
danger Alarm Condition, the MDM immediately displays
the appropriate alert or danger message to the operator.
This method provides a means of controlling actions in
specific conditions.
For example, in the previous screen display, if the operator
selects a “Cloudy” or “Sluggish” Inspection Result, he is
selecting a result associated with an alert Alarm
Condition, and the MDM immediately prompts him to
“Take a sample” (the Alert Message). If the data
4
User Manual
collection person selects the “Has Metal” Inspection

Result, he is selecting a result associated with a danger
Alarm Condition, and the MDM immediately prompts
him to “Call supervisor” (the Danger Message).
Inspection POINT Setup Field Descriptions
Inspection POINT Type setup fields are:
ID - Enter up to 20 characters that identify the POINT.
the POINT.
Enabled Download Status
At the top of the POINT Setup dialog, an Enabled
check box allows you to enable the inspection POINT
to be downloaded to the MDM.
Schedule - Specify how often data should be collected.
Location Method - Select the method for identifying the
MARLIN Inspection POINT’s location. Choices are
None or Barcode.
Location Tag
If Barcode is selected as the Location Method, type
the inspection POINT’s barcode ID (as alpha
numeric text) in the Location Tag text box. This
associates the database POINT to the barcode label
affixed to the machine.
Ø The Location Tag's alpha numeric text
is duplicated (as barcode) on a label that
4
User Manual

service.
Inspection Prompt - Enter a prompt of up to 30 characters
that instructs the operator to perform the specific test
or inspection. Examples are: “Check pH level” or
“Describe lubricant condition.”
Inspection Result - Enter up to five expected results (15
characters each) for the inspection or test. These
should be the most likely results of the test or
inspection. Examples are; possible lubricant
conditions (see above figure), a range of pH litmus
test colors, machine operating/machine not operating
choices, normal/louder than normal/extremely loud
noise levels, etc.
Alarm Condition - Set each Inspection Result's alarm
condition. Options are None, Alert, or Danger.
Alert Message - This message is associated with all
Inspection Results assigned an Alert Alarm
Condition. Enter up to a 32 character message that
displays on the MDM when an Inspection Result
with an alert Alarm Condition is selected by the
data collection person. This message should inform
the operator of his immediate actions in this “alert”
situation.
Danger Message - This message is associated with all
Inspection Results assigned a Danger Alarm
Condition. Enter up to a 32 character message that
displays on the MDM when an Inspection Result
with a danger Alarm Condition is selected by the
data collection person. This message should inform
the operator of his immediate actions in this
“danger” situation.
4
User Manual
Adding UCC (OIL) POINTs to a Machine
Adding UCC (OIL) POINTs to a Machine
UCC (OIL) micron POINTs are created by setting the

POINT Setup dialog’s DAD field to UCC (OIL) and
selecting a micron POINT Type (100µ µ , 50µ
µ , 25µ
µ , 15µ
µ, 5
µ , 2µ
µ ). When correct settings are specified, the POINT
Setup dialog displays UCC (OIL) micron POINT setup
parameters.
Figure 4 - 18.
The UCC (OIL) POINT Setup Dialog.
4
User Manual
Modifying POINT Setups
Full Scale
Enter a number to define the maximum amplitude value
(Y-axis) on the POINT’s trend plot display.
Units
For the POINT, specify text that appears on the trend
plot’s amplitude axis (Y-axis) and in PRISM4 reports.
UCC Test ID
This Test ID is automatically associated with the
machine’s CM20 POINTs after the POINTs are saved in
the PRISM4 database. When collecting particle count data
on this machine you will input this ID into the CM20 unit.
Ø Set Overall alert and danger alarm
levels.
Use the Edit menu's Modify/Setup or Modify/By

Attribute options to modify a POINT's setup.
Modify Setup
To modify a specific POINT's setup, change its settings in
its POINT Setup dialog box. There are multiple methods
for redisplaying a POINT's POINT Setup dialog box:
• Select the POINT in the hierarchy list, then select the
Edit menu's Modify/Setup option, or
• Select the POINT in the hierarchy list, then click the
toolbar's Information button, or
• Double-click on the POINT's Identifier in the
hierarchy list.
4
User Manual
Ø Using the first two methods, you may

select multiple POINTs (using Ctrl click
operations), then click the POINT Setup
dialog box's checkmark or cancel buttons
to view the additional selected POINT
setups.
Ø Once data is stored for the measurement
POINT, its POINT Type may not be
changed.
Modify by Attribute
The Edit menu's Modify/By Attribute function allows
you to easily change specific attributes (for example,
Identifiers, alarm values, collection schedules, etc.) for one
or more machines or POINTs. It is useful for making
similar changes to a large number of machines and
POINTs. Attributes can be edited either locally or
globally.
Local - Local changes affect only the selected item
in the dialog box's hierarchical “current settings
list”.
Global - Global changes affect all open items in the
dialog box's hierarchical “current settings list”.
WARNING:
Modify by Attribute (Global) is a very powerful
PRISM4 feature. Due to far reaching consequences,
be very careful when using this global feature.
The Modify by Attribute Process

• Open the plant whose POINTs you wish to modify.
• In the plant's hierarchy list, close all POINTs and
machines.
• Open only those machines that contain POINTs whose
measurement parameters are to be changed.
4
User Manual
• Select the Edit menu's Modify/By Attribute option,

the Modify by Attribute dialog box displays.
Figure 4 - 19.
The Modify by Attribute Dialog Box.
• In the dialog's Attribute Group drop down list box,

select the attribute group that contains the attribute
you wish to modify. Note - attributes are grouped to
facilitate easier selection. When an attribute group is
selected, its attributes display in the list beneath the
Attribute Group list box.
• In the attribute list, select the option button for the
attribute you wish to modify. The attribute's current
settings display for the open POINTs in the dialog's
hierarchy list area, and the current setting for the
4
User Manual
highlighted hierarchy list item displays in the dialog's

Edit Parameter drop down list box.
• If necessary (with a local attribute change), move the
highlight to the hierarchy list item whose attribute you
wish to modify. Again, its current attribute setting
displays in the Edit Parameter drop down list box.
• The Edit Parameter drop down list box lists all
options for the selected attribute. In the list box, click
the mouse pointer to select the new attribute setting.
• At the bottom of the dialog, use either the local or
global command buttons to specify either a local
attribute setting change (for only the highlighted
hierarchy item) or a global attribute change (for all
open hierarchy items).
• Click the Local Apply command button
to change the attribute setting for the
selected hierarchy item only.
• Click the Global Apply button to change
the attribute setting for all hierarchy
items listed in the current settings list (all
open hierarchy items).
Warning:
Global attribute changes affect all open items in the
hierarchy list (even those that may not be currently
displayed in long lists). It is strongly suggested that
prior to performing a global attribute change you:
1) Close all hierarchy list items (CTRL − with the
top item highlighted).
2) Open only those hierarchy items whose attribute
you wish to modify.
Ø The selected attribute must apply to the
displayed hierarchy items for the change
to have effect. For example, attributes
that apply to measurement POINTs only
4
User Manual
(Full Scale, Averages, Speed, etc.), have

no effect on plant, SET, and machine
hierarchy items.
• After making all local and global attribute changes,
close the dialog box by clicking its checkmark
command button or by double-clicking on its control
menu box.
Attribute Groups
In the top right corner of the Modify by Attribute dialog
box, a drop down list box offers a choice of seven attribute
groups:
General - Allows local and global changes to open
hierarchical items Description, Download Enabled,
Identifier, and Schedule attributes.
Ø You may use the wildcard characters ?
and *, to make a local or global change
to the ID attribute. The ? wildcard
character leaves a single character as is,
the * wildcard character leaves the
remaining characters as is. For a local
change, wildcard characters affect plant,
SET, machine, or POINT IDs. Global
changes only affect open POINT IDs.
Overall Alarms - (active only when a POINT
hierarchy item is highlighted in the hierarchy area)
Allows local and global changes to the open
POINTs' Overall Alarm Method and alarm
settings.
Overall Alarm Method options are:
Off
Level
In Window
Out of Window
4
User Manual
Creating a New Workspace
DC Setup - Allows local and global changes to the

open POINTs' DC Setup fields, including;
Input mV/EU value, Full Scale value,
Units, and Zero Offset value.
Ø DC Setup attributes apply to DC type
POINTs only.
DAD Setup - Allows local and global changes to
DAD setup fields.
FFT Setup - Allows local and global changes to FFT
measurement setup fields (see Figure 4-16).
Logic Setup - Allows local and global changes to
fields that set up a Logic type POINT, Active State
and Logic Input.
Picolog Setup - (For Picolog POINTs) Allows local
and global changes to the Picolog POINT's Full
Scale setting.
A workspace hierarchy list is an individual “work area”

hierarchy window created by the user containing a
collection of user selected POINTs. Workspace windows
allow all Plant hierarchy window operations including
downloading, display, report, and POINT setup editing
features (excluding hierarchy item creation and copy
options).
Ø Hierarchy list machines and SETs may
not be edited in workspace windows.
Workspace windows allow the user to work on a selected
group of POINTs, without the clutter and confusion of all
other POINTs in the plant hierarchy.
4
User Manual
To create a new Workspace window:

• Select the Create menu's Workspace option, the
Workspace Info dialog box displays.
Figure 4 - 20.
The Workspace Info Dialog Box.
The Workspace Info dialog box displays fields and

command buttons that offer ID and Description
information on existing Workspaces, or that set up new
Workspaces.
Workspace Info fields include:
Workspace Name - Type up to 20 characters that identify
the Workspace. The Workspace's ID appears in the
Workspace Setup dialog box (from which you open
Workspace windows) and starts the Workspace's hierarchy
list.
Description - (optional) Type up to 25 characters that help
describe the workspace.
• After establishing the new Workspace's ID and
description, click the Workspace Info dialog box's
checkmark button to save the new Workspace's setup
and exit the Workspace Info dialog box. The dialog
box closes and the new Workspace's window displays,
4
User Manual
with the new Workspace's name starting the hierarchy

list.
• Keep the Workspace window open, and open the plant
or ROUTE windows whose hierarchy items you wish
to copy to the Workspace.
Ø Use the Window menu's Tile Horizontal
or Tile Vertical option to display all
open windows neatly on one screen.
• Use drag and drop copy operations to copy selected
POINTs, SETs, or machines (and their
parent/sub-items) from the displayed plant or ROUTE
window into the new Workspace's window to create
the new Workspace's hierarchy list. For example:
• In the Plant or ROUTE window, place the
pointer on the hierarchy item you wish to copy
to the Workspace.
• Hold down Ctrl and press and hold the left
mouse button.
• With Ctrl and the left mouse button depressed,
move the pointer from the Plant or ROUTE
window to the Workspace window (over the
Workspace ID or Workspace hierarchy item
from which you wish the copied hierarchy items
to branch). The cursor changes to a thick
vertical arrowhead when the mouse pointer
points to a legal hierarchy location.
• Release the mouse button and Ctrl. The
hierarchy items copy to the specified Workspace
hierarchy location.
Ø When copying a POINT from a plant or
ROUTE to a Workspace, the POINT's
hierarchical parents (its machine and
SETs) are copied along with the POINT.
4
User Manual
You cannot copy a POINT without also

taking its hierarchical parents.
Ø POINTs may not be copied from one
Workspace list to another Workspace
list.
Ø When a Workspace window is
minimized (click its minimize button), it
shrinks to a workspace icon identified
with the Workspace's name.
Opening Workspace Windows

To open existing Workspaces:
• Select the View menu's Workspace List option (or
use the toolbar's Workspace List button), the
Workspace Setup dialog box appears.
Figure 4 - 21.
The Workspace Setup Dialog Box.
• In the Workspace Setup dialog box, click to

highlight the Workspace name to open, then click the
checkmark command button (or double-click on the
Workspace name). The selected Workspace opens in
its Workspace window.
4
User Manual
Adding or Deleting Workspace Windows

The Workspace Setup dialog box offers + and −
command buttons for adding new Workspace windows or
for deleting existing Workspace windows:
(+) - Add a new Workspace. Press to display the
Workspace Info dialog box to set up a new
Workspace.
(−) - Delete a Workspace. Press to delete the

highlighted Workspace in the Workspace Setup
dialog box.
4
User Manual
User Notes
4
User Manual
5
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data
Transfer Operations
Overview
After establishing your database's measurement POINTs,

you are ready to create your collection ROUTEs.
Ø It is not imperative that you create
PRISM4 ROUTEs to download POINTs
to the data acquisition device.
Downloading directly from a plant
hierarchy list is discussed later in this
chapter.
A ROUTE is a measurement POINT collection sequence.
ROUTEs are downloaded to Microlog/Picolog/MARLIN
data collectors to provide orderly collection of
measurement data on a timely basis.
ROUTEs are first created on paper. You simply walk
through your facility and list (in a logical, efficient
collection sequence) the equipment and pre-defined
measurement POINTs you plan to collect at a given time.
For example, list the measurements you plan to perform
weekly (say, every Tuesday) as “Tuesday's ROUTE”,
and/or list the measurements you plan to perform monthly
as the “monthly ROUTE”.
Take time to organize your collection ROUTE paper copy
thoroughly. A complete and organized paper copy
collection ROUTE makes building PRISM4 ROUTEs
much easier.
4
User Manual
Data Collection ROUTEs and Other Data Transfer Operations
How To Build ROUTEs
After establishing your paper copy ROUTE(s), your next

task is to use your paper copy ROUTE to create a PRISM4
ROUTE.
How To Build ROUTEs
PRISM4's method for creating ROUTEs is simple.

• Create a new ROUTE window (specify a name and
collection schedule) .
• Using your paper copy ROUTE, Open the plant
windows for plants whose measurement POINTs you
wish in the ROUTE, and copy selected hierarchy
items (machines with their POINTs, or SETs with
their machines and POINTs, or the entire plant with
all its hierarchy items) from the opened plant windows
to the new ROUTE window, creating the new
ROUTE's hierarchy list.
• If necessary, move hierarchy items in the ROUTE
window to match the most efficient collection
sequence (detailed on your paper copy ROUTE).
Ø IMPORTANT - When moving
hierarchy items to create the most
efficient collection sequence, note that in
a ROUTE list, parental hierarchy items
automatically move with their
subordinate hierarchy items. For
example, you cannot move an individual
measurement POINT from one machine
to another (the POINT and its machine
must remain together). If you try, it
appears as if the machine is duplicated to
the new hierarchy list location and the
POINT moved under this new duplicate
machine. However, machine names
must be unique. When the ROUTE is
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
closed and re-opened, the new machine

and moved POINT appear back in their
original positions.
Coded Notes
The Edit menu's Modify/Coded Notes option provides for
fast input of common observations during ROUTE data
collection.
The Microlog/PRISM4 system allows you to create a list of
notes that are automatically downloaded to the connected
Microlog with each ROUTE download. Some examples of
coded notes are:
OIL LEAK
KNOCKING
OIL SPILL (HAZARD)
NEEDS GREASE
DO FOLLOW UP
These notes are then available for selection by the
Microlog operator as he collects data for each POINT on
the ROUTE. Coded notes assigned to POINTs during
ROUTE data collection are uploaded with the collected
ROUTE and stored with their assigned POINTs in the
PRISM4 database. When the POINT's plots are displayed,
the View menu's Machine Notes option allows you to
view the POINT's assigned coded notes.
To display the Coded Notes dialog box:
• Select the Edit menu's Modify/Coded Notes option.
The Coded Notes dialog box displays the current
coded notes list.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Figure 5 - 1.
To add a coded note to the list:

• Click the Coded Notes dialog's + button to display the
Add Entry dialog.
Figure 5 - 2.
• Type the new note in the dialog's text box and select
the checkmark button to save the note.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
To delete a coded note from the list:

• In the Coded Notes dialog, highlight the note to
delete.
• Click the dialog's - button, a Delete Entry dialog
prompts you to confirm the deletion.
• Confirm the deletion, the note is deleted from the list.
To edit a coded note:
• In the Coded Notes dialog, highlight the note to edit.
• Click the Coded Notes dialog's Edit button to display
the Edit Entry dialog.
Figure 5 - 3.
• Edit the coded note in the dialog's text box, and select
the checkmark button to save the edited coded note.
Operator ID
(For CMVA55 Microlog versions 3.80 and newer.)
The Operator ID feature allows the analyst to list and
download operator names to a specific Microlog. These
operator names are used to track which data is collected by
specific Microlog operators.
Ø The Microlog must be “cleared” of all
data prior to downloading an edited
operator ID list. Reference this
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Chapter's section on using the Transfer

menu's Status option to Clear the
Microlog.
When using the CMVA55 Microlog (version 3.80 and
newer), the Microlog operator first “logs in” on the
Microlog by selecting his name from a list of downloaded
operator IDs. This is done prior to collecting data.
The specified operator's name is then stored with the
measurement data collected by the operator, and uploaded
back to PRISM4 during the upload procedure, where it
may be displayed using PRISM4 reports.
Ø The Operator ID list is stored with the
PRISM4 database. The entire list is
automatically downloaded to CMVA55
version 3.80 Micrologs with all
downloads from the specific database.
The Edit menu's Modify/Operator ID option allows you
to add, delete, or edit operator IDs in the current database.
To display the Edit Operator dialog box:
• Select the Edit menu's Modify/Operator ID option.
The Edit Operator dialog box displays the current
operator list.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Figure 5 - 4.
The Edit Operator Dialog Box.
To add an operator to the list:

• Click the Edit Operator dialog's + button to display
the Add Entry dialog.
Figure 5 - 5.
• Type the new operator in the dialog's text box and

select the checkmark button to save.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
To delete an operator from the list:

• In the Edit Operator dialog, highlight the operator to
delete.
• Click the dialog's - button, a Delete Entry dialog
prompts you to confirm the deletion.
• Confirm the deletion, the operator is deleted from the
list.
To edit an operator ID:
• In the Edit Operator dialog, highlight the operator to
edit.
• Click the Edit Operator dialog's Edit button to
display the Edit Entry dialog.
Figure 5 - 6.
• Edit the ID in the dialog's text box, and select the

checkmark button to save.
To create a new ROUTE window:

• Select the Create menu's ROUTE option, the
ROUTE Info dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Figure 5 - 7.
The Route Info Dialog Box.
The ROUTE Info dialog box displays fields and command

buttons that offer ID and collection information on
existing ROUTEs, or that set up new ROUTEs.
ROUTE Info fields include:
ROUTE ID
Type up to 20 characters that identify the ROUTE. The
ROUTE's ID appears in the ROUTE Setup dialog box
(from which you open ROUTE windows) and starts the
ROUTE's hierarchy list.
Description
(optional) Type up to 25 characters that help describe the
ROUTE.
Next Due Date
The beginning collection date for the ROUTE. Defaults to
the current date. Together the Next Due Date and
Schedule fields establish the ROUTE's collection dates.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Schedule
Sets the ROUTE's collection interval (in days, starting
from the Next Due Date).
• In the ROUTE Info dialog box, enter the new
ROUTE's setup as described above.
ROUTE Instructions
At the bottom of the ROUTE Info dialog box, a ROUTE
Instructions command button allows you to create, edit,
and store instructions relating to the ROUTE. ROUTE
Instructions are downloaded to the data collection device
along with the ROUTE, and may be viewed on the data
collection device's LCD panel.
To edit a ROUTE's Instructions:
In the ROUTE's ROUTE Info dialog box, click the
ROUTE Instructions command button. The ROUTE's
Instruction Page dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Figure 5 - 8.
Example of a Route Instructions Page.
The Instruction Page dialog box offers a notepad area in

which you type any ROUTE instructions.
To type text in the notepad area:
• In the notepad area, position the mouse pointer where
you wish to position the cursor, then click to position
the cursor.
• Type your text using normal text editing procedures
(backspace, delete, word-wrap, etc).
• Click the checkmark (Save to Disk) command button
to save your instructions and exit the Instruction
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Page dialog box, or click the cancel button to cancel

the effort.
Route Instructions are permanently stored in the PRISM4
database and automatically downloaded to the data
collection device with the ROUTE.
• After establishing the new ROUTE's ID data,
collection interval data, and ROUTE Instructions,
click the ROUTE Info dialog box's checkmark button
to save the new ROUTE's setup and exit the ROUTE
Info dialog box. The dialog box closes and the new
ROUTE's window displays, with the new ROUTE's
name starting the hierarchy list.
Ø With the new ROUTE's window active,
toolbar buttons appear that reflect
ROUTE operations.
Figure 5 - 9.
Ø With version 1.30 and newer, ROUTE

lists allow all plant hierarchy window
operations including display, report, and
POINT setup editing features (excluding
hierarchy item creation and copy
options). ROUTE window toolbar
buttons reflect these added features.
Ø Hierarchy list machines and SETs may
not be edited in ROUTE hierarchy lists.
To continue creating the ROUTE

• Keep the ROUTE window open, and open the plant or
workspace windows for those plants whose
measurement POINTs you wish to copy to the
ROUTE.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Ø Use the Window menu's Tile option to

display all open windows neatly on one
screen.
Ø Downloading directly from an active
plant or workspace hierarchy list is
discussed later in this chapter.
• Use drag and drop copy operations to copy selected
POINTs, SETs, or machines (and their
parent/sub-items) from the displayed plant or
workspace windows into the new ROUTE's window to
create the new ROUTE's hierarchy list. For example:
• In the Plant window, place the pointer on the
hierarchy item you wish to copy to the ROUTE.
• Hold down Ctrl and press and hold the left
mouse button.
• With Ctrl and the left mouse button depressed,
move the pointer from the Plant window to the
ROUTE window (over the ROUTE ID or
ROUTE hierarchy item from which you wish the
copied hierarchy items to branch). The cursor
changes to a thick vertical arrowhead.
• Release the mouse button and Ctrl. The
POINTs are copied to the specified ROUTE
hierarchy item.
Ø When copying a POINT from a plant or
workspace to a ROUTE, the POINT's
hierarchical parents (its machine and
SETs) are copied along with the POINT.
You cannot copy a POINT without also
taking its parents.
Ø POINTs may not be copied from one
ROUTE list to another ROUTE list.
4
User Manual
How To Build ROUTEs
Ø When a ROUTE window is minimized

(click its minimize button), it shrinks to
a ROUTE icon named with the
ROUTE's name.
Opening ROUTE Windows

To open existing ROUTEs:
• Select the View menu's ROUTE List option (or use
the toolbar's ROUTE List button), the ROUTE Setup
dialog box appears.
Figure 5 - 10.
The ROUTE Setup Dialog Box.
• In the ROUTE Setup dialog box, click to highlight

the ROUTE name to open, then click the checkmark
command button (or double-click on the ROUTE
name). The selected ROUTE opens in its ROUTE
window.
Adding or Deleting ROUTEs
The ROUTE Setup dialog box offers + and − command

buttons for adding new ROUTEs or deleting existing
ROUTEs:
4
User Manual
Downloading ROUTEs To the Microlog or MARLIN
(+) - Add a new ROUTE. Press to display the

ROUTE Info dialog box to set up a new ROUTE.
(−) - Delete a ROUTE. Press to delete the

highlighted ROUTE in the ROUTE Setup dialog
box.
Modifying ROUTE Setups

It may become necessary to modify an existing ROUTE's
setup.
To modify a ROUTE's Setup:
• Open the ROUTE to modify in its ROUTE window.
The ROUTE's window displays, with the ROUTE's
name starting the hierarchy list.
• Click to highlight the ROUTE's name (at the top of
the hierarchy list), then click the toolbar's Information
button (or double-click the ROUTE's name). The
ROUTE Info dialog box appears.
• In the ROUTE Info dialog box, edit and save the
ROUTE's setup.
The Transfer menu's Microlog or MARLIN options

enable communication between PRISM4 and the Microlog
Data Collector/Analyzer or MARLIN data manager.
There are two types of connections for transferring data
between PRISM4 and your Microlog or MARLIN data
manager:
1. Via a direct, hard-wired connection between the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager and host
computer, or
4
User Manual
2. Via modems to an attended host computer.

Ø If you use other than hard-wired
connection, refer to your Microlog User
Manual or MARLIN User Manual for
assistance.
Connecting the Microlog to the Host

Computer
At the Microlog
• Connect the Microlog to the host computer through
the Support Module (see your Microlog User Manual
for details).
• Turn on the Microlog.
• Move its main menu pointer bar to Transfer with the
down arrow key and press the Microlog's <Enter>
button. The Microlog's Transfer screen appears and
the Microlog is ready to communicate with the host.
See the Microlog instruction manual for details.
Figure 5 - 11.
The Microlog’s Transfer Screen.
4
User Manual
Connecting the MARLIN data manager to the

Host Computer
At the MARLIN data manager
• Connect the MARLIN data manager to the host
computer (see your MARLIN User Manual for
details).
• Turn on the MARLIN data manager.
• Press the Transfer command button. The MARLIN
data manager's Transfer screen appears and the
MARLIN data manager is waiting to communicate
with the host computer.
Figure 5 - 12.
The MARLIN data manager's Transfer Screen.
4
User Manual
At the Host Computer

There are two methods for downloading ROUTEs to the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager:
Use the Transfer menu's Download/From ROUTE
List option to list all ROUTEs in the Download
ROUTE dialog box, then select a ROUTE to
download from the displayed ROUTE list, or
from an active ROUTE window, use the ROUTE
toolbar's Download button to immediately download
the ROUTE displayed in the active ROUTE window.
Figure 5 - 13.
The Download ROUTE Screen.
Ø Force Spectrum Collection, Download

Spectral Bands, and Download FAM
Information check boxes are not
applicable to MARLIN or Picolog
downloads.
4
User Manual
A Force Spectrum Collection check box appears at the

bottom of the Download ROUTE dialog box. For
Microlog downloads, this feature forces spectrum
collection on every overall measurement. Use it for
baseline data collection and/or data collection before or
after a machine overhaul (when collected spectra are
necessary for every POINT).
• If forced spectrum collection is desired, click to check
the Force Spectrum Collection check box.
A Download Spectral Bands check box appears at the
bottom of the Download ROUTE dialog box. If
downloading to a Microlog firmware version 3.80 or
newer, this feature downloads spectral band alarms for the
downloaded POINTs.
• If spectral band alarms are desired, click to check the
Download Spectral Bands check box.
A Download FAM Information check box appears at the
bottom of the Download ROUTE dialog box. If
downloading to a Microlog firmware version 3.80 or
newer, this feature downloads bearing fault frequency
information associated with the downloaded POINTs.
Ø When downloading to a MARLIN data
manager, a Download Last #
Measurements field allows you to
specify how many historical records to
download for each downloaded POINT.
This historical data is automatically
displayed in MARLIN data manager
trends.
Ø At this time, you may wish to clear the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager
prior to selecting and downloading your
ROUTE. If you don't, the downloaded
ROUTE(s) will be added to any ROUTEs
4
User Manual
already stored in the Microlog or

MARLIN data manager.
To clear the Microlog or MARLIN data manager:
Select the Transfer menu's Status option, the Microlog
Status or MARLIN Status dialog box appears and
displays the connected Microlog's or MARLIN data
manager's status.
Figure 5 - 14.
The Status Dialog Box.
4
User Manual
Fields in the Microlog or MARLIN Status dialog box are:

Internal clock: Date and time from the Microlog's
or MARLIN data manager's clock.
Data directory: The host computer's data directory
currently resident in the Microlog's or MARLIN data
manager's memory.
Ø PRISM4's current database directory
must match the Microlog or MARLIN
data manager database directory, else
downloading is not allowed until the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager is
“cleared”.
POINTs Downloaded: Number of measurement
POINTs currently stored in the Microlog or
MARLIN data manager.
Version: The Microlog or MARLIN data manager
firmware's version number.
Free RAM: The percent of the Microlog's or
MARLIN data manager memory that is free for
storage.
Internal Temperature: The Microlog's internal
temperature.
Battery: The Microlog or MARLIN battery's
voltage level.
Status: Not used for this application.
Beneath the status area, a Collector ROUTEs list box
displays a list of all ROUTEs currently downloaded in the
Microlog collector or MARLIN data manager.
Clear, Configure, and Reset command buttons are
available beneath the downloaded ROUTE(s) list.
Clear - This choice clears the entire Microlog or
MARLIN data manager. It erases all data, SETs,
4
User Manual
machines, POINTs, ROUTEs, ROUTE instructions,

non-ROUTE POINTs, coded notes, and operator IDs
(Microlog only) stored in the Microlog or MARLIN
data manager. It does not change Microlog menu
setups.
Configure - Use this option when the Microlog's or
MARLIN data manager's internal clock is incorrect.
It resets the Microlog's or MARLIN data manager's
date, time, database directory, and so on to match
those in PRISM4 and the host computer.
Reset - This choice clears collected data but leaves
the downloaded SETs, machines, and POINTs.
For the Microlog, it deletes all spectral data, deletes
all non-ROUTE POINTs and POINT data, and resets
the current measurement data to zero for all POINTs
(current values are retained as LAST values).
ROUTEs, SETs, machines, POINT sequence, and
measurement instructions are not affected.
For the Microlog and MARLIN data manager, this
process allows you to take data for a ROUTE, upload
it, reset the data out of the Microlog or MARLIN
data manager without losing the ROUTEs, SETs,
machines, or POINTs, and then take data on the
same ROUTEs, SETs, machines, or POINTs again.
To select a ROUTE to download:

• Select the Transfer menu's Microlog or MARLIN
option to enable communication with the Microlog
data collector or MARLIN data manager.
• Select the Transfer menu's Download/From ROUTE
List option. The Download ROUTE dialog box
displays a list of available ROUTEs.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 15.
Ø Force Spectrum Collection, Download

Spectral Bands, and Download FAM
Information check boxes are not
applicable to MARLIN data manager
downloads.
trends. (Download Last #
Measurements requires 2.0 or higher
firmware.)
• In the ROUTE list, click to highlight the first ROUTE
you wish to download.
4
User Manual
• To download the selected (highlighted) ROUTE, click

the dialog box's checkmark command button. The
selected ROUTE downloads to the connected
Microlog or MARLIN data manager. A progress
dialog box indicates progress.
Ø Click the progress dialog box's cancel
command button to abort the download.
Ø If a message appears “Microlog (or
MARLIN) is not Responding,” make
sure the communications parameters in
PRISM4 and in the data collector are
identical. See Chapter 2, Installation
and Setup for help with setting PRISM4
communication parameters.
The Microlog/MARLIN data manager Transfer screens
display information relating to the download.
Figure 5 - 16.
The Microlog’s Transfer Screen.
Ø On the Microlog's or MARLIN data

manager's ROUTE list, a NONROUTE
item always displays at the top. This is
4
User Manual
Downloading Directly from an Active Hierarchy
an area in the Microlog or MARLIN data

manager reserved for collection of
non-ROUTE data.
Ø On the Microlog's ROUTE list, an “N”
or “D” indicator appears to the left of
downloaded SET and POINT IDs.
• “N”- No data is stored in the Microlog
or MARLIN data manager for the SET
or POINT.
• “D” - Data is stored for the SET or
POINT.
You may repeat the above steps to download another
ROUTE, or disconnect the data collector and use the
downloaded ROUTE to efficiently collect your machinery
measurement data. Refer to the Microlog User Manual
or MARLIN User Manual for details.
It is not imperative that you create PRISM4 ROUTEs to

download POINTs to the data acquisition device. You can
download POINTs directly from a plant or workspace
hierarchy list.
To download directly from the active

hierarchy list:
• In the active hierarchy list, select (highlight) or open
all POINTs to download (and only POINTs to
download, close or unselect machines and POINTs
you do not wish to download).
• Select the Transfer menu's Microlog option (to
enable communication with the Microlog data
collector).
4
User Manual
• Select the Transfer menu's Download/From Active

Hierarchy option. The Download From Hierarchy
dialog box appears.
Figure 5 - 17.
• Use the Download From Hierarchy dialog box's

Name field to issue the download a descriptive name
that identifies the downloaded hierarchy items on the
Microlog's ROUTE list.
• Use the option buttons to select whether to download
Open Nodes (open hierarchy items) or Selected
Nodes (highlighted hierarchy items) in the hierarchy
list.
• (For Microlog only) Use the Force Spectrum,
Download Spectral Bands, and Download FAM
Information check boxes to enable or disable forced
spectrum collection, to download spectral band
alarms, and to download FAM information as
described in this chapter's previous “Downloading
ROUTEs” section.
4
User Manual
Checking the Picolog's Status

trends. (Download Last #
Measurements requires 2.0 or higher
firmware.)
When finished configuring the active hierarchy download,
click the Download From Hierarchy dialog's checkmark
button. The download proceeds. A progress dialog box
indicates the download's progress.
Ø Click the progress dialog box's cancel
command button to abort the download.
Checking the Picolog's Status
The Transfer menu's Picolog option provides

downloading and uploading communications between the
Picolog data collector and PRISM4 for Windows.
You may wish to check the Picolog's status and possibly
clear the Picolog prior to selecting and downloading your
ROUTE.
To check the Picolog's status:

• Select the Transfer menu's Picolog option to establish
the Picolog as the data collection device.
• Select the Transfer menu's Status option, the Picolog
Status dialog box appears and displays the connected
Picolog's ID number and Units.
4
User Manual
Downloading ROUTEs to the Picolog
Buttons at the bottom of the Picolog Status dialog box

allow you to:
Clear the Picolog. Erase all data, SETs, machines,
POINTs, ROUTEs, and non-ROUTE POINTs.
Print a paper ROUTE for POINTs stored in the
Picolog. The paper ROUTE shows POINT numbers
and POINT IDs in their collection sequence.
Exit the Picolog Status dialog box.
As with the Microlog, there are two methods for

downloading ROUTEs to the Picolog:
• First, select the Transfer menu's Picolog option.
Then either:
• Use the Transfer menu's Download/From ROUTE
option to list all ROUTEs in the Download ROUTE
dialog box, then select a Picolog ROUTE to download
from the displayed ROUTE list, or
• From an active Picolog ROUTE window, use the
ROUTE toolbar's Download button to immediately
download the ROUTE displayed in the active ROUTE
window.
Ø You can download Picolog POINTs to
the Picolog directly from a plant's
hierarchy list. Follow Downloading
Directly from a Plant's Hierarchy List
procedures described in the previous
section.
To connect the Picolog to the host computer:

• Turn the Picolog off!
4
User Manual
• In the Picolog's battery compartment, set the

Printer/RS-232C switch to the RS-232C position.
• Attach the Picolog communications cable between
your computer's serial port and the Picolog's
communication port (arrow facing upward).
• Press the Picolog's HOLD button while turning on the
Picolog, then release the HOLD button. The 232C
message appears in the Picolog's display.
To download a Picolog ROUTE using the

Transfer menu:
• First, select the Transfer menu's Picolog option to
enable communication with the Picolog data collector.
• Select the Transfer menu's Download option, then
select the From ROUTE option. The Download
ROUTE dialog box displays a list of available
ROUTEs.
• In the ROUTE list, click to highlight the first ROUTE
you wish to download.
Ø The Force Spectrum Collection option
is not applicable to Picolog operations.
• To download the selected (highlighted) ROUTE, click
the dialog box's checkmark command button. The
Picolog is re-initialized, then the ROUTE's POINTs
are downloaded to the Picolog.
Ø If a ROUTE was previously downloaded
to the Picolog you are prompted whether
to overwrite the previously downloaded
ROUTE.
• Turn the Picolog off and disconnect the Picolog
communications cable.
4
User Manual
Uploading Data from the Microlog or MARLIN data manager
Uploading Data from the Microlog or MARLIN data

manager
After you have completed collecting data, perhaps finding

one or more alarm exceptions, re-connect the Microlog or
MARLIN data manager and establish communications
using the same procedure outlined earlier for downloading.
There are two methods for uploading ROUTEs from the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager:
Use the Transfer menu's Upload option to list all
ROUTEs in the Upload ROUTE dialog box, then
select a ROUTE(s) to upload from the displayed
ROUTE list, or
from an active ROUTE window, use the ROUTE
tool bar's Upload button to immediately upload the
“active” ROUTE from the Microlog or MARLIN
data manager.
To upload using the Transfer menu:

• Connect the data collector to the Host Computer.
• Select the Transfer menu's Microlog or MARLIN
option, PRISM4 establishes communications with the
Microlog or MARLIN data manager.
• Select the Transfer menu's Upload option, the
Upload ROUTE dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
Uploading Data from the Microlog or MARLIN data manager
Figure 5 - 18.
• In the Upload ROUTE dialog box, click to select

(highlight) ROUTEs to upload:
Ø If existing and selected for upload,
uploaded non-ROUTE POINTs are
placed in a special PRISM4
“Non-ROUTE” plant. If the
Non-ROUTE plant does not yet exist,
PRISM4 automatically creates it. For
each upload, a machine is created in the
non-ROUTE plant and named with the
date and time the uploaded non-ROUTE
POINTs were processed. Uploaded
non-ROUTE POINTs are then uploaded
to the machine named with their upload
processing date and time.
Non-ROUTE - Uploads only non-ROUTE POINTs.
All uploaded non-ROUTE POINTs are placed in the
Non-ROUTE plant and organized as described
above.
4
User Manual
Processing Uploaded Microlog or MARLIN data manager Data
A specific ROUTE - Uploads the POINTs for the

highlighted ROUTE in the ROUTE list.
Brute Force
A Brute Force check box is provided near the bottom of
the Upload ROUTE dialog box. If enabled, a brute force
upload creates new PRISM4 POINTs for all uploaded
collector POINTs (even if the uploaded POINTs already
exist in the PRISM4 database) and uploads all data into
these new PRISM4 POINTs (to the Non-ROUTE plant).
This is useful when uploading any collector's data into the
PRISM4 database.
Like non-ROUTE POINTs, brute force POINTs are
uploaded to PRISM4's Non-ROUTE plant and placed
within a newly created machine (named with the brute
force upload's processing date and time).
• After selecting which POINTs to upload, use the
Brute Force check box to select whether to use brute
force to create new POINTs for the uploaded data.
• Initiate the upload by clicking the Upload ROUTE
dialog box's checkmark command button. The
selected Microlog or MARLIN data manager POINTs
upload to a PRISM4 temporary file.
Ø Uploaded data must then be processed
into the PRISM4 database. Processing
procedures follow.
Processing Uploaded Microlog or MARLIN data

manager Data
Uploading data to a temporary file allows you to upload

multiple ROUTEs from multiple Micrologs or MARLIN
data managers quickly, without waiting for lengthy upload
processing. However, operations performed prior to
4
User Manual
processing uploaded data do not recognize un-processed

data. A Need to Process icon appears at the bottom of the
screen to inform you that un-processed (uploaded) data
exists.
Ø Double-click the Need to Process icon to
display a list of Users with un-processed
data.
To process uploaded data:

• Select the Transfer menu's Process Upload Data
option to process and store all uploaded measurements
in the PRISM4 database, and to update hierarchy list
alarm status indicators for the uploaded data.
Ø On multi-user systems, no other user
may process data uploaded by you.
Ø The Microlog data collector or MARLIN
data manager may be disconnected prior
to processing upload data.
“Automatic” Upload Report Option
If you wish, you may enable PRISM4's “automatic” Upload
report option. If enabled, the automatic Upload report
automatically produces a hard copy of user selected data
for uploaded POINTs immediately following upload data
processing (for example, automatically report the last
measurement value for the uploaded POINTs, or report
POINTs in exception of their alarm criteria, or both).
After processing uploaded data, the Upload Report Setup
dialog box automatically displays, allowing you to format
the Upload report.
To format the Upload report:

If not already displayed, select the Report menu's Upload
option to display the Upload Report Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 19.
At the top of the dialog box are Format File, Description,

and Report Title fields:
Format File - A drop down list box allows you to
select a pre-defined Format file to quickly format the
Upload report.
Description - Allows you to input a 20 character
report description that appears at the top of the
report.
Report Title - Allows you to input a 20 character
report title that appears at the top of the report.
4
User Manual
At the middle right of the dialog box is a check box to

enable Automatic Upload reporting.
• Select this option to enable Automatic Upload
reporting.
To the left of the Upload Report Setup dialog box are
check boxes that allow you to include up to five categories
of measurement data in the Upload report.
Missed POINTs - Reports POINTs for which no
data was collected.
Upload Statistics - Reports the upload's statistics.
POINTs with Notes - Reports any POINTs for
which notes were assigned.
Exception Report - Reports POINTs in exception of
their alarm criteria.
Last Measurement Report - Reports the last
collected measurement for each uploaded POINT.
• Use the check boxes to select which data to include in
the automatic Upload report.
To the right of the dialog box are three command buttons
that allow you to view or edit the Upload report's
Exception Criteria, Format, or Column Sequence.
Criteria
Permits viewing and/or changing settings in the Exception
Criteria Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 20.
The Exception Criteria Setup Dialog Box.
Exception Criteria Setup fields are:

Alarm (A1/A2) - PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria,
overall values in excess of either alarm limit.
Phase Angle Alarm (V) - PRISM4 uses, as
exception criteria, departure of an amplitude/phase
vector from an acceptance region.
Spectrum Envelope Alarm (E) - PRISM4 uses, as
exception criteria, penetration of a narrow band
spectrum envelope.
Alarm Forecast (F1/F2) - PRISM4 will use, as
exception criteria, a projected overall value which
4
User Manual
crosses alarm setpoints within a specified time

period.
Days to Project - Enter the number of days
from the last measurement that the trend
should be projected into the future.
(Recommend at least three times the
monitoring interval.)
Min Overalls - Enter the minimum number
of most recent overall samples to be used in
curve fit computation. (Recommended: 3.)
Max Overalls - Enter the maximum
number of most recent overall samples to be
used in curve fit computation.
(Recommended: 20.)
Statistic Alarm (S) - PRISM4 uses, as exception
criteria, the current overall value in excess of the
mean plus a specified standard deviation.
Standard Dev - Enter the number of
standard deviations above the mean
amplitude to establish an exception
amplitude.
Min Overalls - Enter the minimum number
of overall values to be included in
computing the statistical alarm.
(Recommended: 5.)
Max Overalls - Enter the maximum
number of overall values to be included in
computing the statistical alarm.
(Recommended: 20.)
Spectral Banding Alarm - PRISM4 uses, as
exception criteria, alert and danger spectral banding
- the peak (lower case) or overall (upper case) value
has passed alert or danger spectral bands.
4
User Manual
Overall (A /D) - Spectral band alert and

danger overall setpoints.
Peak (a /d) - Spectral band alert and danger
peak setpoints.
Both (Aa/Ad/Da/Dd) - Spectral band alert
and danger overall and peak setpoints.
Percent Change Alarm (%) - PRISM4 uses, as
exception criteria, percentage of change between the
last two overall values in excess of a specified
percentage.
Percent - Enter the percentage of change
between the most recent pair of overall
values which must be exceeded to initiate
an alarm.
Percent Full Scale - A floor value below
which percentage changes will be ignored.
This prevents exceptions being initiated by
large, irrelevant percentage changes
between two very small absolute
amplitudes.
Ø Exceptions set here dictate exceptions
throughout PRISM4.
After making changes in the Exception Criteria Setup
dialog box, click the checkmark button to save your
changes. You return to the Upload Report Setup dialog
box.
Format
Permits viewing and/or changing settings in the
Automatic Upload Report Format dialog box.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 21.
The Automatic Upload Report Format Dialog Box.
• Use the check boxes to select how the uploaded data is

plotted and reported in the automatic Upload report.
Ø Selected data formats must be available
to print in the automatic Upload report.
For example, if POINTs are not
configured with spectral bands, no
spectral band data is included.
• After selecting how uploaded data is to be formatted,
click the dialog box's checkmark command button to
save the settings and exit the dialog box. You return
to the Upload Report Setup dialog box.
Sequence
Permits viewing and/or changing settings in the Custom
Column Sequence dialog box.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 22.
The Custom Column Sequence Dialog Box.
The Custom Column Sequence dialog box allows you to

customize the Upload report's column sequence by
selecting attributes to print in the report. It is divided into
two list boxes separated by left and right arrow command
buttons.
You define which attributes print in the report (in
columnar form from left to right) by moving attribute
names from the left list box to the right list box. Attributes
in the right list box print in columnar form in the Upload
report.
To select an attribute for the Upload report:
• Using the mouse pointer, click to highlight the
attribute in the left list box.
• Click the >> command button between the list boxes.
The attribute moves to the right list box to be included
in the report.
4
User Manual
To unselect attributes in the right list box:

attribute in the right list box.
• Click the << command button between the list boxes.
The attribute moves to the left list box and is not
included in the report.
After selecting all attributes to be included in the Upload
report, click the dialog box's checkmark command button
to save the custom column sequence and exit the dialog
box. You return to the Upload Report Setup dialog box.
Format File
At the bottom of the Upload Report Setup dialog box are
command buttons that allow you to save the report's format
to a Format File for quick and easy future selection of the
same report setup.
Name Format File - changes the Format File drop down
list box to a text box, allowing you to enter a new format
file name. You'll use this name for future selection of the
format file.
Save Format File - After naming the new Format file, this
button saves the report's format to a Format File for future
selection, naming the new format file as described in the
Format File field.
• If desired, name and save the report's setup to a new
Format File.
• Select the Upload Report Setup dialog box's
checkmark command button to save the Upload report
setup and exit the dialog box.
4
User Manual
Uploading Picolog Data
Uploading Picolog Data
After you have completed collecting data, reconnect the

Picolog using the same procedure outlined earlier for
downloading Picolog data.
Ø Since the Picolog stores one ROUTE
maximum, the Transfer menu's Upload
option and the Upload toolbar button
operate identically.
To upload from the Picolog

• Connect the Picolog and the Host Computer.
• Select the Transfer menu's Picolog option.
• Select the Transfer menu's Upload option (or, from a
ROUTE window, select the toolbar's Upload button).
The Picolog's collected measurement POINTs upload
to PRISM4 and are immediately processed.
Ø Uploaded Picolog POINT's do not
require you to Process Upload Data.
Ø To perform another upload on a
previously uploaded ROUTE, you must
first re-download the ROUTE from
PRISM4 to the Picolog, then re-collect
the data. Re-downloading the ROUTE
resets the Picolog, allowing additional
uploads.
Uploading CM20 Data
After you have completed collecting particle count data,

connect the CM20 to the Host Computer.
Ø Reference your UCC CM20 Owner’s
Manual for detailed instructions on
4
User Manual
Manual Data Transfer
performing particle count tests and

entering Test ID codes on the CM20.
To upload from the CM20

• Connect the CM20’s communications cable (UCC
Part No. UC.B.84.708) to the CM20’s RS232 port and
to the serial communications port on the host
computer running PRISM4 for Windows software.
• In PRISM4, select the Transfer menu's CM20 option.
• Select the Transfer menu's Upload option. The
CM20's collected measurement POINTs upload to
PRISM4 and are immediately processed.
Ø Uploaded CM20 POINT's do not require
you to Process Upload Data.
Use manual data transfer to manually enter overall

measurement values into your PRISM4 database. This
feature allows you to store, trend, and analyze
measurements made with the SKF Pens (VibPen Plus,
SEE Pen, and ThermoPen). Also, other machinery
operating conditions such as flow, speed, and pressure can
be manually input and trended.
To manually enter data:

• Open all POINTs whose data you wish to manually
enter.
• Select the Transfer menu's Manual Entry option.
The manual entry dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
Figure 5 - 23.
The Manual Entry Dialog Box.
The Manual Entry dialog box displays the active plant's ID

on its title bar. The plant's hierarchy and measurement
data display in columnar format.
The dialog box's four columns display information for
open hierarchy items. Displayed information includes:
ID - Sequentially displays each hierarchy item's ID.
Parental hierarchy items must be open for their
sub-items to display.
Date - Displays the date and time the manual input
was entered (timestamp). Initially displays the
current date and time. May be edited.
Value - The measurement's value (entered by the
user). The Value column accepts numeric input
only.
Units - Displays the POINT's measurement Units as
entered in the POINT Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
To manually input data:

• Point and click on the Value cell (intersection of
column and row) to edit.
• Edit the value using normal text editing procedures.
• Repeat for all cells needing input or editing.
• When finished, click the dialog box's checkmark
command button to save the manual input to the
PRISM4 database and exit the dialog box.
4
User Manual
User Notes
4
User Manual
6
Displaying Graphic Plots
Overview
After uploading your measurement data to PRISM4, you

can easily display the collected measurements in various
graphic plot formats for machinery analysis purposes.
Graphic plot formats include:
• Overall Trend Plots (single and overlay)
Single - When a single measurement is selected in
the hierarchy, displays the measurement in its own
plot.
Overlay - When multiple measurements are selected
for display, superimposes all selected measurements
of the same type in one plot.
• FFT Spectrum Plots (single, overlay, waterfall, and
palogram)
• Frequency Trend Plots
• Time Waveform Plots (single and overlay)
• Polar Vector Plots
Ø The first part of this chapter describes
various methods for displaying
measurements in graphic plot format.
The remainder of the chapter discusses
analysis tools used to manipulate graphic
displays, to obtain useful analysis data.
4
User Manual
How To Display Graphic Plots
PRISM4 offers multiple methods for displaying

measurement data in plot format. Each method has its
advantages. However, regardless of the selected method,
the first step in displaying graphic plots is to open the
plant, ROUTE, or workspace whose measurements you
wish to display.
Ø Printing graphic displays is discussed in
Chapter 7, Generating and Printing
PRISM4 Reports. However, the File
menu's Print option may be used at any
time to print the contents of the “active”
window (including graphic display
windows).
To open the plant, ROUTE, or workspace whose data
you wish to display:
• Click the toolbar's Plant List, ROUTE List,
Workspace List icon to display the list dialog box.
• In the plant, ROUTE, or workspace list dialog box,

click to highlight the plant(s), ROUTE, or workspace
to open and click the checkmark button. The
highlighted items open in their respective hierarchy
list windows.
Use one of the following methods for displaying
measurement data in graphic plot format.
• Use the toolbar's Display Trend, Display Spectrum, or
Display Waterfall graphic display buttons.
• Use the Display menu's graphic display options.
4
User Manual
Displaying Plots Using Graphic Display

Toolbar Buttons
By highlighting POINTs in the hierarchy list and using

Trend, Spectrum, Waterfall, or time waveform graphic
display toolbar buttons, you are able to quickly display
graphic plots for selected measurement POINTs.
• Select (highlight) the POINT(s) you wish to display in
the hierarchy list.
Ø Use CTRL click operations to select and
unselect multiple POINTs for display.
• Click one of the toolbar's graphic display buttons to
display the selected measurement(s) in a specific type
of plot (overall trend, FFT spectrum, or waterfall).
Ø Single vs. Overlay - If more than one
measurement is selected for display
(highlighted), the measurements are
superimposed in an Overlay plot.
Advantages
Allows quick display.
Allows you to select POINTs from the hierarchy list.
Allows POINT selection from multiple machines.
Disadvantages
Palogram, polar vector, mag/phase trend, orbit, and
shaft centerline display buttons do not exist.
Displaying Plots Using the Display Menu

Display menu graphic display operations are similar to
toolbar button graphic display operations.
4
User Manual
• Highlight POINT(s) you wish to display in the

hierarchy list (use Ctrl click operations to select and
unselect multiple POINTs).
• From the top of the Display menu, select the
appropriate option for displaying a specific type of
plot (Trend [including Spectral Band trends],
Spectra [including Waterfall and Palogram], Time
waveform, or Phase [Polar Vector]).
Ø The last two options, Orbit and Shaft
Centerline, are for On-Line systems use,
reference your On-Line Systems User
Ø Depending on the selected POINTs'
POINT Types, some graphic display
options may not be applicable (in which
case the menu option is dimmed).
Ø Display menu “Overlay” plot options
will overlay POINTs of different POINT
Types in an Overlay plot.
Advantages
Allows display of every graphic plot type that applies
to the selected POINT(s).
Dimming of non-applicable graphic plot options
provides useful feedback on POINT selections and
graphic plot possibilities.
Allows you to select POINTs for display from the
hierarchy list.
Allows POINT selection from multiple machines.
Overlays POINTs of different POINT Types in an
Overlay plot.
4
User Manual
The Machine Attributes Window
Disadvantages
Not quite as quick and convenient as using the
toolbar's graphic display buttons.
For a specified machine, the Machine Attributes window

lists all POINTs with stored data, and allows access to
each POINT’s Acquired Data List (which displays
POINT setup, amplitude, and historical information for the
specified POINT). The Machine Attributes window also
allows you to access machine notes and allows you to
specify automatic “barcode” identification for the machine
(for MARLIN data manager POINTs).
To access a machine’s Machine Attributes window:
• In the plant’s hierarchy list, select a machine ID, then
select the Info toolbar button (or double-click on the
name of the machine whose stored data you wish to
list). The selected machine’s Machine Attributes
window appears (Figure 6-1).
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 1.
A Machine Attributes Window.
The Machine Attributes window displays the specified

machine’s name, description, download status, and stored
measurements.
ID and Download Status Area

At the top of the Machine Attributes window, text boxes
display the machine’s name and description. Another
4
User Manual
check box indicates the machine’s download status.

Information in these fields may be edited and saved.
Changes reflect in the plant’s hierarchy list.
Beneath the machine ID and download status area, the
Machine Attributes window contains the “Data List”
area.
Data List Area

In the Data List area, POINT IDs for the machine’s
POINTs with stored measurement data list in their
hierarchy sequence. POINTs without stored data do not
list. Measurements stored for each listed POINT list below
each POINT’s ID.
Command Buttons
To the right of the Data List area is the Acquired Data List
command button:
Acquired Data List - Displays the Acquired Data
List dialog box which displays POINT Setup
information, statistical information, and historical
timestamp data for selected measurement(s).
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 2.
A Spectral Measurement’s Acquired Data List.
Information displayed in the Acquired Data List varies

depending on the selected measurement’s type.
Spectral Measurements
Top Area - Displays plant, machine, and POINT ID
information.
Middle Area - Displays measurement POINT Setup
information, the measurement’s overall amplitude,
and synchronous, sub-synchronous, and non-
synchronous amplitudes.
4
User Manual
Bottom Area - Displays the measurement’s stored

data records (identified by timestamp). The
highlighted record’s amplitude information displays
in the middle area.
Overall Vibration Measurements
information, the measurement’s overall alarm
settings, units, and the standard deviation and mean
values for the highlighted record in the bottom area.
data records (identified by timestamp) and their
overall vibration amplitude values.
Time Waveform Measurements
information.
data records (identified by timestamp).
Phase Measurements
information
Middle Area - Displays the measurement’s units
and alarm acceptance regions setpoints.
data records (identified by timestamp).
Process Measurements
information, the measurement’s overall alarm
settings, units, and the standard deviation and mean
values for the highlighted record in the bottom area.
4
User Manual

data records (identified by timestamp) and their
overall vibration amplitude values.
Ø If more than one stored measurement is
selected and the Acquired Data List is
displayed, the first selected measurement
displays its “acquired” data. To
sequentially view “acquired” data for
other selected measurements, click the
Acquired Data List’s cancel command
button. As you do, the Acquired Data
List sequences to show each selected
measurement’s acquired data.
Deleting Historical Data
Ø This procedure is active when the
Acquired Data List dialog box is
accessed from the Machine Attributes
window.
• Use the Delete command button to delete historical
data for the highlighted timestamp in the historical
data list.
Ø The selected timestamp is not
permanently deleted until you click the
Acquired Data List’s checkmark
command button.
Ø You may cancel your deletion attempt by
clicking the cancel command button.
Machine Notes
In the Machine Attributes window, to the right of the
machine’s download status check box, is the machine
notes command button. Click it to display the Machine
Notes dialog box.
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 3.
Example of a Machine Notes Dialog Box.
Ø The View/Machine Notes option

provides an alternate method for
displaying Machine Notes.
• From the “Plant” hierarchy list (not a ROUTE or
Workspace list), select any group of POINTs,
Machines, or SETs (or the Plant hierarchy item) and
select the View menu’s Machine Notes option. The
Machine Notes dialog displays. From the Machines
list, select the machine whose notes you wish to
review/edit, or
4
User Manual
• Display a plot for a POINT in the hierarchy list, and

select the View /Machine Notes option.
The machine notes dialog box offers a Machine Notes
area in which you type notes relating to the machine’s
history.
To type text in the Machine Notes area:
• In the Machine Notes area, position the mouse
pointer where you wish to position the cursor, then
click to position the cursor.
• Type your text using normal text editing procedures
(backspace, delete, word-wrap, etc.).
• Click the checkmark(Save to Disk) command button
to save your notes, or click the cancel command
button to cancel the effort.
Machine notes are permanently stored in the PRISM4
database and may be viewed or edited using the above
procedure, or printed in hardcopy reports.
Scan Device
(For MARLIN data manager POINTs only)
The scan device button provides a method to determine
whether to use the MARLIN data manager’s built in
barcode scanner to identify machines for quick and easy
data collection without following a prescribed ROUTE.
Typically, this determination is made when setting up the
new machine.
When the Barcode option is selected for a specific
machine (and a barcode identification label is placed on
the machine), you are able to approach the machine at
random (not following a specific ROUTE), scan the
machine’s barcode label with the MARLIN data
manager’s built in barcode scanner, and the MARLIN data
manager automatically positions its hierarchy list pointer
4
User Manual
on the appropriate machine in its hierarchy, for quick,

easy, and accurate data collection on the randomly
approached machine.
In the Machine Attributes window, to the right of the
Machine Notes command button, is the Scan Device
button. Click it to display the Machine Identification
Tag dialog box.
The Machine Identification Tag dialog box offers a
Location Method drop down list box from which to select
whether or not to use the MARLIN data manager’s
barcode scanner. Options are: None or Barcode.
Ø If None is selected, the MARLIN data
manager’s barcode scanning
identification feature is not available.
Machines and data collection POINTs
must be located using cursor methods in
the hierarchy list.
• Beneath the Location Method list box is Location
Tag text box. If the Barcode Location Method is
selected, type the machine’s barcode ID (as alpha
numeric text) in the Location Tag text box. This
associates the barcode label on the machine with the
machine hierarchy item in the PRISM4 database.
Ø The Location Tag’s alpha numeric text
is duplicated (as barcode) on a label that
the actual barcode labels placed on the
machinery. Many software packages
service.
Ø Rather than typing in each machine’s
Location Tag alpha numeric text, you
may use a feature in the MARLIN data
4
User Manual
Manipulating Graphic Displays
manager that allows you to scan the

machine’s barcode label and associate
the barcode ID with the highlighted
machine in the MARLIN ROUTE.
When you upload and process the
collected ROUTE data, the machine’s
barcode Location Tag is automatically
associated with its proper machine in the
PRISM4 database.
Select the appropriate scan device option and click
the checkmark button.
Manipulating Graphic Displays
Machinery measurements can be displayed in a variety of

graphic display formats that aid machinery analysis.
• Trend Plots (individual, overlay, and spectral band
trends)
• FFT Spectrum Plots (individual, overlay, waterfall,
and palogram)
• Time Waveform Plots (individual and overlay)
• Polar Vector Plots
• Frequency Trend Plots
For each type of graphic display, PRISM4 provides tools
used to manipulate the graphic display to gain valuable
analysis information. These tools are available from
PRISM4 menu's and from the toolbar (which changes
according to the active graphic display type). Each
graphic display type and its management tools are detailed
in following sections.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Single Trend Plots
Figure 6 - 4.
A Single Trend Plot with Information Area Displayed.
Trend plots allow you to easily compare a measurement

POINT's most recent reading against its previous readings,
and its alarm setpoints, allowing you to see how the
POINT is “trending” over time. Trend plots are an easy
and accurate method of detecting gradual changes in
machinery condition, changes that might otherwise be
overlooked.
Overlay Trend Plots
In addition to displaying trend plots for individual
POINTs, you can display multiple POINTs' trends (from
the same machine or from different machines) in one
graphic display window in an Overlay trend plot. This
allows easy comparison between various POINTs' trends.
multiple POINTs for trend plot display.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Figure 6 - 5.
Example of an Overlay Trend Plot.
In a trend plot, the X-axis (horizontal axis) represents time

and the Y-axis (vertical axis) represents magnitude.
Ø Graphic Display Colors may be set from
the File menu's Preferences option.
Ø A single cursor and the trended POINT's
overall alarm setpoints automatically
display on single trend plots, however
alarm setpoints do not display on overlay
trend plots.
Trend Plot Toolbar Tools

When an trend plot is displayed in the active window,
toolbar buttons change to reflect trend plot “management”
tools.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Figure 6 - 6.
Trend Plot Toolbar Buttons.
From left to right, trend plot tools are:

POINT Info
Displays the plotted POINT's plot color, ID, measurement
type, and most recent collection date and time beneath the
plotted data. Also displays alert and danger alarm
setpoint plot colors and values.
Figure 6 - 7.
The Information Area Beneath a Trend Display.
Ø In the Information area, double-click on

a POINT's information to display the
POINT's Acquired Data List.
Cursor/Single
(also available from the Display menu) Adds an
individual cursor to the active plot.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Ø A single cursor automatically displays on

all graphic plots.
You may add as many individual cursors as you wish. On
the plot, the cursor appears as a colored square with a
vertical line. The vertical line helps identify the cursor
location on the X-axis, the square indicates the
measurement's collection date and amplitude. Each
cursor's X and Y axes data displays in a “cursor data box”
positioned on the plot’s left side. The cursor and cursor
data box’s title are displayed in the same color.
cursor
cursor data box
Figure 6 - 8.
A Single Cursor on a Trend Plot.
Ø Depending on the cursor type, some

cursor data boxes may contain more
information than can be displayed in a
small cursor data box. In this case, the
cursor data box provides a scroll bar and
resizing button (located at its lower
right) to help display information in the
cursor data box.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Ø Cursor data boxes are initially positioned

on the plot’s left side with each new box
displayed below the previous. The active
cursor’s box always displays at the
bottom of the stack.
At the top of the cursor's vertical line is the cursor's node.
In overlay plots, the cursor node’s color indicates which
plot the cursor is on of whether the cursor is currently
located on the plot or one of the alarm setpoint indicators.
To position individual cursors:
• Click the cursor, then click the plot where you wish
the cursor to position, or
• Use drag and drop procedures on the cursor's vertical
line, or
• Click the cursor, then use the right and left arrow keys
(Shift left and right for bigger increments).
To position the cursor on another plot or alarm
setpoint:
• Click the cursor's node. The cursor moves to the next
plot (in overlay plots) or alarm setpoint. The cursor's
node color changes to reflect the color of the selected
plot or alarm setpoint. The cursor data box displays
information for the selected plot or setpoint.
To position a cursor's data box:
• Use drag and drop procedures.
To delete individual cursors:
• Double-click on the cursor's node (located at the top of
its vertical bar), or
• Click the cursor, then press Delete.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Zoom
Zooms in on a specified area of the active trend plot.
Although the plot's resolution is not changed, the Zoom
function helps with analysis by allowing you to closely
examine a segment of the plot.
To zoom in on a specified area of the active plot:
• Click the toolbar's Zoom button. The mouse pointer
changes to a cross-hair pointer.
• Position the cross-hair mouse pointer in the upper left
corner of the area you wish to zoom in on and click
and hold the mouse button.
• With the mouse button depressed, use drag and drop
procedures to define the area to zoom in on. A box
appears around the area.
• Release the mouse button to zoom in on the area
defined by the box.
You may repeat the above procedure to continue zooming
in.
To zoom out after zooming in:
• Click the toolbar's zoom button. The mouse pointer
• Click (don't drag) the cross-hair pointer anywhere
inside the zoomed plot. The plot zooms out to its
original scaling.
Next POINT
For the active trend plot, updates the trend plot to display
the machine's next hierarchical POINT of the same
POINT type.
Ø POINTs with less than two stored
measurements do not display a trend
plot.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Previous POINT
For the active trend plot, updates the active plot to display
the machine's previous hierarchical POINT of the same
POINT type.
Curve Fit
Applies a linear curve fit to the active trend plot,
providing a means to project the trend into the future (two
years). The Curve Fit function is also available from the
Display menu.
Ø The Display menu's Curve Fit option
acts as a toggle. To remove a curve fit
plot from the active trend plot, select the
Display menu's Curve Fit option again.
Figure 6 - 9.
Example of a Curve Fit Projection.
A cursor placed on a Curve Fit trend plot may be used to

view timestamp and overall amplitude information for the
trended POINT's:
Stored Measurement (at the cursor location)
Alert Alarm Setting
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Danger Alarm Setting

Curve Fit Plot (at the cursor location)
To view numerical information on a Curve Fit Trend
Plot:
• Select the Display menu's Cursor option (or the
Cursor toolbar button) to place a cursor on the active
Curve Fit trend plot (if not already present).
• Position the cursor on the timestamp (stored
measurement) of choice.
• Click the cursor's node (located at the top of the
cursor's vertical line). The cursor's data box updates
to display the next cursored item's information (stored
measurement, alert alarm, danger alarm, or curve fit
plot). The cursor node's color changes to indicate
which plot or alarm setpoint the cursor is on.
Ø In a curve fit plot, alarm setpoint
information and the curve fit
“regression” plot's color display in the
curve fit plot's Information area.
Exclude/Include
Allows you to exclude stored measurements from curve fit
projections. For example, if a stored measurement is
known to be inaccurate, it may be excluding from
affecting the curve fit projection.
To exclude stored measurements from the curve fit:
• On the active trend plot or curve fit plot, position the
cursor on the stored measurement to be excluded.
• Click the toolbar's Exclude/Include button (or press
the spacebar). The stored measurement's hollow box
disappears from the trend/curve fit plot, indicating it
will not be used in the curve fit projection.
Ø If a curve fit plot is active when
Exclude/Include is clicked, the stored
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
measurement is excluded and the curve

fit projection immediately re-draws to
reflect the exclusion.
Ø Excluded POINTs may be re-included
for curve fit projection by locating their
position with the cursor and clicking the
Exclude/Include button again (or
pressing the spacebar).
Spectrum from Trend
From a trend plot, opens a window that displays the
current FFT spectrum of the measurement timestamp
selected with the trend plot's cursor.
Ø If the stored measurement at the cursor
location does not have any stored
spectral data, the spectrum plot window
appears empty and its title bar displays a
“No Spectra Available” message.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Figure 6 - 10.
A Spectrum From Trend Display.
Notice the Identical Timestamps.
When the “spectrum from trend” plot's window is made

the active window, all spectrum plot management tools
become available for its manipulation.
Ø For information on manipulating
spectrum plots, reference the FFT
Spectrum Plots section later in this
chapter.
The displayed spectrum plot is linked to the trend plot
from which it originated. That is, on the trend plot, if you
move the cursor to a different stored measurement's
timestamp, the “spectrum from trend” plot window
automatically updates to display the selected timestamp's
stored FFT spectrum.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
Time Waveform from Trend

From a trend plot, opens a window that displays the
current time waveform of the measurement timestamp
selected with the cursor.
Ø If the stored measurement at the cursor
location does not have any stored time
waveform data, the displayed time
waveform plot appears empty and its title
bar displays a “No Spectra Available”
message.
Figure 6 - 11.
A Time Waveform From Trend Display.
Notice the Identical Timestamps.
4
User Manual
Single Trend Plots
When the “time waveform from trend” plot's window is

made the active window, all time waveform plot
management tools become available for its manipulation.
Ø For information on manipulating time
waveform plots, reference the Time
Waveform Plots section later in this
chapter.
The displayed time waveform plot is linked to the trend
plot from which it originated. That is, on the trend plot, if
you move the cursor to a different stored measurement's
timestamp, the “time waveform from trend” plot
automatically updates to display the current time
waveform for the selected timestamp.
Scaling
Use to set the trend plot's X-axis time range, and the
Y-axis' scaling between linear and logarithmic. Also
available from the Display menu.
Ø X-axis Date scaling changes must be
made in dd-mmm-yy format, with an
abbreviated month entry. Month
abbreviations are; Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr,
May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
A time entry must be defined, even if it's
00:00:00. Also, a space must be inserted
between the defined date and time.
Ø Time entries are in a 24 hour clock
format.
Print
Prints the active window.
Ø The Print button is available on all

PRISM4 toolbars.
4
User Manual
Overlay Trend Plots
Trend Plot “Display Menu” Tools

Options in the Display menu's bottom section also allow
you to manipulate the active trend plot.
Display menu options that apply to trend plots are:
Cursor, Single
Curve Fit
Scaling
Y Axis as % FullScale
The first three options perform the same as previously
discussed in their Trend Plot Toolbar Tools sections. For
help on these three, reference the previous Trend Plot
Toolbar Tools section. The Y Axis as % FullScale
option is unique to the Display menu and discussed below.
Select this menu option to toggle the active plot's Y-axis
scaling between Engineering Units (EU) for like variables,
or as a percentage of the displayed POINT's full scale.
This feature is useful on overlay trend plots, when trending
variables with widely differing full scale amplitude ranges,
such as vibration and temperature.
Overlay Trend Plots
In addition to displaying trend plots for individual

POINTs, you can display multiple POINTs' trends
(POINTs can be from the same machine or from different
machines) in one graphic display window in an Overlay
trend plot. This allows easy comparison between various
POINTs' trends.
Ø Use Ctrl click operations to select (and
unselect) multiple POINTs from a plant's
hierarchy list for overlay trend display.
4
User Manual
Overlay Trend Plots
Ø Selected POINTs must be from the same

plant to display in an overlay trend plot.
Figure 6 - 12.
An Overlay Trend Plot.
Ø Overlay trend plot title bar and

information area fields operate identical
to fields in a single trend plot.
In an overlay trend plot:
Next POINT, Previous POINT, and Curve Fit
features are not available.
Cursor, Zoom, Scaling, and Y Axis as % Full
Scale features operate identical to single trend plot
features already described.
Ø In overlay plots, click a cursor's node (at
top of vertical cursor line) to move the
cursor from plot to plot. The cursor
node's color indicates which plot the
cursor is on.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Exclude/Include, Spectrum from Trend, and Time

Waveform from Trend features act on the cursor
selected single trend plot in the overlay trend plot.
To select a single trend plot from an overlay trend plot:
• In the active overlay trend plot, select the Display
menu's Cursor/Single option (or click the toolbar's
Cursor button). A single cursor appears on the
overlay trend plot.
• Click the cursor's node (located at the top of the cursor
bar) to position the cursor on the desired plot (the
node displays the desired plot's color). The cursor's
data box displays the selected plot's information for its
current timestamp.
• Use the mouse or left and right arrow keys to move
the cursor to the selected plot's timestamp of interest.
The cursor data box updates to display the selected
timestamp's date and amplitude data.
• Select the Exclude/Include, Spectrum from Trend,
or Time Waveform from Trend button.
FFT Spectrum Plots
Because different types of machinery problems often occur

at different frequencies, it is very useful to analyze
measured vibration signals with respect to frequency.
FFT spectrum plots (pl. spectra) display vibration
amplitudes at various component frequencies.
Ø FFT is the abbreviation for Fast Fourier
Transform (the math used to break the
vibration signal into its component
frequencies).
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 13.
Example of an FFT Spectrum Plot
with Information Area and Cursor Displayed.
In an FFT spectrum, the X-axis (horizontal axis)

represents vibration frequency and the Y-axis (vertical
axis) represents vibration amplitude.
FFT spectrum plots are extremely useful machinery
analysis tools. FFT spectra provide information that helps
determine the location of a problem, the cause of the
problem, and with trending, how long until the problem
becomes critical.
Overlay FFT Spectral Plots
In addition to single display, you can display multiple
POINTs' FFT spectra (POINTs may be from the same
machine or from different machines) in an Overlay FFT
plot. This allows easy comparison between various
POINTs' FFT spectra.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 14.
Example of Two FFT Spectra in an Overlay Plot.
Ø An alternative method for creating an

overlay spectral plot is to use the
Acquired Data List to overlay a
displayed spectrum's historical data, see
the Displaying Historical Spectra
section earlier in this chapter.
FFT Spectrum Toolbar Tools

When a spectrum is displayed in the active window,
toolbar buttons change to reflect spectrum plot
“management” tools.
Figure 6 - 15.
Spectrum Plot Toolbar Buttons.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
From left to right, spectrum toolbar tools are:

POINT Info
Displays the plotted POINT's plot color, ID, POINT Type,
detection type, and currently plotted timestamp's collection
date and time in an information area beneath the plotted
data.
Figure 6 - 16.
The Information Area Beneath a Spectral Display.

4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Cursor/Single
(Also available from the Display menu's Cursor/Single
option) Adds an individual cursor to the active spectrum.
the plot, the cursor appears as a circle with a vertical line.
The vertical line helps identify the cursor location, the
circle is the cursor and indicates a specific frequency and
amplitude. Each cursor's X and Y axis data, along with
order of running speed information (and phase
information for phase spectra), display in a “cursor data
box” positioned on the plot’s right side.
FFT spectrum cursor operations are identical to those
already described for trend plots. Reference this chapter's
Trend Plots section for help with cursor operations.
Harmonic Markers
Adds a fundamental freq. cursor and a group of harmonic
markers to the displayed FFT spectrum. (Also available
from the Display menu's Cursor/Harmonic option).
Figure 6 - 17.
Harmonic Markers on an Enveloped FFT Spectrum.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
The fundamental freq. cursor is identified with a circle on

a vertical line. Each subsequent harmonic marker is
displayed as a circle at integer multiples of the cursor (that
is twice, three times, four times, etc.).
The fundamental freq. cursor and each marker's
amplitude, frequency, and % of fundamental freq. data
displays in a Harmonic Values data box positioned on
the plot’s right side. The % of fundamental freq. value
allows easy comparison between the cursor's reference
amplitude (usually at running speed frequency) and
harmonic amplitudes.
Ø To size the Harmonic Values data box,
drag and drop its sizing button located
beneath the vertical scroll bar.
To position harmonic markers:
• Click the harmonic markers cursor, then click on the
plot where you wish the harmonic markers cursor to
position, or
• Use drag and drop procedures on the harmonic
markers cursor's vertical line, or
• Click the harmonic markers cursor, then use the right
and left arrow keys (Shift right and left arrow keys for
bigger increments).
Ø To move the harmonic markers cursor in
very small increments, use Ctrl right
and left arrow keys.
To position the harmonic markers data box:
To delete the cursor and harmonic markers:
• Double-click on the harmonic markers cursor's node
(located at the top of its vertical bar), or
• Click the harmonic markers cursor, then press Delete.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Sideband Markers
Adds a sideband markers cursor and a group of sideband
markers to the active spectral plot.
Figure 6 - 18.
An Example of Sideband Markers on an FFT Spectrum.
Sideband markers consist of an array of five pairs of

markers evenly spaced on both sides of a sideband cursor
reference position.
The sideband cursor is identified as a circle with a vertical
line. Each sideband marker displays as a small box. The
center cursor and each marker's amplitude and frequency
data displays in an Sideband Values data box, along with
the frequency Delta (difference) between sideband
markers.
Ø In the Sideband Values data box,
sideband markers are referenced as
located from left to right around the
center cursor. Sideband markers to the
left of the center cursor are referenced
with negative numbers, their associated
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
markers to the right of the cursor are

referenced with positive numbers.
Ø To size the Sideband Values data box,
drag and drop its sizing button located
beneath the vertical scroll bar.
The procedure for using sideband markers is:
• Select the Display menu's Cursor/Sideband option
(or click the Sideband Markers toolbar button) to
initiate sideband marker display.
• Position the sideband markers' center cursor.
• Position the sideband markers.
To position the center cursor:
• Use drag and drop procedures on the cursor's vertical
line, or
• Click on the plot where you wish the cursor to
position, or
• Click the cursor's vertical line and use the right and
left arrow keys (Shift right and left arrow keys for
bigger increments).
Ø To move the sideband markers cursor in
To position the sideband markers:
• Use drag and drop procedures on the “position” node
beneath the outmost sideband markers, or
Ø To move the sideband markers cursor in
To delete the cursor and sideband markers:
• Double-click on the cursor's node (located at the top of
its vertical bar), or
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
• Click the sideband markers cursor, then use Delete.

Display Frequency Markers
Displays the Label Frequencies dialog allowing you to
add or remove frequency markers from the spectrum
display.
For information on adding and deleting frequency
markers, reference the FFT Spectrum "Display Menu"
Tools section later in this chapter.
Zoom
Zooms in on a specified area of the active spectral plot.
Although the plot's resolution is not changed, the Zoom
function helps with analysis by allowing you to closely
examine a segment of the plot.
To zoom in on a specified area of the active plot:
• Click the toolbar's Zoom button. The mouse pointer
• Position the cross-hair mouse pointer in the upper left
corner of the area you wish to zoom in on and click
and hold the mouse button.
• With the mouse button depressed, use drag and drop
procedures to define the area to zoom in on. A box
appears around the area.
• Release the mouse button to zoom in on the area
defined by the box.
You may repeat the above procedure to continue
zooming in.
To zoom out after zooming in:
• Click the toolbar's zoom button. The mouse pointer
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
• Click the cross-hair pointer anywhere inside the

zoomed plot. The plot zooms out to its original
scaling.
Next Timestamp
Updates the active spectral plot to display the POINT's
next timestamp's FFT spectrum.
Previous Timestamp
Updates the active spectral plot to display the POINT's
previous timestamp's FFT spectrum.
Next POINT
Updates the active spectral plot to display the machine's
next hierarchical POINT.
Previous POINT
Updates the active spectral plot to display the machine's
previous hierarchical POINT.
Scaling
Use to set the spectrum display's X-axis frequency range,
Y-axis amplitude range, and both axes between linear and
logarithmic scaling. Also available from the Display
menu.
• Select the Display menu's Scaling option (or click the
Scaling toolbar button). The Axes Setup dialog box
displays.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 19.
The Axes Setup Dialog Box.
Use Axes Setup fields to establish the spectrum display's

frequency (X-axis) and amplitude (Y-axis) ranges and to
set each axis' scaling to either linear or logarithmic.
Logarithmic scaling is used advantageously to
display the full dynamic range of the data collector
and emphasizes low level spectral components.
Linear scaling emphasizes high level components.
Print
FFT Spectrum “Display Menu” Tools

you to manipulate the active FFT spectrum.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Display menu options that apply to spectral plots are:

Trend
Spectral Bands
Cursor
Single
Harmonic
Sideband
Band
Alarms
Envelope
Spectral Bands
Units
Acceleration
Velocity
Displacement
Label
Label Peaks
Label Bearing Frequencies
Label Running Speed
Scaling
Set Speed
Baseline Spectrum
Ø Cursor/Single, Harmonic, Sideband
and Scaling features perform the same as
previously discussed in their FFT
Spectrum Toolbar Tools sections. For
help on these features, reference the
previous FFT Spectrum Toolbar Tools
section. All other options are unique to
the Display menu and are discussed on
following pages.
Cursor / Band
Displays a Band cursor on the active spectrum plot (or
time waveform plot).
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 20.
A Spectrum with a Band Cursor Displayed.
On an FFT spectrum or time waveform plot, a Band

cursor uses two cursors (a left and a right) to display the
frequency/time and amplitude difference (Delta) between
the two cursor positions. You may assign as many Band
cursors as you wish.
Ø Use standard cursor drag and drop
operations to place each of the Band
cursor's two cursors, and the cursor data
box.
Ø Also, the Band cursor's node appears
above and midway between the two
cursors.
Alarms
Alarm menu options graphically display pre-defined
alarm settings on the active FFT spectrum or polar vector
plot.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Ø Alarm settings are defined in the

POINT's POINT Setup dialog box, see
Chapter 4, Building Your PRISM4 for
Windows Database for help with
establishing alarm settings.
Alarm menu options are available only if the displayed
measurement is configured with the respective alarm
settings. Alarm display options are:
Envelope - Displays the POINT's pre-defined
spectrum alarm envelope around the displayed FFT
spectrum. Also displays the measurement's assigned
baseline spectrum.
Spectral Bands - Displays the POINT's pre-defined
spectral band alarms on the displayed spectrum.
Mag/Phase - On an active polar vector plot, displays
the POINT's pre-defined alert and danger alarm
acceptance regions.
Each of the above is exampled on the following pages.
Alarm Envelope
Superimposes the FFT measurement's pre-configured
alarm envelope on the displayed spectrum.
With a single FFT spectrum active (that has been
configured with a spectral alarm envelope):
• Select the Display menu's Alarms option. The three
alarm types display in their menu.
• Select the Envelope alarm type option. The POINT's
pre-defined alarm envelope displays on the active
spectrum.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 21.
An FFT Spectrum with Alarm Envelope Displayed.
Ø Within PRISM4, the Spectrum

Envelope Alarm must be enabled in the
Report menu's Exception Criteria
Setup dialog box for automatic reporting
of alarm envelope penetrations.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots

With a single FFT spectrum active:
• Select the Display menu's Alarms option. The three
• Select the Spectral Bands alarm type option. The
POINT's pre-defined spectral bands display on the
active spectrum.
Figure 6 - 22.
An FFT Spectrum with Two Spectral Bands Displayed.
For each spectral band, Peak setpoints appear as solid

lines while Overall setpoints appear as dotted lines.
Selected alarm colors identify alert and danger setpoints.
Ø When spectral bands are displayed, click
a displayed cursor's node to move the
cursor from the spectrum to the spectral
band alarm setpoints. The cursor's node
changes color to reflect which alarm
setpoint it currently locates (alert or
danger). The cursor's data box displays
the spectral band alarm's settings.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Spectral Band Trends

With spectral bands displayed on the active FFT spectrum,
the Display menu's Trend/Spectral Bands option
becomes available for viewing trend plots of the POINT's
overall and highest peak values within selected spectral
bands.
Ø If multiple spectral bands are selected for
trending, overall vibration and highest
peak overlay trend plots are generated
for each band.
To view a spectral band trend plot:
• With spectral bands displayed on the active FFT
spectrum, select the Display menu's Trend/Spectral
Bands option. The Spectral Band Trending dialog
box displays.
Figure 6 - 23.
The Spectral Band Trending Dialog Box.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Use this dialog box to select which bands to trend. Do this

by moving the names of the spectral bands to trend from
the Available Bands list to the Bands to Trend list.
• Click to highlight the name of the band to include in
the trend plot, then click the select button. The name
moves to the Bands to Trend list box.
Ø Click the Remember Selector check box
to save your spectral band selection
setup.
Ø When you click to highlight a spectral
band name, the highlighted spectral
band's frequency range and alarm setup
display in the area below the list boxes.
After selecting all spectral bands to trend, click the
checkmar command button. Overall vibration and highest
peak trend plots are extracted into overlay plots for each
spectral band selected.
Figure 6 - 24.
A Spectral Band's Peak and Overall Trends.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
In a spectral band trend plot, the spectral band's name

appears on the window's title bar. The extracted peak and
overall trend plots display in different colors. The plot's
information area indicates which plot (highest peak or
overall vibration) is which color. The spectral band's
alarms are also displayed. Their color legend also appears
in the plot's Information area.
Ø If necessary use the Information area's
scroll bar to view information that
doesn't fit within the window.
Units
PRISM4 allows you to graphically and numerically change
the collected data's measurement type (integrate or
differentiate between acceleration, velocity, and
displacement measurements).
Any measurement taken with one of the above mentioned
sensors may be integrated or differentiated to any of the
other measurements. For example, a velocity
measurement in IPS can be differentiated to an
acceleration measurement in Gs, or can be integrated to a
displacement measurement in mils.
Ø You cannot post process spectral data
from a multiple spectrum plot.
To change display Units:
On the displayed spectrum plot's Y-axis, notice its units of
measurement. These units indicate the type of
measurement, either:
Acceleration Gs
Velocity in/sec or mm/sec
Displacement mils or microns
• Select the Display menu's Units option. The three
vibration measurement choices appear, Acceleration,
Velocity, and Displacement.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Acceleration - If the displayed spectrum is a velocity

or displacement spectrum, this selection
differentiates the displayed spectrum for display as
an acceleration spectrum with acceleration units.
Velocity - If the displayed spectrum is a
displacement spectrum, this selection differentiates
the displayed spectrum for display as a velocity
spectrum with velocity units. If the displayed
spectrum is an acceleration spectrum, this selection
integrates the displayed spectrum for display as a
velocity spectrum with velocity units.
Displacement - If the displayed spectrum is a
velocity or acceleration spectrum, this selection
integrates the displayed spectrum to display as a
displacement spectrum with displacement units.
• Choose one of the three menu options to integrate or
differentiate to the measurement type and units of
your choice.
After choosing a different measurement type, the plot
changes to reflect the integrated or differentiated data.
The cursor is available to display frequency and amplitude
information.
Ø On the spectrum's Y-axis, notice the
units of measurement have changed to
reflect the post processed data.
Ø The spectrum's Information area
indicates the post processed Units.
Post processed displays can be printed for analysis and
reporting purposes, but not stored.
Ø If you use the Acquired Data List to
display historical data on a
post-processed plot, selected historical
spectra conform to selected measurement
Units.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Label
The Label option offers three sub-options:
Label Peaks - Labels peaks above a defined
threshold.
(File/Preferences/Spectrum/Threshold%)
Label Bearing Frequencies - Displays previously
assigned bearing fault frequencies and their labels.
Label Running Speed - Toggles the running speed
indicator on and off.
Label Peaks - On the active spectrum plot, displays a

numeric label for each peak above a user positioned
threshold.
• Select the Display menu's Label/Label Peaks option.
The Label Peaks threshold appears on the spectrum.
All peaks above the displayed threshold are labeled
numerically. A Peak Values information box
displays frequency and amplitude information for each
numerically referenced peak.
Figure 6 - 25.
A Spectrum with Peaks Labeled.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
The Label Peaks threshold displays a node on its far right.

Use this node to help identify the threshold.
• Use drag and drop operations on the displayed Label
Peaks threshold to move the threshold up or down,
labeling spectral peaks as desired.
Ø Use placement drag and drop operations
on the threshold, not the node.
• Double-click on the threshold's node to turn off the
Label Peaks threshold (or select the Display menu's
Label Peaks option again).
Label Bearing Frequencies -Displays assigned bearing
fault frequencies and their labels.
With a single FFT spectrum active (that has been
configured with bearing fault frequencies):
• Select the Display menu's Label option. The
sub-menu displays.
• Select the Label Frequencies option. The Label
Frequencies dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 26.
The Label Frequencies Dialog Box.
The Label Frequencies dialog box consist of left and right

list boxes separated by a set of arrow command buttons.
The:
Left List Box - Lists all defined fault frequencies for
the POINT.
Right List Box - Lists specific fault frequencies
selected for display on the active spectrum.
Select fault frequencies for display by moving their
identifiers from the left list box to the right list box.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
To select which frequencies to display on the active

spectrum:
• In the left list box, click to highlight a fault frequency
to display. Then click the right arrow button (or
double-click the fault frequency identifier). The fault
frequency identifier moves to the right list box.
• Repeat the previous step for all fault frequencies you
wish to display on the active spectrum.
Ø To unselect fault frequencies for display,
highlight the frequency identifier in the
right list box and click the left arrow
command button (or double click the
identifier). The frequency identifier
moves back to the left list box.
• When finished selecting frequencies to display, click
the dialog box's checkmark command button to exit
the dialog box. The selected fault frequencies display
on the active spectrum.
Figure 6 - 27.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Fault frequencies are automatically labeled as multiples of

FTF, BSF, BPFO, and BPFI (for example, 2*FTF).
Ø Tip - In the spectrum display, use the
up/down arrow keys to "step through" all
assigned frequency markers, regardless
of their selection status.
A frequency marker data box displays each marker's Label,
Frequency, Amplitude, and Orders information.
To disable fault frequency display.
• Select the Display menu's Label option. The
sub-menu displays.
• Click to select the Label Frequencies option. The
Label Frequencies dialog box displays.
At this point you may adjust the left and right lists to
display different frequencies, or press the disable all
frequencies command button (now appearing at the dialog
box's lower left) to quickly turn off all fault frequency
labels on the current spectrum.
Label Running Speed - On the displayed spectrum,
toggles the running speed indicator on and off. The
running speed indicator indicates the measured machine's
running speed at the time of the measurement.
Ø A collected measurement's running
speed setting may be temporarily
changed using the Set Speed feature
described on the following page.
Set Speed
Ø Unless you are utilizing PRISM4's "speed
tagging" feature, the Set Speed feature is
very important when using relative
referenced spectral bands, and the FAM
bearing fault frequencies features.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
To calculate harmonic orders (multiples) of running speed,

an accurate running speed value is required. If the actual
running speed is not recorded during data collection, the
running speed specified in the POINT Setup dialog box is
considered the actual running speed. If the machine speed
is variable, the Display menu's Set Speed option can be
used to change (for the active FFT spectrum only) the
measurement's running speed value to a more accurate
value (obtained from the spectrum itself).
The Set Speed calculation process uses the filter slope of
whichever Window was used when data was collected
(Hanning, Flat Top, or Uniform). It interpolates across
three spectral lines to calculate the frequency at the cursor
position to an accuracy greater than one line resolution. It
establishes the calculated frequency as rotating frequency
for order normalization (that is, order = 1) unless
overwritten as described below.
To set running speed for the active FFT spectrum:
• Display a single cursor on the FFT spectrum.
• Move the cursor to a peak that is known for certain to
be a running speed order (typically the running speed
frequency, or first order).
• Select the Display menu's Set Speed option. The Set
Machine Speed dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
FFT Spectrum Plots
Figure 6 - 28.
The Set Machine Speed Dialog Box.
Fields in the Set Machine Speed dialog box are:

Cursor Position - Displays the frequency for the
peak at the cursor position.
Equivalent to Order - Enter the running speed
order for the peak at the cursor position (defaults to
1X running speed order).
Calculated Speed - The spectrum's running speed
value is calculated from the cursor's Cursor Position
and Equivalent to Order values (as per the
calculation described on the preceding page). This
new running speed value is used to calculate the
current spectrum's harmonics, is indicated on the
spectrum's Frequencies Alarms, and is used to
compute the spectrum's relatively referenced spectral
bands.
Ø If desired, the Calculated Speed text
box allows you to overtype the displayed
running speed value with a known
accurate running speed value.
4
User Manual
Select this menu option to toggle the active plot's Y-axis
scaling between Engineering Units (EU) for like variables,
or as a percentage of the displayed POINT's full scale
value.
This feature is useful on overlay plots, when analyzing
variables with widely differing full scale amplitude ranges,
such as vibration and temperature.
Baseline Spectrum
Overlays the displayed FFT spectrum with the
measurement's pre-selected baseline spectrum.
In addition to displaying FFT spectral plots for individual

POINTs, you can display multiple POINTs' spectra in one
graphic display window in an Overlay spectral plot
(POINTs can be from the same machine or from different
machines). This allows easy comparison between various
hierarchy list for overlay display.
Ø Selected POINTs must be from the same
plant and have stored spectral data.
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 29.
Two Spectra Displayed in an Overlay Plot.
Ø Overlay spectral plot title bar and

to fields in a single spectrum plot.
In an overlay spectral plot:
Units, Next Timestamp, Previous Timestamp, Next
POINT, Previous POINT, and Baseline Spectrum
toolbar and Display menu features are not available.
Zoom, Scaling, and Y Axis a % FullScale features
operate identical to single spectrum features already
described.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
Single and Band Cursors, Harmonic Markers,

Sideband Markers, Alarms, Set Speed, and Label
features act on the cursor selected single spectrum
plot in the overlay spectral plot.
To select a single spectrum from an overlay spectral
plot:
• In the active overlay spectral plot, select the Display
menu's Cursor (Single, Harmonic, or Sideband)
option (or click the appropriate button on the toolbar).
The selected cursor displays.
bar) to position the cursor on the desired spectrum
(the cursor's node displays the selected spectrum's
color). The cursor's data box displays the selected
spectrum's frequency and amplitude information for
the cursor position.
• Click the cursor, then use the mouse (or left and right
arrow keys) to move the Single cursor to the frequency
range of interest, the Harmonic cursor to the
spectrum's running speed frequency, or the Sideband
cursor to the sideband markers' center frequency. The
cursor data box updates to display the selected
spectrum's frequency and amplitude data.
Waterfall Plots
Three dimensional waterfall plots display a single

POINT's historical spectra collected over time.
Ø The number of spectra displayed for a
POINT in its waterfall plot is limited by
the number of spectra stored for the
POINT and by the Data Display Range
specified in the Spectrum Preferences
dialog box. Reference Chapter 2,
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
Installation and Setup for help with

setting spectrum display preferences.
Figure 6 - 30.
Example of a Waterfall Plot with Single Cursor Displayed.
In a waterfall plot, the X-axis (horizontal axis) represents

vibration frequency, the Y-axis (vertical axis) represents
vibration amplitude, and the Z-axis (diagonal axis)
represents time. Timestamp information (collection date
and time) is located to the right of the displayed spectra.
Ø If multiple POINTs are selected in the
hierarchy list and the Waterfall toolbar
button or Display/Spectrum menu
option are selected, the most recent
spectrum for each selected POINT is
displayed in waterfall plot format.
Waterfall Plot Toolbar Tools

When a waterfall plot is displayed in the active window,
toolbar buttons change to reflect waterfall plot
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
Figure 6 - 31.
Waterfall Plot Toolbar Buttons.
From left to right, waterfall plot toolbar buttons are:

POINT Info
Displays the plotted POINT's ID and POINT Type.

Cursor/Single
Places a single cursor on the active waterfall display.
After placing a single cursor, observe that one spectrum is

a different color than the others. This highlighted
spectrum is the “active” spectrum, its information is
described in the cursor data box. The highlight may be
shifted to a different spectrum (to make it the active
spectrum) with the up and down arrow keys, or by using
the mouse. Notice that when the highlight moves to a
different spectrum, the cursor data box information
changes to match that spectrum.
Along with the active spectrum, a contour cursor also
displays at a selected frequency. The contour cursor is
controlled by the right and left arrow keys or with the
mouse. Frequency and amplitude information for the
active spectrum's contour cursor position display on lines
one and two in the data display box (along with the active
spectrum's timestamp information).
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
To move the cursor to another spectrum and frequency:

• Click on the cursor to activate it.
• Point and click the mouse pointer on the desired
spectrum, at the desired frequency. The cursor
highlights the selected spectrum, and the contour
cursor is placed at the selected frequency. Also, the
cursor data box displays frequency, amplitude, and
timestamp information for the selected cursor
position.
Ø You may also use ↑ and ↓ to move the
cursor to other spectra;
→ and ← to move the cursor to a
different frequency on the selected
spectrum, and
→ and Shift/←
Shift/→ ← to move the cursor
to a different frequency in larger
increments.
Ø If more than one cursor is placed on the
displayed waterfall plot, use drag and
drop (not point and click) mouse
operations to select and position one of
the other cursors.
To position a cursor's data box:
To delete individual cursors:
• Click the cursor, then press Delete.
Ø On a waterfall plot, the single cursor is
also used with the Extract Function
feature described later in this chapter.
Cursor/Band
For use with the Extract Function tool bar button/menu
option.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
In a waterfall plot, the Cursor/Band button and the

Extract Function feature together produce an Extracted
Trend plot that trends Peak and RMS overall vibration
(for a user defined frequency range) for each of the
waterfall plot's displayed spectra.
The Cursor/Band button produces two frequency cursors, a
minimum frequency cursor and a maximum frequency
cursor. The area between these two cursors is the
frequency range for which each spectrum's overall
vibration value is computed.
Figure 6 - 32.
Example of a Band Cursor on a Waterfall Plot.
To produce an Extracted overall vibration Trend:

• In the active waterfall plot, point and click on the
Cursor/Band toolbar button. The minimum and
maximum frequency cursors display.
Ø A cursor data box displays each cursor's
frequency position and the Delta
(difference) between the two positions.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
• Use standard mouse drag and drop (on the frequency

axis end of the frequency band cursors) or keyboard
cursor procedures to position the two frequency
cursors over the frequency range for which to compute
overall vibration values.
• Point and click on the Extract Function toolbar button
(or select the Display menu's Extract Function
option). An Extracted Trend window appears below
the waterfall plot.
Figure 6 - 33.
A Waterfall Plot’s Extracted Overall Trend Display.
The Extracted Trend plot allows you to easily see how

the POINT's peak and RMS overall vibration is trending
for a specific frequency range of interest. The Extracted
Trend plot is linked to the waterfall plot from which it
was extracted. If you change the waterfall plot's band
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
cursor position, the Extracted Trend plot updates for the

new position.
Extract Function
For use with the Cursor/Single or Cursor/Band toolbar
buttons/menu options.
With Cursor/Single
Together the Cursor/Single and the Extract Function
features extract a Frequency Trend plot (of a user
selected frequency) and a single spectrum plot from
the spectra displayed in the active waterfall plot.
With Cursor/Band
The Cursor/Band button and the Extract Function
features together produce an Extracted Trend plot
that trends overall vibration (for a user defined
frequency range) for each of the waterfall plot's
displayed spectra.
Ø Reference the Cursor/Band section
preceding this section for information on
PRISM4's Extract Function feature as it
is used with band cursors.
To extract a frequency trend plot and single spectrum:
• In the active waterfall plot, point and click on the
Cursor/Single toolbar button (or select the Display
menu's Cursor/Single option). The frequency contour
cursor appears on the waterfall plot and a single
spectrum highlights.
• Use standard mouse drag and drop, point and click, or
keyboard cursor procedures to position the frequency
contour cursor over the frequency to trend, and to
select a single spectrum to extract from the waterfall
plot.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
• Point and click on the Extract Function toolbar button

(or select the Display menu's Extract Function
option). Two windows appear beneath the waterfall
plot, one with the extracted frequency trend plot and
one with the extracted spectrum.
Figure 6 - 34.
A Waterfall Plot’s Extracted Frequency Trend
and Extracted Spectrum Displays.
The two extracted plots are linked to the waterfall plot

from which they were extracted. If you change the
waterfall plot's cursor frequency or active spectrum, the
two extracted plots update to show the new frequency or
active spectrum.
Ø In the Extracted Spectrum plot, only
the Info, Cursor/Single, Zoom, Scaling,
and Y-Axis as % FullScale plot
management features are available from
the toolbar or Display menu.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
Ø In the Extracted frequency Trend plot,

only the Info, Cursor/Single, Zoom,
Exclude/Include, Scaling, and Y-Axis as
% FullScale features are available from
the toolbar or Display menu.
Next POINT
Updates the active waterfall plot to display the machine's
next hierarchical POINT of the same POINT type.
Previous POINT
Updates the active waterfall plot to display the machine's
previous hierarchical POINT of the same POINT type.
Scaling
Use to set the waterfall display's X-axis frequency range,
Y-axis amplitude range, to toggle both X and Y axes
between linear and logarithmic scaling, and to set the
Z-axis time range. Also available from the Display menu.
• Select the Display menu's Scaling option (or click the
Scaling toolbar button). The Axes Setup dialog box
displays.
Figure 6 - 35.
A Waterfall Plot’s Axes Setup Dialog Box.
4
User Manual
Waterfall Plots
Use Axes Setup fields to establish the waterfall display's

frequency (X-axis) range and scaling, amplitude (Y-axis)
range and scaling, and the time axis' (Z-axis) time range.
Logarithmic scaling is used advantageously to display the
full dynamic range of the data collector and emphasizes
low level spectral components. Linear scaling emphasizes
high level components.
Ø Z-axis Date scaling changes must be
made in dd-mmm-yy format, with an
abbreviated month entry. Month
abbreviations are; Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr,
May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
A time entry must be defined, even if it's
00:00:00. Also, a space must be inserted
between the defined date and time.
Print
Waterfall “Display Menu” Tools

you to manipulate the active waterfall plot.
Display menu options that apply to waterfall plots are:
Cursor
Single
Band
Difference (not active at this time)
Extract Function
Scaling
Ø The above Display menu options

perform the same as discussed in the
Waterfall Plot Toolbar Tools section.
4
User Manual
Multiple POINT Waterfall Plots
Multiple POINT Waterfall Plots
Ø This feature is available when multiple

POINTs are selected from a plant
hierarchy list. This feature is not
applicable to the Machine Data List.
In addition to displaying waterfall plots for individual
POINTs, you can display multiple POINTs' most recent
spectra (POINTs can be from the same machine or from
different machines) in a Waterfall plot.
In a multiple POINT waterfall plot, each selected POINT's
most recent spectrum is displayed in a three-dimensional
view. This allows easy comparison between various
hierarchy list for waterfall display.
Selected POINTs must be from the same
plant and have stored spectral data.
Ø Multiple POINT waterfall plot toolbar
and Display menu management tools
operate identical to single POINT
waterfall plots. Reference the previous
Waterfall FFT Spectral Plots section
for help on manipulating multiple
POINT waterfall plots.
4
User Manual
Palogram Plots
Palogram Plots
Available from the Display menu’s Spectrum selection, a

palogram plot shows a rotated historical spectrum display
in a three dimensional format.
Figure 6 - 36.
Example of a Palogram Plot with Single Cursor Displayed.
Palogram plots allow easier observation of trends at each

frequency.
All menu and toolbar features and operations are the same
for palogram plots as for waterfall plots. Reference this
Chapter's Waterfall Plots section for help on
manipulating palogram plots.
4
User Manual
Time Waveform Plots
Time Waveform Plots
Time waveform plots display a short time sample of a raw

vibration signal with vibration amplitude plotted over the
time scale. Current time waveform plots are compared to
past time waveform plots to analyze changes in vibration
amplitude or frequency.
Ø To upload time waveform data to
PRISM4 for Windows, you must have a
Microlog with firmware Version 3.11 or
newer.
Figure 6 - 37.
A Time Waveform Plot with Band Cursor Displayed.
Time Waveform Toolbar Buttons
Figure 6 - 38.
Time Waveform Toolbar Buttons.
4
User Manual
Time Waveform Plots
Time waveform plots are manipulated using the same

toolbar tools used to manipulate FFT spectrum plots.
With the exception of the Harmonic Cursors feature
displaying delta time/frequency information and the
"speaker" button that launches PRISM4 Sound Byte, all
toolbar management tools operate as previously described
for FFT spectrum plots. See this chapter's FFT Spectrum
Plots section for information on time waveform toolbar
tools. The time waveform Harmonic Cursors feature is
described below.
Cursor/Harmonic
On a time waveform plot, the Harmonic Cursor toolbar
button acts as a delta time/frequency toolbar button that
displays delta time and frequency information for a
specified portion of the time waveform plot.
To display delta time/frequency data:
• On the active time waveform plot, click the toolbar's
delta time/frequency button (harmonic cursor). A
band cursor and its cursor data box displays on the
time waveform plot.
4
User Manual
Time Waveform Plots
Figure 6 - 39.
An Example of Delta Time/Frequency Cursors Displayed.
The area within the band cursor defines the portion of the
time waveform plot for which you wish to display delta
time and frequency data. The cursor data box displays
numerical delta time and frequency data for the area
within the band cursor.
Ø The two cursors that make up the band
cursor may be moved simultaneously
(drag and drop the area between the
cursors) or independently of each other
(drag and drop either cursor, or click to
activate the cursor and use → and ← or
→ and Shift/←
Shift/→ ←).
Ø To move the band cursor in very small
increments, use Ctrl right and left arrow
keys.
Indicators also display outside the band cursor (at delta
time intervals) to help display repetitious time waveform
events.
4
User Manual
Time Waveform Plots

P4SoundByte
With a time waveform plot displayed, the “speaker” toolbar
button launches P4SoundByte, an application new to
PRISM4 for Windows version 1.35. If the host computer
has sound capabilities, P4SoundByte allows you to hear a
recording of the vibration signal displayed in the time
waveform plot.
Ø If the Play Time (sec) setting is longer
than the recorded time waveform, the
Sound Data Waveform window displays
an extended version of the captured
waveform.
To activate P4SoundByte:
• With a time waveform plot displayed, click the
“speaker” toolbar button. The P4SoundByte program
launches.
Figure 6 - 40.
The P4SoundByte Window.
4
User Manual
Time Waveform Plots
P4SoundByte Controls are:

Play Time (sec) - Specifies total playing time. If the
playing time is longer than the duration of the original
data, the program extends the original data so the sound
data will play for the specified playing time.
RPM Multiplier - Plays the sound data at a machine
running speed different than the actual speed. The
machine speed at which the sound data is played is equal
to the input value multiplied by the actual machine speed.
CursorUpdateSpeed - Controls the cursor’s update speed
as it moves across the sound data waveform as the
program plays the sound. Low cursor update speed should
be used if the program is running on a slow speed
computer.
Volume - Use this slide control to set the volume of sound.
Play - Click this button to begin playing the sound data.
Save - Click this button to display the Save As dialog in
which to specify a name to save the sound data into a .wav
file.
Figure 6 - 41.
The Save As Dialog.
4
User Manual
Overlay Time Waveform Plots
Exit - Closes the P4SoundByte program.
Time Waveform “Display Menu” Tools

you to manipulate the active time waveform.
Display menu options that apply to time waveform plots
are:
Cursor
Single
Sideband
Harmonic
Band
Label/Peaks
Scaling
Ø All the above features perform the same
as previously discussed for FFT
Spectrum Plots. Reference this chapter's
FFT Spectrum Plots section for
information on these Display menu
options.
In addition to displaying time waveform plots for

individual POINTs, you can display multiple POINTs'
time waveforms (POINTs can be from the same machine
or from different machines) in one graphic display window
in an Overlay time waveform plot. This allows easy
comparison between various POINTs' time waveforms.
hierarchy list for overlay display.
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 42.
Example of Two Time Waveform Measurements
Displayed in an Overlay Time Waveform Plot.
Ø Overlay time waveform plot title bar and

to fields in a single time waveform plot.
Ø An alternative method for creating an
overlay time waveform plot is to use the
Acquired Data List to overlay a
displayed time waveform's historical
data, see the Displaying Historical
Spectra section earlier in this chapter.
In an overlay time waveform plot:
Units, Set Speed, Next Timestamp, Previous
Timestamp, Next POINT, and Previous POINT
toolbar button and Display menu features are not
available.
Zoom, Scaling, and Y Axis a % FullScale features
operate identical to FFT spectrum plot features
already described.
4
User Manual
Displaying Phase Information
Single and Band Cursors, Alarms, and

Label/Peaks features act on the cursor selected
single time waveform plot in the overlay time
waveform plot.
To select a single time waveform plot from an

overlay time waveform plot:
• In the active overlay time waveform plot, select the
Display menu's Cursor/Single option (or click the
Cursor/Single button on the toolbar). The single
cursor displays.
bar) to position the cursor on the desired time
waveform plot (the cursor's node displays the selected
plot's color). The cursor's data box displays the
selected plot's time and amplitude information for the
cursor position.
• Click the cursor, then use the mouse (or left and right
arrow keys) to move the Single cursor to the frequency
range of interest. The cursor data box updates to
display the selected time waveform plot's time and
amplitude data.
Polar vector plots show vibration amplitude and phase.

Phase is the angular difference between a known mark on
a rotating shaft and the shaft's vibration signal. This
relationship provides valuable information on shaft orbit
and shaft position and is used for analysis, for balancing,
and for shaft orbital analysis.
Amplitude and phase data may be displayed in Polar
Vector plots:
4
User Manual
Polar Vector - A conventional polar plot which

includes user defined alert and danger acceptance
regions.
Figure 6 - 43.
A Polar Vector Plot.
An alarm is initiated when the head of an operating vector

leaves one of the acceptance regions (if phase angle alarm
is specified in the Exception Criteria Setup dialog box)
(see Chapter 7, Generating Reports).
Ø On the polar vector plot, the asterisk (*)
represents a reference vector from the
POINT’s baseline spectrum.
PRISM4 tools for manipulating the active polar vector plot
are available from the toolbar, and from Display menu
options.
Polar Vector “Display Menu” Options

Options in the Display menu's top and bottom sections
allow you to manipulate the active polar vector plot.
4
User Manual
Display menu options that apply to polar vector plots are:

Phase
Set Harmonic
Cursor
Single
Alarms
Mag/Phase
Scaling
Phase/Set Harmonic
Permits selection of a first, second, third, or fourth
multiple of running speed for polar vector plot display.
Cursor/Single
Adds an individual cursor to the active polar vector plot.
the plot, the cursor appears as a line connecting the center
of the plot to the current vector head.
A cursor data box displays magnitude and phase data
for the selected vector. Point and click on a different
vector head to position the cursor on it and to display
its magnitude and phase data in the cursor data box.
Alarms / Mag/Phase
On the active polar vector plot, graphically displays the
phase measurement's pre-defined alert and danger alarm
acceptance regions.
With a polar vector plot active:
• Select the Display menu's Alarms option. The four
• Select the Mag/Phase alarm type option. The
POINT's pre-defined alert and danger acceptance
regions display on the active polar vector plot.
4
User Manual
Figure 6 - 44.
Acceptance Regions on a Polar Vector Plot.
An alarm is initiated when the head of an operating vector

leaves one of the acceptance regions (if phase angle alarm
is specified in the Exception Criteria Setup dialog box)
(see Chapter 7, Generating Reports).
Ø Acceptance regions are defined in the
measurement's POINT Setup dialog box
(see Chapter 4, Building Your PRISM4 for
Windows Database).
Ø The displayed acceptance regions'
magnitude and phase settings are
indicated in the polar vector plot's
Information area.
Scaling
Permits manually changing the full scale magnitude for
the radius of the polar vector circle.
4
User Manual
Polar Vector Toolbar Tools

When a polar vector plot is displayed in the active
window, toolbar buttons change to reflect polar vector plot
Figure 6 - 45.
Polar Vector Plot Toolbar Tools.
From left to right, polar vector plot toolbar tools are:

POINT Info
Cursor/Single
Next POINT
Previous POINT
Scaling
Print
POINT Info, Next POINT, Previous POINT, and Print
tools work as previously described for all other graphic
display plots.
Cursor/Single and Scaling toolbar tools operate as
described in the previous Polar Vector “Display Menu”
Options section.
4
User Manual
A Note About Windows System Resources
A Note About Windows System Resources
The Program Manager's Help/About menu option

displays the % of free System Resources. This percentage
reflects the amount of memory used by Windows
applications. Every window and sub-window created uses
Windows system resources. Also, each time a Windows
application allocates an area of memory, system resources
are used.
What This Means To You

If you run multiple applications simultaneously, or if you
run your Windows applications for long periods of time
(opening and closing windows as you go), or if your
computer does not have the recommended 16 Megabytes of
memory, you could cause:
An “Out of Memory” message, or
Strange results from your Windows applications.
If either of the above two events occur;
Save your work, and close all applications.
Exit Windows.
Reset your computer.
Re-enter Windows and necessary applications.
By exiting all applications and re-booting your computer
you are freeing up all System Resources.
Ø It is interesting to check the Program
Manager's Help/About dialog box to
note the % of free system resources
before and after the above re-booting
procedure.
4
User Manual
7
Generating and Printing PRISM4 Reports
Overview
Ø The File menu's Print option or any

toolbar's Print button may be used at any
time to print the contents of the “active”
PRISM4 window (including graphic
display windows).
Ø Use Window’s Print Manager options to
abort a print in process, then reset the
printer.
PRISM4's Report menu offers options for controlling the
generation and printing of hard copy reports showing
database and measurement POINT information. Various
PRISM4 reports include:
Exception - Produces a report of measurements in
violation of specified exception criteria.
Last Measurement - Reports the last measurement
values for POINTs meeting established criteria.
Inspection - Produces a report for open or selected
MARLIN inspection POINTs in the hierarchy list.
Overdue - Produces a report of all POINTs that are
overdue for measurement and that meet criteria
established in the Overdue setup screen.
Upload - Produces a report of the last measurement
values uploaded from the Microlog data collector
along with other specified information.
4
User Manual
Overview
History - Produces a report of machine notes

recorded for open SETs in the List window.
ROUTE Statistics - Produces a report of statistics
for one or more ROUTEs. Statistics include when
due, last downloaded, total number of POINTs in the
ROUTE, POINTs in alarm, POINTs disabled, and
POINTs overdue.
SET Statistics - Produces a report of statistics for
the highlighted SET in the hierarchy list. The
statistics include total number of POINTs, POINTs
in alarm, POINTs disabled, and POINTs overdue.
Database Setup - Produces a list of POINT IDs and
POINT Descriptions for all POINTs in one SET, or
for all POINTs in the active plant's hierarchy.
UCC Test ID Report - Produces a list of machines
which contain at least one UCC (OIL) POINT. This
report is used by the CM20’s operator to place the
test identification on the test. When uploading,
PRISM4 places data appropriately into the machine
from which data was collected.
Quick Report - Produces a quick, tabular report
(exception, overdue, or last measurement) for open
or selected POINTs in the hierarchy list. Toolbar
buttons allow you to easily display trend, spectrum,
or time waveform plots for POINTs listed in the
report.
Standard Report Generation and Printing

Procedure
Use the following general procedure to generate any
PRISM4 report:
• Open the plant or ROUTE whose data you wish to
report. If necessary, open or select hierarchy items
within the plant or ROUTE.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
• Select a report type from the Report menu. The

selected report's “Setup” dialog box appears.
• Set options in the “Setup” dialog box that include
specific data in the report and that format the report.
Ø Each report's “Setup” dialog box uses
certain conventions for formatting the
selected report. Some formatting options
are unique to a report type, others are
common among all report formats.
• Use the “Setup” dialog box's command buttons to
generate the report to a PRISM4 window. The report
displays in a window and the toolbar changes to offer
report control buttons.
• Use the toolbar's report control buttons to view and
print the report.
The following sections detail each report's “Setup” dialog
box and its formatting options.
Exception Report
Exception reports produce a report of measurements in

violation of specified exception criteria (measurements in
alarm).
To generate an Exception report:
• Open the plant on which you wish to report.
• For each report, select whether to report on open
hierarchy items, or selected (highlighted) hierarchy
items.
• Open or select only those hierarchy items on which
you wish to report.
Ø Use Ctrl click operations to select and
unselect multiple hierarchy items.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
• Select the Report menu's Exception option. The

Exception Report Setup dialog box appears.
Figure 7 - 1.
At the top of the dialog box are Format File, Description,

and Report Title fields:
Format File - A drop down list box that allows you
to select a pre-defined Format File to quickly format
the Exception report.
Ø Any report's settings may be saved to a
Format File for quick and easy future
selection of the same report settings.
Procedures for naming and saving new
format files are discussed later in this
section.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Report Title - Allows you to input a 20 character

report title to appear at the top of the report.
Description - Allows you to input a 20 character
report description to appear at the top of the report.
To the left of the Exception Report Setup dialog box are
two options buttons that determine whether the report is
generated for:
Open Nodes - Open items in the plant's hierarchy
list, or
Selected Nodes - Items selected (highlighted) in the
hierarchy list.
that allow you to view or edit the Exception report's
Exception Criteria, Print Format, or Column Sequence.
Exception Criteria
Criteria Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Figure 7 - 2.
Exception Criteria Setup fields are:

Alarm (A1/A2)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, overall values in
excess of either alarm limit.
Phase Angle Alarm (V)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, departure of an
amplitude/phase vector from an acceptance region.
Spectrum Envelope Alarm (E1/E2)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, penetration of a
narrow band spectrum envelope.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
If the current spectrum pierces the spectrum envelope, an

E1 alarm is produced. If the spectrum pierces the
envelope and the amplitude of the peak piercing the
envelope is at least twice the value of the pierced portion
of the envelope, an E2 alarm is generated.
Alarm Forecast (F1/F2)
PRISM4 will use, as exception criteria, a projected overall
value which crosses alarm setpoints within a specified time
period.
Days to Project - Enter the number of days from the
last measurement that the trend should be projected
into the future. (Recommend at least three times the
monitoring interval.)
Min Overalls - Enter the minimum number of most
recent overall samples to be used in curve fit
computation. (Recommended: 3) PRISM4 excludes
from the forecast all POINTs with less than the
specified number of overall samples.
Max Overalls - Enter the maximum number of most
recent overall samples to be used in curve fit
computation. (Recommended: 20.)
Statistic Alarm (S)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, the current overall
value in excess of the mean plus a specified standard
deviation.
Standard Dev - Enter the number of standard
deviations above the mean amplitude to establish an
exception amplitude.
Min Overalls - Enter the minimum number of
overall values to be included in computing the
statistical alarm. (Recommended: 5.) PRISM4
excludes all POINTs with less than the specified
number of overall samples.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Max Overalls - Enter the maximum number of

overall values to be included in computing the
statistical alarm. (Recommended: 20.)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, alert and danger
spectral banding - the peak (lower case) or overall (upper
case) value has passed alert or danger spectral bands.
Overall (A /D) - Spectral band alert and danger
overall setpoints.
Peak (a /d) - Spectral band alert and danger peak
setpoints.
Both (Aa/Ad/Da/Dd) - Spectral band alert and
danger overall and peak setpoints.
Percent Change Alarm (P)
PRISM4 uses, as exception criteria, percentage of change
between the last two overall values in excess of a specified
percentage.
Percent - Enter the percentage of change between
the most recent pair of overall values which must be
exceeded to initiate an alarm.
Percent Full Scale - A floor value below which
percentage changes will be ignored. This prevents
exceptions being initiated by large, irrelevant
percentage changes between two very small absolute
amplitudes.
Ø Exceptions set here dictate exceptions
throughout PRISM4.
• After making changes in the Exception Criteria
Setup dialog box, click the checkmark command
button to save your changes. You return to the
Exception Report Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Print Format
Report Format dialog box.
Figure 7 - 3.
Use check boxes to select how the exception data is plotted

and reported in the Exception report.
Ø Selected data formats must be available
to print in the Exception report. For
example, if POINTs are not configured
with spectral bands, no spectral band
data is included.
After selecting how reported data is to be formatted, click
the dialog box's checkmark command button to save the
settings and exit the dialog box. You return to the
Exception Report Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Column Sequence
Permits viewing and/or changing settings in the Custom
Column Sequence dialog box.
Figure 7 - 4.
The Custom Column Sequence dialog box allows you to

customize the Upload report's column sequence by
selecting attributes to print in the report. It is divided into
two list boxes separated by left and right arrow command
buttons.
You define which attributes print in the report (in
columnar form from left to right) by moving attribute
names from the left list box to the right list box. Attributes
in the right list box print in columnar form in the
Exception report.
To select an attribute for the report:
attribute in the left list box.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
• Click the >> command button between the list boxes

(or double click the attribute). The attribute moves to
the right list box to be included in the report.
To unselect attributes in the right list box:
attribute in the right list box.
• Click the << command button between the list boxes
(or double click the attribute). The attribute moves to
the left list box and is not included in the report.
After selecting all attributes to be included in the
Exception report, click the dialog box's checkmark
command button to save the custom column sequence and
exit the dialog box. You return to the Exception Report
Setup dialog box.
Format Files
At the bottom of the Exception Report Setup dialog box
are command buttons that allow you to save the report's
settings (format) to a Format File for quick and easy
future selection of the same report settings.
Name Format File - changes the Format File drop down
list box to a text box, allowing you to enter a new format
file name. You'll use this name for future selection of the
format file.
Save Format File - Saves the report's format to a Format
File for future selection, naming the new format file as
described in the Format File field.
• If desired, name and save the report's settings to a new
Format File.
Generating the Report

Reports are first generated to a PRISM4 window, then
printed.
4
User Manual
Exception Report
To generate the Exception report:

• Select the Exception Report Setup dialog box's
checkmark command button to generate the
Exception report to a PRISM4 window. The report
appears in a PRISM4 window, and the toolbar changes
to display report control buttons.
Figure 7 - 5.
Report Control Toolbar Buttons.
From left to right, report control toolbar buttons are:

View Next Page
View Previous Page
Print Current Page
Print Entire Report (all pages)
Save Report
4
User Manual
Exception Report
Figure 7 - 6.
Example of an Exception Report.
If the Exception report is formatted to display multiple

plots for POINTs in exception, each POINT's tabular and
graphic data displays on a separate page.
Ø POINT ID, POINT setup information,
and/or statistical measurement
information appear in tabular form
beneath each printed plot (depending on
the printed plot type).
• Use scroll bar operations and report control toolbar
buttons to view and print the report.
To print a specific page:
• Use next page and previous page toolbar buttons to
locate the page to print.
• Select the toolbar's Print Current Page button. The
displayed page prints.
To print the entire report:
• Select the toolbar's Print Entire Report (all pages)
button. The entire Exception report prints.
4
User Manual
Displaying Plots from Reports
To save the report to disk:

• Select the toolbar's Save Report button. A standard
Window's Save file dialog box appears.
• In the Save dialog box, specify the directory path and
filename for the saved PRISM4 report.
Ø PRISM4 reports are automatically issued
a .rep extension to their filename.
Opening Saved Reports
• Use the Report menu's Open option to open reports
saved to disk.
To open a saved report using the File menu:
• Select the File menu's Open option. A standard
Window's File Open dialog box appears.
• In the File Open dialog box, specify the directory path
and filename for the PRISM4 report you wish to open,
and select the OK command button. The selected
report opens in its window.
Displaying Plots from Reports
You may display trend, spectral, and time waveform plots

for reported POINTs directly from the displayed report.
To plot reported data:
• In a report, each POINT's reported data is displayed
on a single line. Double-click a POINT's line to
display the POINT's overall trend plot.
All trend plot functions are active for the reported
POINT's trend plot, including the “Spectrum from Trend”
and “Time Waveform from Trend” functions (if
applicable).
4
User Manual
Last Measurement Report
• In the reported POINT's trend plot, position a single

cursor on the trended timestamp for which to display
spectral or time waveform data.
• Click either the Spectrum from Trend or Time
Waveform from Trend toolbar button. The selected
timestamp's Spectrum from Trend plot or Time
Waveform from Trend plot displays.
Ø In a report, double-click a machine name
to display its machine notes.
Last Measurement Report
Last Measurement reports report the last measurement

values for POINTs meeting established criteria.
To generate a Last Measurement report:
you wish to report.
• Select the Report menu's Last Measurement option.
The Last Measurement Report Setup dialog box
appears.
4
User Manual
Inspection Report
Figure 7 - 7.
Ø The Last Measurement Report Setup

dialog box's setup options and report
generation procedures operate identical
to those already described for Exception
reports. For help, reference this
chapter's Exception Reports section.
Inspection Report
Inspection reports produce a report of MARLIN inspection

POINTs.
To generate an Inspection report:
4
User Manual
Inspection Report

you wish to report.
• Select the Report menu's Inspection option. The
Inspection Report Setup dialog box appears.
Figure 7 - 8.
When selected, the Include only Inspections in Alarm

check box produces a report of inspection measurements in
alarm.
4
User Manual
Overdue Report
Ø All other Inspection Report Setup

options and report generation procedures
operate identical to those already
described for Exception reports. For
help, reference this chapter's Exception
Reports section.
Overdue Report
Overdue reports produce a report of data for all POINTs

that are overdue for measurement and that meet overdue
criteria established in the Overdue Report Setup dialog
box.
To generate an Overdue report:
you wish to report.
• Select the Report menu's Overdue option. The
Overdue Report Setup dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Overdue Report
Figure 7 - 9.
Number Of Days From Today

• In the dialog box's Number Of Days From Today
text box, enter the number of days from today that
POINT data not recorded within its scheduled interval
is to be reported as overdue for collection.
Ø A change to the Number Of Days From
Today in the Overdue Report Setup
dialog box also changes the same field in
the ROUTE Statistics Report Setup
dialog box and the SET Statistics
Report Setup dialog box.
4
User Manual
Upload Report
Ø All other Overdue Report Setup dialog

box setup options and report generation
procedures operate identical to those
already described for Exception reports.
For help, reference this chapter's
Exception Reports section.
Upload Report
An Upload report produces a report of the last

measurement values uploaded along with other specified
information.
Ø The Upload Report Setup dialog
automatically displays immediately
following processing of uploaded data,
allowing semi-automatic upload data
reporting.
To manually generate an Upload report:
• Select the Report menu's Upload option. The
Upload Report Setup dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Upload Report
Figure 7 - 10.
Format File, Description, and Report Title fields operate

as described in this chapter's Exception Report section.
Include in Report
To the left of the Upload Report Setup dialog box are
check boxes that allow you to include up to five categories
of measurement data in the Upload report.
Missed POINTs - Reports POINTs for which no
data was collected.
Upload Statistics - Reports the upload's statistics.
POINTs with Notes - Reports any POINTs for
which notes were assigned.
4
User Manual
History Report
Exception Report - Reports POINTs in exception of

their alarm criteria.
Last Measurement Report - Reports the last
collected measurement for each uploaded POINT.
• Use the check boxes to select which data to include in
the Upload report.
Command Buttons
that allow you to view or edit the Upload report's
Exception Criteria, Format, or Column Sequence.
Ø These fields operate as described in the
Exception Report section.
Ø All other Upload Report Setup dialog
box setup options and report generation
History Report
A History report produces a report of machine notes for

specified machines.
Ø Each machine's machine notes are
entered from the machine's Data List
window. See Chapter 6, Displaying
Graphic Plots for help with entering
and editing machine notes.
To generate a History report:
• Open or select only those machines on which you wish
to report.
unselect multiple machines.
4
User Manual
ROUTE Statistics Report
• Select the Report menu's History option. The

History Report Setup dialog box appears.
Figure 7 - 11.
• Use the displayed option buttons to generate the report

for all open machines in the hierarchy list, or for all
selected (highlighted) machines in the hierarchy list.
• Use the checkmark command button to generate the
History report to a PRISM4 window.
Ø All other History Report Setup dialog
box report generation procedures operate
identical to those already described for
Exception reports.
A ROUTE Statistics report produces a report of statistics

for user specified ROUTEs. Statistics include when due,
last downloaded, total number of POINTs in the ROUTE,
POINTs in alarm, POINTs disabled, and POINTs overdue.
4
User Manual
To generate a ROUTE Statistics report:

• Select the Report menu's ROUTE Statistics option.
The ROUTE Statistics Report Setup dialog box
appears.
Figure 7 - 12.
Ø A ROUTE's statistics are updated only if

the ROUTE is active during upload (the
ROUTE's window must be the active
window during upload).
• In the Available ROUTEs list, click to specify the
ROUTE(s) for the ROUTE Statistics report.
• In the dialog box's Number of Days From Today text
box, enter the number of days from today that POINT
data not recorded within its scheduled interval is to be
reported as overdue for collection.
4
User Manual
SET Statistics Report
Ø A change to the Number of Days From

Today in the ROUTE Statistics Report
Setup dialog box also changes the same
field in the Overdue Report Setup
dialog box and the SET Statistics
ROUTE Statistics report to a PRISM4 window.
Ø All other ROUTE Statistics Report
Setup dialog box report generation
A SET Statistics report produces a report of statistics for

the active SET. Statistics include total number of POINTs,
POINTs in alarm, POINTs disabled, and POINTs overdue.
To generate a SET Statistics report:
• In the plant window, open or select only those SETs
on which you wish to report.
• Select the Report menu's SET Statistics option. The
SET Statistics Report Setup dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Figure 7 - 13.
• In the dialog box's Number of Days From Today text

box, enter the number of days from today that POINT
data not recorded within its scheduled interval is to be
Ø A change to the Number of Days From
Today in the SET Statistics Report
Setup dialog box also changes the same
field in the Overdue Report Setup
dialog box and the ROUTE Statistics
• Use the displayed option buttons to generate the report
for all open SETs in the hierarchy list, or for all
selected (highlighted) SETs in the hierarchy list.
SET Statistics report to a PRISM4 window.
Ø All other SET Statistics Report Setup
dialog box report generation procedures
operate identical to those already
described for Exception reports.
4
User Manual
Database Setup Report
Database Setup Report
A Database Setup report produces a list of POINT IDs

and POINT Descriptions for all POINTs in one SET or for
all POINTs in the active plant's hierarchy.
To generate a Database Setup report:
Ø Use Ctrl/+ and Ctrl/− keystrokes to
open and close all items in the plant's
hierarchy.
• Select the Report menu's Database Setup option.
The Report Setup dialog appears.
Figure 7 - 14.
• Use the displayed option buttons to specify the report

4
User Manual
UCC Test ID Report

Database Setup report to a PRISM4 window.
Ø All other Report Setup dialog box
report generation procedures operate
identical to those already described for
Exception reports.
UCC Test ID Report
A UCC Test ID Report produces a list of machines which

contain at least one UCC (OIL) type POINT. This report
is used by CM20’s operator to place the test identification
on the test. When uploading, PRISM4 places data
appropriately into the machine from which data was
collected.
To generate a UCC Test ID report:
hierarchy.
• Select the Report menu's UCC Test ID option. The
Report Setup dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
Quick Report
Figure 7 - 15.
• Use the displayed option buttons to specify the report

UCC Test ID report to a PRISM4 window.
Quick Report
A Quick Report produces a quick, tabular report

(exception, overdue, or last measurement) for open or
selected POINTs in the hierarchy list. Quick Report
toolbar buttons allow you to easily display trend, spectrum,
or time waveform data for POINTs in the report.
To generate a Quick Report:
• In the plant window, open or select only those
machines on which you wish to report.
4
User Manual
Quick Report

hierarchy.
• Select the Report menu's Quick Report option for
either an Exception, Last Measurement, or Overdue
report. The Quick Report dialog box appears.
Figure 7 - 16.
Ø (for Overdue type reports only) In the

dialog box's Number of Days From
Today text box, enter the number of days
from today that POINT data not recorded
within its scheduled interval is to be
To the left of the Exception Criteria and Column
Sequence command buttons are two options buttons that
determine whether the report is generated for:
4
User Manual
Quick Report
Open Nodes - Open items in the plant's hierarchy

list, or
Selected Nodes - Items selected (highlighted) in the
hierarchy list.
To the right of the dialog box are two command buttons
that allow you to view or edit the Quick Report's
Exception Criteria (for Exception type reports only), and
Column Sequence.
Ø Exception Criteria and Column
Sequence dialog box options operate as
previously described for Exception
reports.
• After setting Quick Report parameters, use the
checkmark command button to generate the Quick
Report to a PRISM4 window.
Figure 7 - 17.
In a Quick Report display, POINTs meeting specified

Quick Report criteria list (in tabular fashion) in their
hierarchical order beneath their machine's ID and
description. Information displayed for each listed POINT
is specified in the Quick Report's Column Sequence
dialog box.
4
User Manual
Quick Report
From left to right, tool bar buttons at the top of the Quick
Report display allow you to:
Change the report's column sequence.
Print the entire report.
Display a fully functional Trend plot for the
highlighted POINT in the report.
Display a fully functional spectrum for the
highlighted POINT in the report (if applicable).
Display a fully functional Time Waveform plot for
the highlighted POINT in the report (if applicable).
4
User Manual
Appendix A
Importing / Exporting PRISM4 Data
Overview
The File menu's Import and Export options allow you to:
Export a plant's hierarchy items (including stored
measurement data) to a PRISM4 database disk file or
ASCII disk file, either of which can then be imported
into another PRISM4 database, or (with ASCII
exports) imported into a third party word-processor
or spreadsheet program for editing and reporting
purposes.
Export ROUTE or workspace hierarchy items to an
ASCII disk file, which can then be imported into
another PRISM4 database, or imported into a third
party word-processor or spreadsheet program for
editing and reporting purposes.
Export a plant's hierarchy items (including stored
measurement data) to a set of MIMOSA (Machinery
Information Management Open Systems Alliance)
Export Data (MED) files.
Import hierarchy items to a PRISM4 target database
from a previously exported PRISM4 or ASCII disk
file. MIMOSA MED files can be imported into an
ASCII export file.
The Export/Import process requires two steps.
• You first export selected hierarchy items and
measurement POINT data to a PRISM4 data file, an
ASCII data file, or a set of MIMOSA data files on a
diskette (or on your hard drive).
4
PRISM for Windows A-1
User Manual
Export
Ø Before executing the MIMOSA export

option, the MIMOSA export
initialization file (MIMOSA.INI) must
be configured to your specifications.
This file, which resides in the same
directory as the PRISM4.EXE executable
file, is discussed in detail later in this
section.
• Then, using the diskette or hard drive data file as a
source file, you import the hierarchy items and
measurement data to the target database.
Ø The Import option offers controls that
determine whether imported POINT
setups overwrite existing POINT setups
of the same name, in the same hierarchy
position.
Ø MIMOSA MED files are not directly
imported into the target database. A
MED files import creates an ASCII
Export file, which can then be imported
into the target database.
Export
The File menu's Export option copies but does not remove
data from the source database.
To export hierarchy items to a data file:
• Open the plant whose hierarchy items you wish to
export.
The Export dialog box offers option buttons that
determine whether Open Nodes (open hierarchy items) or
Selected Nodes (highlighted hierarchy items) in the
plant's hierarchy list are exported.
4
A-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Export
• Either open those hierarchy items you wish to export,

or use Ctrl click mouse operations to highlight
hierarchy items you wish to export.
Ø “Parental” hierarchy items (items from
which the selected items branch) are
exported along with their subordinate
hierarchy items. For example, if you
highlight a measurement POINT
hierarchy item for export, its machine,
SET, and plant parental hierarchy items
are also automatically exported.
• Select the File menu's Export option, the Export
dialog box appears.
Figure A - 1.
4
User Manual
Export
Fields in the Export dialog box are:
Export Filename
Use the text box (or the Browse command button) to enter
the full path/filename of the destination file which will
store the exported hierarchy and measurement POINT
data. For example: A:\TEMP\ASCII-01.TXT
Ø If you do not assign an extension to your
filename, PRISM4 assigns a .P4B
(PRISM4 Binary) extension for PRISM4
exports, a .P4A (PRISM4 ASCII)
extension for ASCII exports, or a .MED
(MIMOSA) extension for MIMOSA
exports.
MIMOSA Filenames
The MIMOSA export process creates a set of eleven
related MED files - 0013.MED, 0015.MED, 0018.MED,
0019.MED, 0023.MED, 0047.MED, 0056.MED,
0058.MED, 0075.MED, 0081.MED and 0083.MED.
To specify overwriting an existing set of MED files, enter
the path/filename of any of the related MED files. To
create a new set of MED files, enter the filename as
path\{prefix}.MED, where {prefix} is an optional prefix
of up to four characters. This prefix will be inserted before
each exported MED filename.
For example if you enter ‘SKF.MED’ for the MIMOSA
export filename, the resulting MED files are named:
SKF0013.MED, SKF0015.MED, SKF0018.MED,
SKF0081.MED and SKF0083.MED.
4
User Manual
Export
ASCII / PRISM4 / MIMOSA

Use these option buttons to specify whether the selected
hierarchy items are exported a PRISM4 disk file, ASCII
disk file, or MIMOSA MED files.
Ø ASCII exports store exported data in a
comma delimited format.
Ø MIMOSA exports store the exported data
in ASCII format in eleven MIMOSA
Export Data (MED) files.
Hierarchy / POINT Setups

These check boxes are always selected when exporting to a
PRISM4 or ASCII disk file to indicate that the setups of
the selected hierarchy items are exported along with their
data. These check boxes are not used when exporting to
MIMOSA MED files.
Historical Export Range

Beneath the Hierarchy / POINT Setups boxes displays
the historical export range that indicates how much
historical data is exported with each exported
measurement POINT. This setting is established using the
File menu's Preferences/Spectrum dialog box.
Overall
Use this check box to select whether to export overall
values for each exported measurement POINT.
Spectra
Use this check box to select whether to export spectra for
each exported measurement POINT.
4
User Manual
Import
Phase
Use this check box to select whether to export phase data
for each exported measurement POINT.
Time
Use this check box to select whether to export time
waveform data for each exported measurement POINT.
Machine History/Notes
Use this check box to select whether to export machine
history and machine notes data for each exported machine.
Beneath the export “data type” check boxes are two option
buttons that determine whether data is exported for:
Open Nodes
Export only open items in the item's hierarchy list.
Selected Nodes
Export items selected (highlighted) in the hierarchy list.
• After making selections in the Export dialog box,
click the checkmark button to begin the export
process. An Export Activity dialog box displays the
export's progress.
Import
To import POINTs from an exported data file:

• Open the plant, route or workspace for which you
wish to import data.
Ø At times you may wish to import to a
new PRISM4 plant, route or workspace.
You may either create the new item
4
User Manual
Import
before performing the import, or use the

Import dialog box's Append option
(discussed later in this section).
• Select the File menu's Import option, the Import
dialog box displays.
Figure A - 2.
4
User Manual
Import
Fields in the Import dialog box are:
Import Filename
Use the text box (or the Browse command button) to enter
the full path/filename of the source file to be imported.
For example: A:\TEMP\MACH-1.P4B
Ø For import of MIMOSA data, specify
any file of the eleven MED files you
want to import. For example, to import a
set of MED files of the format
SKFNNNN.MED, the import filename
can be entered as either SKF0018.MED
or SKF.MED.
Hierarchy / POINT Setups

For import of a PRISM4 or ASCII disk file. These check
boxes are always selected to indicate that the setups of the
imported hierarchy items are imported along with their
data. These check boxes are not used when importing
MIMOSA MED files.
Overall
Use this check box to select whether to import overall
values for each imported measurement POINT.
Spectra
Use this check box to select whether to import spectra for
each imported measurement POINT.
Phase
Use this check box to select whether to import phase data
for each imported measurement POINT.
4
User Manual
Import
Time
Use this check box to select whether to import time
waveform data for each imported measurement POINT.
Machine History/Notes
Use this check box to select whether to import machine
history and machine notes data for each imported
machine.
Beneath the import “data type” check boxes are two option
buttons that determine whether the imported data's setups
update or append to the target database:
Update
Select when you wish to import data into an existing
database, adding data to existing POINTs and updating
(overwriting) existing hierarchy item setups with the same
name in the same hierarchy location.
Ø During an Update import, if an imported
POINT does not have an existing POINT
to overwrite, a new plant is created and
the new imported POINT is placed in the
new plant.
Append
A new plant, route or workspace is created to store the
imported hierarchy items. The new item’s hierarchy,
setups, and data are identical to the imported data's.
• After making selections in the Import dialog box,
click the checkmark button to begin the import
process. A Processing Import Data dialog box
displays the import's progress.
4
User Manual
General File Layout – ASCII Plant Hierarchy
The ASCII file’s record layout is extremely important. The

first character in the file must be an “A”. This should be
followed by a V_ERSION Record, then by a P_LANT
Record. Legal records are described as follows (the
ordering of the records is very important):
P_LANT Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
Zero or more S_ETNODE Records
Zero or more M_ACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one S_ETNODE Record or
one M_ACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
S_ETNODE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
Zero or more S_ETNODE Records
Zero or more M_ACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one S_ETNODE Record or
one M_ACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
M_ACHINE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
Zero or one N_OTEHEADER Record
One or more L_OGICALPOINT Records
Zero or one M_PCLOCATIONINFO Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
L_OGICALPOINT Record
Zero or one F_FT_SETUP Records
Zero or one O_LS_SETUP Records
One or more M_EASUREMENT Records
Must contain an F_FT_SETUP Record if an FFT
type measurement is included
Zero or one C_HANNEL Record
4
A - 10 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Ø M_EASUREMENT Records should

consist of one with a standard POINT
type, and for FFT POINTS, one with
overall type, possibly one with time type,
and possibly one with phase type.
Zero or one C_MVA55_SETUP Record
Zero or one M_DM_SETUP Record
Must contain five M_PC_ANSWER records if an
M_DM_SETUP record is included.
Zero or one M_PCLOCATIONINFO Record
C_HANNEL Record
One or more M_EASUREMENT Records
Ø M_EASUREMENT Records should
consist of exactly the same number and
types as the L_OGICALPOINT which
contains this record.
M_EASUREMENT Record
If measurement type is overall
Zero or one S_CALARALRMS Records
Zero or more S_INGLEVALUEHEADER Records
If measurement type is a standard SKF POINT type
Zero or more B_EARINGBANDALARM Records
Zero or more E_NVELOPEALARM Records
Zero or more S_PECTRALBANDALARM Records
Zero or more S_PECTRALDATA Records
If measurement type is phase
Zero or one M_AGPHASEALARM Records
Zero or more P_HASEDATA Records
If measurement type is time
Zero or more T_IMEDATA Records
4
PRISM for Windows A - 11
User Manual
General File Layout – Route Hierarchy
C_ONTROL_POINT
For the controlled POINT
One P_LANT_PLANT_NAME
Zero or more P_LANT_SETNODE_NAME
One P_LANT_MACHINE_NAME
One P_LANT_POINT_NAME
For the controlling POINT
S_PEED_REFERENCE_POINT
For the destination POINT
For the speed source POINT
General File Layout – Route Hierarchy

first character in the file must be an “R”. This should be
followed by a V_ERSION Record, then by a R_OUTE
Record. Legal records are described as follows (the
ordering of the records is very important):
R_OUTE Record
4
User Manual
General File Layout – Workspace Hierarchy
S_TARTLEVEL Record
One or more P_LANT_ID Records
Zero or more R_OUTE_SETNODE Records
Zero or more R_OUTE_MACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one R_OUTE_SETNODE
Record or one R_OUTE_MACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
R_OUTE_SETNODE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
Zero or more P_LANT_ID Records
Zero or more R_OUTE_SETNODE Records
Zero or more R_OUTE_MACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one R_OUTE_SETNODE
Record or one R_OUTE_MACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
R_OUTE_MACHINE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
One or more R_OUTE_LOGICALPOINT Records
E_NDLEVEL Record
General File Layout – Workspace Hierarchy

first character in the file must be an “W”. This should be
followed by a V_ERSION Record, then by a
W_ORKSPACE Record. Legal records are described as
follows (the ordering of the records is very important):
W_ORKSPACE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
One or more P_LANT_ID Records
Zero or more W_ORKSPACE _SETNODE Records
Zero or more W_ORKSPACE _MACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one
4
User Manual
General Layout – MIMOSA.INI Export Configuration File
W_ORKSPACE_SETNODE Record or one

W_ORKSPACE _MACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
W_ORKSPACE _SETNODE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
Zero or more W_ORKSPACE _SETNODE Records
Zero or more W_ORKSPACE _MACHINE Records
Must have a minimum of one W_ORKSPACE
_SETNODE Record or one W_ORKSPACE
_MACHINE Record
E_NDLEVEL Record
W_ORKSPACE _MACHINE Record
S_TARTLEVEL Record
One or more W_ORKSPACE _LOGICALPOINT
Records
E_NDLEVEL Record
General Layout – MIMOSA.INI Export

Configuration File
The MIMOSA.INI file is an ASCII text file containing

information on your company, site and database
information. This information in this file is used by the
MIMOSA export process to create MED files. The
MIMOSA.INI file resides in the same directory as the
PRISM4.EXE executable file. You need to modify
MIMOSA.INI (via any ASCII text editor) as follows (the
ordering of records is not important):
COMPANY_NAME company
SITE_NAME site_name
DATABASE_ID database_id
4
User Manual
General Layout – MIMOSA Export Data (MED) Files
DATABASE_NAME database_name
DELTA_GMT delta_value
FILTERS SITE_CODE = code
where:
‘company’ is the ASCII name of your company, i.e. SKF
CONDITION MONITORING;
‘site_name’ is the ASCII site name of your company, i.e.
San Diego Office;
‘database_id’ is your database ID number in ASCII, i.e.
1000;
‘database_name’ is the ASCII name of your database, i.e.
Demo Database;
‘delta_value’ is the ASCII number of hours plus or minus
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) to obtain your local time;
i.e., -5.
‘code’ is the Data Universal Numbering System (D-U-N-
S) number of your location – a randomly-generated nine-
digit number assigned by Dunn & Bradstreet; i.e.,
109161307.
General Layout – MIMOSA Export Data (MED)

Files
MED files contain Point setup, Machine setup, Set setup,

Plant setup, Alarm information and overall and dynamic
data in ASCII format. For more information refer to the
MIMOSA Technical Reference Guide. The eleven MED
files contain the following data:
4
User Manual
{prefix}0013.MED File
Contains site information, including site code, company
name and site name.
Contains site database information, including database ID
and database name.
Contains process/equipment information, including
plant/route/workspace name, Machine names, and Set
names.
Contains process/equipment information, including
segment-child relationships.
Contains SKF specific information on engineering units
types.
Contains measurement setup information, including Point
information.
Contains measurement data.
Contains measurement data for non-signal processed data,
including single value header information.
Contains measurement data, including single value header
and FFT_SETUP information.
4
User Manual
Contains measurement data, including spectral data.
Contains measurement data, including time waveform
data.
Defines Used in Record Structures

BAND_NAME_LEN is defined as 10 Characters.
BRG_LABEL_LEN is defined as 20 Characters.
BRG_NAME_LEN is defined as 30 Characters.
FILTER_FILENAME_LEN is defined as 8 Characters.
LOCATION_TAG_LEN is defined as 32 Characters.
MPC_ANSWER_LEN is defined as 15 Characters.
NODE_DESC_LENGTH is defined as 32 Characters.
NODE_NAME_LENGTH is defined as 20 Characters.
SERIAL_NBR_LEN is defined as 10 Characters.
SPEED_NAME_LEN is defined as 5 Characters.
TDC_LABEL_LEN is defined as 35 Characters.
TWICE_MAX_POL_VEC_ORDERS is defined as 8
elements.
UNITS_NAME_LENGTH is defined as 10 Characters.
USERID_LEN is defined as 20 Characters.
WIN_PRN_NAME_LEN is defined as 29 Characters.
ACO Bearing A Coefficient
AL Alert Alarm Level
ALAH Alert high scalar alarm
ALAL Alert low scalar alarm
ALDH Danger high scalar alarm
ALDL Danger low scalar alarm
ALEN Scalar alarm enable
ALF Alarm Flags
ALL Alarm Limit
ALST Alarm State
4
User Manual
ALT Alarm Type

ALM Alarm Method
ALO Alarm Output
ANS Answer
AS Active State
ASTR Alert String
AUCP Auto Capture
AUR Autorange
AVT Averaging Type
BCO Bearing B Coefficient
BCL Bearing Clearance
BOVG BOV Gating
CCO Bearing C Coefficient
CGP Cold Gap Position
CGX Cold Gap X
CGY Cold Gap Y
CPT Control Point
DAD DAD Type
DADC DAD Channel
DADN DAD Number
DATA Data Value(s)
DATE Creation date
DCO Bearing D Coefficient
DESC Description
DET Detector
DG Danger Alarm Level
DSTR Danger String
EN Enable
ENA1 MCC Envelope A1 Value
ENA2 MCC Envelope A2 Value
ENAR MCC Envelope Autorange
ENEN MCC Envelope Enabled
ENUN MCC Envelope Units Name
FACT Data Factor
FLG Flags
FLNM Filter Filename
FLR Filter Range
FORM Form Type
4
User Manual
FQM Frequency Modes

FSC Fullscale
ICPT Is a Control Point
ISC Is Complex
LAB Label
LBOV Lower BOV
LFQL Low Frequency Limit
LI Logic Input
LMET Location Method
LMTM Last Measurement Time
LMVL Last Measurement Value
LOC Location
LOUT Lower Output
LTAG Location Tag
LUDT Last Unload Date
MEA Measurement type
MNFQ Minimum Frequency
MNMG Minimum Mag
MNPS Minimum Phase
MVAL Minimum Value
MXFQ Maximum Frequency
MXMG Maximum Mag
MXPS Maximum Phase
NAME Name
NANS Number of Answers
NAV Number of Averages
NLNS Number Lines
NOTE Note Text
OCOD Owner Code
OFS Offset
OP Open
ORAW Overall Run Average Weight
ORD Order
OTYP Owner Type
OVAL Overall Alert
OVDG Overall Danger
OVST Overall Status
PHST Phase Status
4
User Manual
PKAL Peak Alert

PKDG Peak Danger
POS Position
PPR Pulses per revolution
PR Priority
QUES Question
RPM RPM Value
RTYP Route Type
SANG Sensor Angle
SCHD Schedule
SCST Spectral Status
SEL Selected
SEN Sensitivity
SETT Settle Time
SHR Shaft Rotation
SNBR Serial Number
SPD Speed
SPD2 Speed 2
SPDF Speed factor
SPNM Speed Name
SPDR Speed Ratio
SPSC Speed Scale
SPST Spectral Storage
SPW Sensor Power
SRAW Spectral Run Average Weight
ST Status
STDP Storage Depth
TACH Tachometer Number
TCAN Absolute Tachometer Angle
TDCL Top Dead Center Label
TMA1 MCC Temperature A1 Value
TMA2 MCC Temperature A2 Value
TMAR MCC Temperature Autorange
TMDT Timedate Stamp
TMEN MCC Temperature Enabled
TMST Time Status
TMUN MCC Temperature Units Name
TR Transducer
4
User Manual
TYPE Type
UBOV Under BOV
ULFQL Use Low Frequency Unit
UN Units Name
UOUT Upper Output
USID User ID
UT Units Type
VLA1 MCC Velocity A1 Value
VLA2 MCC Velocity A2 Value
VLAR MCC Velocity Autorange
VLEN MCC Velocity Enabled
VLUN MCC Velocity Units Name
VMT Value Measure Time
WIN Window
XIR X Data is Random
Data Types
The following data types are defined in their broadest
sense. Reference comments in the record descriptions for
additional limits.
string[max size] Up to `max size' alphanumerics
enclosed in quotes
short Integer number from -32768 to
32767
long Integer number from -2147483648
to 2147483647
unsigned short Integer number from 0 to
65535
unsigned long Integer number from 0 to
4294967295
float Decimal number from 1.2e-38 to
3.4e38
date Date specified in the form
"DD-MMM-YY hh:mm:ss"
4
User Manual
terminator Character 0x0D followed by

character 0x0A
char One character enclosed in quotes
Record Descriptions for Supported Records

A record is stored in the ASCII file in the following
general form:
The first line contains the name of the record with a
terminator afterward. Each additional line contains one
and only one data field. Data field lines consist of the field
abbreviation followed by a comma, a field value of the
appropriate type, and a terminator.
P_LANT
NAME, string [NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
DESC, string [NODE_DESC_LENGTH]
EN, short
ST, short
FLNM, string [FILTER_FILENAME_LEN]
S_ETNODE
EN, short
ST, short
M_ACHINE
EN, short
ST, short
L_OGICALPOINT
UN, string [UNITS_NAME_LENGTH]
4
User Manual
UT, short
EN, short
ST, short
TR, short
LI, short
AS, short
DET, short
FSC, float
OFS, float
SEN, double
ALF, long
DAD, short
AVT, short
TACH, unsigned short
PPR, float
SANG, unsigned short
SCHD, long
OVST, short
SCST, short
PHST, short
TMST, short
LMTM, long
LMVL, float
POS, short
LOC, short
C_HANNEL
UN, string [UNITS_NAME_LENGTH]
UT, short
EN, short
ST, short
TR, short
LI, short
AS, short
DET, short
FSC, float
4
User Manual
OFS, float
SEN, double
ALF, long
DAD, short
AVT, short
TACH, unsigned short
PPR, float
SANG, unsigned short
SCHD, long
OVST, short
SCST, short
PHST, short
TMST, short
LMTM, long
LMVL, float
POS, short
LOC, short
M_EASUREMENT
MEA, short
EN, short
S_INGLEVALUEHEADER
TMDT, date
MEA, short
UT, short
DATA, float
USID, string [USERID_LEN]
SNBR, string [SERIAL_NBR_LEN]
S_CALARALARMS
ALEN, short
ALM, short
ALDH, float
ALDL, float
ALAH, float
ALAL, float
4
User Manual
F_FT_SETUP
SPNM, string [SPEED_NAME_LEN]
AUCP, short
NLNS, short
FQM, short
FLR, short
NAV, short
SPST, short
SPSC, short
STDP, short
ULFQL, short
WIN, short
MXFQ, float
MNFQ, float
LFQL, float
ORAW, float
SRAW, float
SPD, float
SPD2, float
SPDF, float
O_LS_POINT SETUP
DADN, unsigned short
DADC, unsigned short
AUR, short
SPW, short
SETT, float
BOVG, short
LBOV, float
UBOV, float
ALO, short
LOUT, unsigned short
UOUT, unsigned short
CPT, long
ICPT, short
TCAN, unsigned short
TDCL, string [TDC_LABEL_LEN]
4
User Manual
CGX, float
CGY, float
BCL, float
CGP, short
SHR, short
N_OTEHEADER
TMDT, date
OCOD, long
OTYP, char
NOTE, string, [Unlimited]
E_NDNOTE
S_PECTRALDATA
TMDT, date
NLNS, unsigned long
MEA, short
UT, short
ISC, short
XIR, short
FQM, short
WIN, short
NAV, short
DET, short
MNFQ, float
MXFQ, float
OFS, float
FACT, float
RPM, float
DATA, float[PNTS]
E_NDDATA
4
User Manual
S_PECTRALDATA
M_OREDATA
DATA, float[PNTS]
E_NDDATA
P_HASEDATA
TMDT, date
NLNS, unsigned long
MEA, short
UT, short
ISC, short
XIR, short
FQM, short
WIN, short
NAV, short
DET, short
MNFQ, float
MXFQ, float
OFS, float
FACT, float
RPM, float
DATA, float[PNTS]
E_NDDATA
T_IMEDATA
TMDT, date
NLNS, unsigned long
MEA, short
UT, short
ISC, short
XIR, short
FQM, short
WIN, short
NAV, short
DET, short
4
User Manual
MNFQ, float
MXFQ, float
OFS, float
FACT, float
RPM, float
DATA, float[PNTS]
E_NDDATA
T_IMEDATA
M_OREDATA
DATA, float[PNTS]
E_NDDATA
E_NVELOPEALARM
EN, short
ALT, short
ALL, short
ALM, short
TMDT, date
NLNS, unsigned long
MEA, short
UT, short
ISC, short
XIR, short
FQM, short
WIN, short
NAV, short
DET, short
MNFQ, float
MXFQ, float
OFS, float
FACT, float
RPM, float
4
User Manual
DATA, float [PNTS]

E_NDATA
S_PECTRALBANDALARM
EN, short
ALT, short
ALL, short
ALM, short
NAME, string [BAND_NAME_LEN]
FLG, short
MNFQ, float
MXFQ, float
PKAL, float
PKDG, float
OVAL, float
OVDG, float
SEL, short
B_EARINGBANDALARM
EN, short
ALT, short
ALL, short
ALM, short
NAME, string [BRG_NAME_LEN]
LAB, string [BRG_LABEL_LEN]
FLG, short
ACO, float
BCO, float
CCO, float
DCO, float
AL, float
DG, float
4
User Manual
M_AGPHASEALARM
EN, short
ALT, short
ALL, short
ALM, short
Repeat the following data
TWICE_MAX_POL_VEC_ORDERS
times:
ORD, float
MNMG, float
MXMG, float
MNPS, float
MXPS, float
C_MVA55_SETUP
SPDR, float
M_PCLOCATIONINFO
LTAG, string [LOCATION_TAG_LEN]
LMET, short
M_DM_SETUP
ENEN, short
ENA1, float
ENA2, float
ENAR, short
ENUN, string [UNITS_NAME_LEN]
VLEN, short
VLA1, float
VLA2, float
VLAR, short
VLUN, string [UNITS_NAME_LEN]
TMEN, short
TMA1, float
TMA2, float
TMAR, short
4
User Manual
TMUN, string [UNITS_NAME_LEN]

FORM, short
ASTR, string [LOCATION_TAG_LEN]
DSTR, string [LOCATION_TAG_LEN]
QUES, string [LOCATION_TAG_LEN]
NANS, short
MVAL, float
M_PC_ANSWER
ALST, short
ANS, string [MPC_ANSWER_LEN]
P_LANT_ID
R_OUTE
LUDT, unsigned long
SCHD, short
RTYP, short
R_OUTE_LOGICALPOINT
R_OUTE_MACHINE
R_OUTE_SETNODE
4
User Manual
S_PEED_REFERENCE_POINT
P_LANT_PLANT_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_SETNODE_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_MACHINE_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_POINT_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
C_ONTROL_POINT
P_LANT_PLANT_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_SETNODE_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_MACHINE_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
P_LANT_POINT_NAME, string
[NODE_NAME_LENGTH]
W_ORKSPACE
LUDT, unsigned long
SCHD, short
RTYP, short
W_ORKSPACE _LOGICALPOINT
W_ORKSPACE _MACHINE
W_ORKSPACE _SETNODE
4
User Manual
Field Limits
Some field values are limited beyond their type. The
following section displays legal values for these fields:
ALEN -- - This field is a bit encode field with the
following encoding:
0 Disable all alarms // 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Enable danger low // 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 Enable alert low // 0000 0000 0000 0010
4 Enable reference // 0000 0000 0000 0100
8 Enable alert high // 0000 0000 0000 1000
16 Enable danger high //0000 0000 0001 0000
31 Enable all alarms //0000 0000 0001 1111
ALL
0 None
1 DangerLow
2 AlertLow
4 Reference
8 AlertHigh
16 DangerHigh
ALM
0 Off
1 Level
2 InWindow
3 OutOfWindow
ALT
0 None
1 Scalar
2 Envelope
4 SpecBand
8 MagPhase
4
User Manual
16 Bearing
31 TypeAll
AS
0 Logic point active low
1 Logic point active high
AUCP
0 Off
1 On Overall Alarm
2 Always
AUR
-1 Undefined
0 Off
1 On
AVT
-1 Undefined - Unknown Averaging or as yet un-
assigned
0 Normal – Use Normal Averaging
1 None - No Averaging.
2 PeakHold - Normal Averaging
3 SyncTime - Synchronous Time.
BOVG
-1 Undefined
0 Off
1 Out of Window
CGP
-1 Unknown
0 Center Position
1 Bottom Position
DAD
-1 Undefined
0 None
4
User Manual
1 Microlog
2 Picolog
3 LMU
4 MIM
5 Manual
6 MPC
7 M800
8 CM20
DET
0 Peak
1 PeakToPeak
2 RMS
3 TrueRMS
4 TruePeakToPeak
5 TruePeak
6 DetectorNone
EN
0 disabled
1 enabled
FLR
0 Range0- 5Hz - 100Hz
1 Range1- 50Hz - 1KHz
2 Range2- 500Hz - 10KHz
3 Range3- 5KHz - 40KHz
4 RangeNone
FORM
0 None
1 Gauge
2 Slider
3 Bar
4 Single Select
5 Multi Select
4
User Manual
FQM
0 FixedSpan
1 Tracking
2 None
LI
0 No, this is not a logic point
1 Yes, this is a logic point
LMET
0 None
1 Barcode
2 Studid
MEA
0 PicoVibIso
1 PicoEnvAvg
2 PicoEnvPeak
3 PicoSEEs
4 Acceleration
5 AccelToVelocity
6 Velocity
7 AccelToDisplacement
8 VelToDisplacement
9 Displacement
10 VoltsAC
11 SEEs
12 EnvAccel
13 EnvVel
14 PeakHFD
15 RMS_HFD
16 Temperature
17 Pressure
18 Flow
19 RPM
20 VoltsDC
21 UserDefined
4
User Manual
22 Current
23 Logic
24 LinearDisplacement
25 Counts
26 CountRate
27 Time
28 Phase
29 Overall
30 EnvelopeDangerHigh
31 EnvelopeAlertHigh
32 EnvelopeReference
33 AC_CURRENT
34 DYNAMIC_PRESSURE
35 POWER
36 POWER_FACTOR
37 EFFICIENCY
38 HUMIDITY
39 RESISTANCE_OHMS
40 RESISTANCE_MOHMS
41 SPM
42 MPC_MCC_ENV
43 MPC_MCC_VEL
44 MPC_MCCTMP
45 MPC_OP_HOURS
46 MPC_INSPECTION
47 MeasNone
SHR
-1 Unknown
0 Clockwise shaft rotation
1 Counterclockwise shaft rotation
SPSC
0 NoScale
1 Hz
2 CPM
3 RPM
4 User
4
User Manual
SPST
0 FFT
1 Time
2 FFT and Time
3 FFT and Phase
4 Orbit
5 FFT and Orbit
6 None
SPW
-1 Undefined
0 Internal ICP
1 External
2 Charge Converter
ST- This field is a bit encode field with the following
encoding:
0 NoMeasurement // 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 InDangerLow // 0000 0000 0000 0001
2 InAlertLow // 0000 0000 0000 0010
4 InClearCondition // 0000 0000 0000 0100
8 InAlertHigh // 0000 0000
0000 1000
16 InDangerHigh // 0000 0000 0001 0000
32 MissedInRoute // 0000 0000 0010 0000
64 InInspecNote // 0000 0000 0100 0000
128 InScalarAlarm // 0000 0000 1000 0000
256 InSpecBandPeak // 0000 0001 0000 0000
512 InSpecBandOverall // 0000 0010 0000 0000
1024 InMagPhaseAlarm // 0000 0100 0000 0000
2048 InBearingAlarm // 0000 1000 0000 0000
4096 InOverloadErr // 0001 0000 0000 0000
8192 InNeedOfUpdate // 0010 0000 0000 0000
16384 READ_ONLY // 0100 0000 0000 0000
4
User Manual
TACH
0 None
1 Tach1
2 Tach2
3 Tach3
4 Tach4
5 Tach5
6 Tach6
7 Tach7
8 Tach8
TR
0 PicoVibIso
1 PicoEnvAvg
2 PicoEnvPeak
3 PicoSEEs
4 Acceleration
5 AccelToVelocity
6 Velocity
7 AccelToDisplacement
8 VelToDisplacement
9 Displacement
10 VoltsAC
11 SEEs
12 EnvAccel
13 EnvVel
14 PeakHFD
15 RMS_HFD
16 Temperature
17 Pressure
18 Flow
19 RPM
20 VoltsDC
21 UserDefined
22 Current
23 Logic
24 LinearDisplacement
4
User Manual
25 Counts
26 CountRate
27 Orbit
28 ShaftCenterLine
29 AC_CURRENT
30 DYNAMIC_PRESSURE
31 POWER
32 POWER_FACTOR
33 EFFICIENCY
34 HUMIDITY
35 RESISTANCE_OHMS
36 RESISTANCE_MOHMS
37 SPM
38 MPC_MCC
39 MPC_OP_HOURS
40 MPC_INSPECTION
41 MPC_MULTI_INSPECTION
42 None
ULFQL
0 Do not use lower frequency limit
1 Use lower frequency limit
2 None
UT
0 None - Unitless quantity
1 User - User defined quantity (Field UN contains
string for units)
2 SEEs - SEE technology
3 Gs - Acceleration
4 GsEnv - Enveloped acceleration
5 GHFD - HFD acceleration
6 GRmsHFD - RMS HFD acceleration
7 MMPerSec - Velocity (metric)
8 MMPerSecEnv - Enveloped vel (metric)
9 Microns - Displacement (metric)
10 InchPerSec - Velocity (English)
11 InchPerSecEnv - Env velocity (English)
4
User Manual
12 Mils - Displacement (English)

13 Degrees - Phase
14 Shaft Mils – Shaft Centerline (English)
15 Shaft Microns – Shaft Centerline (metric)
16 AMPERES – ABB AC Current
17 BARS – ABB Dynamic Pressure (metric)
18 PSI – ABB Dynamic Pressure (English)
19 KILOWATTS – ABB Power (metric)
20 PERCENT – ABB Efficiency & Humidity
21 OHMS – ABB Resistance
22 MEGA_OHMS – ABB Resistance
23 DBSV – ABB SPM
24 HP – ABB Power (English)
WIN
0 Uniform
1 Hanning
2 FlatTop
3 None
4
User Manual
User Notes
4
User Manual
Appendix B
Database Conversion Utilities
Converting PRISM2 Data to PRISM4 Format
This appendix provides detailed instructions for:

• Converting PRISM2 1.22 or newer databases to
PRISM4 1.3x format.
• Converting PRISM4 1.20 or newer data to version
1.3x format.
Each conversion utility is described in its own section.
PRISM2 1.22 (DOS) or newer databases must be
converted to PRISM4 1.3x format to be used with the
Ø Any loss of power during a conversion
may damage your PRISM2 databases.
Ø Important - Use DOS's backup program
(or other backup program/device) to back
up your PRISM2 databases before
conversion.
Verifying the PRISM2 Database

Many database conversion problems have been traced to
corrupt PRISM2 source databases. PRISM2 (DOS)
supplies a diagnostic program (PRDIAGS.EXE) that
checks the integrity of your PRISM2 databases. Run this
diagnostic program on your PRISM2 databases prior to
conversion. Use the following procedure to run the
PRISM2 Diagnostics Utility.
4
PRISM for Windows B-1
User Manual
• From the PRISM2 installation disks, run the

PRDIAGS.EXE utility to determine the integrity of
the PRISM2 database. PRDIAGS executes, and
creates an ASCII text file named DIAGS.OUT in the
database's directory (Default = USER1 directory).
• Read the DIAGS.OUT ASCII file and correct all
database integrity problems before proceeding with
the PRISM2 to PRISM4 for Windows database
conversion.
Ø Contact your SKF Condition Monitoring
service representative with questions.
Error Checking During Conversion

You can place the PRISM2 to PRISM4 conversion program
in a more comprehensive error trapping mode. To do this,
set the following environment variables either together or
separately.
At the DOS command line prompt, type:
C:\>SET P2TOP4ERRORLEVEL=0 ↵ Enter, and/or
C:\>SET P2TOP4BTRVERRORS=1 ↵ Enter
The first environment variable creates a detailed error.log
file. The second echoes any errors to the screen.
Ø If you receive a “database open” error
after a database conversion, make sure
that you have a valid PRISM4 database
filename selected.
Preparing to Convert a PRISM2 Database

Ø Pre-1.22 PRISM2 databases must be
converted to 1.22 or 1.3x format prior to
conversion to PRISM4 for Windows
format. If you are converting pre-1.22
Microlog or On-Line databases, use the
pre-1.22 conversion programs created
4
B-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
during installation (see Chapter 2,

Installation and Setup).
PRISM4's conversion program copies a specified PRISM2
Source database to a specified Destination directory, then
performs the database conversion in the Destination
directory. The original PRISM2 database is not altered in
any way.
Ø For disk management purposes, always
specify a PRISM4 Destination directory
that is different than the PRISM2 Source
directory.
About Prime SETs
In PRISM2, prime SETs are SETs that do not branch from
another hierarchy item. Most PRISM2 databases have
multiple prime SETs in their hierarchy.
In PRISM4 for Windows, prime SETs do not exist.
PRISM4 databases consist of multiple hierarchies, each
starting at the Plant level and branching into SETs
(optional), machines, and measurement POINTs.
During a PRISM2 to PRISM4 database conversion, all
PRISM2 prime SETs become new plants in the PRISM4
database. With this in mind, you may wish to adjust your
PRISM2 database hierarchy before conversion.
About the Source Database Location
During the conversion setup, you are prompted for the disk
drive and directory path of the PRISM2 database (the
Source database). If you are unsure of the directory path
for the database you wish to convert, you may use
PRISM2's Control Panel to identify it.
Setting Up a Database Conversion

To start the conversion program:
4
User Manual
• In the Window's group containing the PRISM4 for

Windows programs, double-click the PRISM2 to
PRISM4 1.3x Converter icon. The Database
Conversion from PRISM2 to PRISM4 window
displays.
This initial window is empty except for the File pull down
menu.
To convert a PRISM2 database to PRISM4 format:
• Click the File menu's Convert option. The Database
Conversion Setup dialog box displays.
4
User Manual
Figure B - 1.
Converting a PRISM2 database to PRISM4 format is

basically a three step process:
• Specify the directory path for the PRISM2 database to
convert (Source Directory).
• Specify the directory path where the converted
database files will be stored (Destination Directory).
4
User Manual
• Use Database Conversion Setup check boxes to

select which data to convert for the selected PRISM2
database.
To select the directory paths:
At the top of the Database Conversion Setup dialog box
are two text boxes:
Source Directory - Specifies the directory path for
the PRISM2 database to convert.
Destination Directory - Specifies the directory path
where the converted database files will be stored in
PRISM4 format.
There are two ways to specify database directory paths.
You may:
• Type the directory path in its respective text box, or
• Use each text box's Browse command button and the
Locate Source/Destination Database dialog box to
identify each directory.
4
User Manual
Figure B - 2.
The Locate Source/Destination Database Dialog Box.
Ø The specified Source Directory must

contain the PRISM2 mlsst00.dat
database file. This is indicated in the
Locate Source Database dialog box's
List Files of Type drop down list box.
Ø The specified Destination Directory
must contain the PRISM4 prismdb.dbd
database file. This is indicated in the
Locate Destination Database dialog
box's List Files of Type drop down list
box.
After identifying the Source and Destination database
directories, you select which data to convert from the
Source database. This is accomplished using check boxes
in the Data Sources, Data to Convert, and Others to
Convert screen areas.
Ø Hierarchy / POINT Setups - These
check boxes are always selected to
indicate that the selected database's
4
User Manual
hierarchy item setups are converted

along with the data.
Data Sources
Standard Database
Alarm Database
Archive Database
• Use check boxes to select which database(s) to convert
for the selected PRISM2 database.
Ø In PRISM4 for Windows, standard and
alarm data is stored in one database.
Ø Also, PRISM4 for Windows does not use
an Archive feature (since PRISM4 stores
200 overall process values and up to 999
overall values, spectra, and time
waveforms per measurement). If
selected, converted Archive data is stored
with standard and alarm data in
PRISM4.
Data to Convert
Trend Data
Spectrum / Time Data
• Use check boxes to select which stored data to convert
Ø Stored phase data is converted, but not
polar vector alarms.
Others to Convert
Routes
Spectral Bands
Machine History / Notes
FAM Data
• Use check boxes to select which stored data to convert
4
User Manual
Beginning the Conversion Process

• After using the check boxes to select which data to
convert, click the Database Conversion Setup dialog
box's checkmark command button to begin the
conversion process.
Ø If PRISM4 database files exist in the
specified Destination Directory, you are
prompted whether to overwrite the
existing database with the converted
database.
At the completion of the conversion process a Database
Conversion Complete message appears and prompts you
to read the conversion Log to identify conversion problems
(if any).
The Conversion Log

The conversion program automatically creates a
conversion “log” file for reporting conversion results.
This file is created in Windows Notepad format and, after
a database conversion, is viewed by selecting the File
menu's View Log option in the Database Conversion
From PRISM2 to PRISM4 window.
To view the conversion log:
• Select the File menu's View Log option. The
Window's Notepad window opens and displays the
results of the most recent database conversion.
4
User Manual
Converting PRISM4 1.20 or Newer Data to Version 1.3x Format
Figure B - 3.
Ø The conversion log file (p2top4.log) is

overwritten with each successive
conversion.
The conversion log records the most recent conversion's
results. If conversion problems occur, each problem is
indicated in the conversion log.
Converting PRISM4 1.20 or Newer Data to Version

1.3x Format
PRISM4 version 1.20 or newer databases must be

converted to PRISM4 version 1.3x format to be used with
the PRISM4 version 1.3x software.
Ø Any loss of power during a conversion
may damage your PRISM4 databases.
Ø Important - Use DOS's backup program
(or other backup program/device) to back
up your PRISM4 databases before
conversion.
4
B - 10 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Steps to Convert a PRISM4 1.20 Database to

1.3x Format
To start the conversion program:
• In the Window's group containing the PRISM4 for
Windows programs, double-click the PRISM4 1.20 to
1.3x Converter icon. The PRISM4 Database Utility
window displays.
This initial window displays three pull-down menus (File,
Convert, and Help).
• Click the Convert menu's Database option. The
Convert Database dialog box displays.
Figure B - 4.
4
PRISM for Windows B - 11
User Manual
At the top of the Convert Database dialog box are two

Browse command buttons, one to specify the Source
(version 1.20 or newer) database, and one to specify the
Destination (version 1.3x) database.
Ø Always specify a new Destination
directory for the converted 1.3x data
files. Never use the same directory for
both the Source and Destination
databases.
Ø If the specified Destination directory
does not exist, you are prompted whether
to automatically create it before the
conversion.
Important
Before proceeding with the database conversion,
ensure that your hard disk drive has enough room to
double the database you are converting.
• Click the Source Browse command button. A Select

Source Database dialog box appears.
• Use standard Windows procedures to specify the
directory path and prismdb.dbd database file for the
1.20 or newer database you wish to convert to 1.3x
format. For example:
F:\p4sol\p4data\prismdb.dbd
Ø Do not select the prismdb.dbd file in the
P4SOL directory. This file is not an
active database file. It is used by
PRISM4 to create new databases.
• Click the Destination Browse command button. A
Select Destination Directory dialog box appears.
4
User Manual
• Use standard Windows procedures to specify the

directory path for the new 1.3x database (the
converted 1.20 or newer database).
• After specifying the Source and Destination
directories (and ensuring you have enough disk space
for the conversion), click the dialog box's Convert
command button. The 1.20 to 1.3x database
conversion commences.
As the specified database converts, the lower portion of the
Convert Database dialog box displays Database Record
Conversion Progress bars for the various types of records
in the database. After all of the database's records are
converted, you may:
• Repeat the process for another 1.20 or newer database,
or
• Click Done to exit the Convert Database dialog box.
Ø After converting the 1.20 or newer

database to 1.3x format, use PRISM4's
File/Preferences/System Preferences
option to specify the new database's Data
Directory.
4
PRISM for Windows B - 13
User Manual
User Notes
4
User Manual
Appendix C
Toolbar Tools and Important Keystrokes
Important Keystrokes
Toolbar Tools
Plant List, ROUTE List, and Workspace List

(always displayed)
Plant List Workspace List

ROUTE List
Plant Hierarchy List
Print
Active
Info Add Copy Display Display Window
Filter
Machine Item List Spectrum timewave
Add SET Add Machine Display Display

POINT Search Trend Waterfall
4
PRISM for Windows C-1
User Manual
Toolbar Tools
ROUTE Hierarchy List
Print
Upload
Info Microlog Filter Display Display
Status List Spectrum timewave
Download Machine Comm. Display Display

Search Setup Trend Waterfall
WorkSpace Hierarchy List
Info Filter Display Display Print

List Spectrum timewave active
window
Machine Display Display
Search Trend Waterfall
Trend Plot
Print
Exclude Active
Zoom Prev. Time
Info Include Window
POINT From
Trend
Single Next Curve Spectrum Scaling
Cursor POINT Fit From Trend
4
C-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Toolbar Tools
Spectrum Plots
Display Print
Frequency Zoom Active
Harmonic Prev. Prev.
Info Markers Window
Markers Time POINT
stamp
Single Sideband Next Next Scaling
Cursor Markers Timestamp POINT
Time Waveform Plots
Print
Active
Harmonic Zoom Prev. Prev.
Info Window
Markers Time POINT
stamp
Single Next Next Scaling Activate P4
Cursor Timestamp POINT SoundByte
Waterfall Plot
Print
Active
Single Extract Prev. Window
Cursor Plots POINT
Info Band Next Scaling

Cursor POINT
4
User Manual
Toolbar Tools
Polar Vector Plot
Print
Active
Single Prev.
Window
Cursor POINT
Info Next Scaling

POINT
Report Controls
Print
Next Current Save to
Page Page Disk
Prev. Print All

Page Pages
Hierarchy List Keystrokes

↑ and ↓
Move the item selector (highlight) up and down the
hierarchy list.
+ and -
Open and close highlighted hierarchy list items.
Ctrl/+ and Ctrl/-

Open and close all sub-items branching from the
highlighted item in the hierarchy list.
4
User Manual
Toolbar Tools
Graphic Display Keystrokes

←→↑↓
Move cursor.
← and Shift/→
Shift/← →
Move cursor in larger increments.
Spacebar
Excludes/Include timestamps in trend plot (for curve fit
display).
Windows Keystrokes
F1
Accesses on-line Help Index.
Ctrl/F4
Closes the active window.
Alt/F4
Closes the active Windows program.
Tab and Shift/Tab

Move pointer forward and back among dialog box fields.
4
User Manual
Toolbar Tools
User Notes
4
User Manual
Appendix D
Microlog Detection Methods
True Peak Detection
True peak and true pk to pk signal detection are

available in Microlog data collectors with firmware
version 3.30 or later. Especially with enveloping POINT
types, true peak and true pk to pk detection offer more
accurate data representation than calculating peak and
peak to peak values from the RMS value.
The following table lists the Microlog's (version 3.30 or
later firmware) method of signal detection and scaling for
overall dynamic measurements. Note that acceleration,
velocity, and displacement values obtained from an
accelerometer or velocity pickup are always scaled from
RMS detection. This replicates the measurement method
used with most older instruments, so newer Microlog
recorded values remain equivalent.
4
PRISM for Windows D-1
User Manual
Microlog Detection Methods
True Peak Detection
DETECTION
INPUT OUTPUT Peak Pk to Pk RMS
Acceleration Acceleration Scaled from Scaled from True RMS
RMS RMS
Acceleration Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True RMS
RMS RMS
Acceleration Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True RMS
RMS RMS
Velocity Velocity Scaled from Scaled from True RMS
RMS RMS
Velocity Displacement Scaled from Scaled from True RMS
RMS RMS
Displacement Displacement True Peak True Pk to Pk True RMS
Voltage Voltage True Peak True Pk to Pk True RMS
SEE SEE True Peak True Pk to Pk True RMS
ENV/ACC ENV/ACC True Peak True Pk to Pk True RMS
ENV/VEL ENV/VEL True Peak True Pk to Pk True RMS
4
D-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Appendix E
Network Administrator Options
Overview
PRISM4 for Windows' Network Administrator program

allows the system administrator to assign or delete user
names from the PRISM4 for Windows system.
To start the Network Administrator program:
• In the PRISM4 Solutions group window, double-click
on the PRISM4 for Windows Network
Administrator program icon. The PRISM4 for
Windows User Administrator dialog box appears.
Figure E - 1.
4
PRISM for Windows E-1
User Manual
Adding or Deleting PRISM4 Users
The User Administrator window allows the system

administrator to add or delete authorized PRISM4 for
Windows users, or to issue and modify the system's
password.
Ø Each user must log into PRISM4 for
Windows using a valid user list name
appearing in this User Administrator
window.
Use the Edit menu's Users option to add new users to the
users list, or to delete existing users from the users list.
Ø Logging on with your user name causes
File menu Preferences settings to
default to your setup. Also, no other user
may process your uploaded data.
To add or delete PRISM4 users:
• Select the Edit menu's Users option. The User Setup
dialog box appears.
4
E-2 PRISM for Windows
User Manual
Figure E - 2.
• To add a new user to the user list, click the dialog

box's + button. The Enter User Name dialog box
appears.
• Type in the new user name following these rules:
8 characters maximum
No blank spaces in a user name.
No punctuation (letters and numbers only).
• Click the checkmark command button to save the user
name and return to the User Setup dialog box.
• To delete an existing user from the user list, click to
highlight the user to delete, and click the dialog box's
− button.
• When finished adding and deleting user names, click
the dialog box's checkmark command button to save
your changes and exit the dialog box.
4
User Manual
Assigning a System Password
The Network Administrator allows you to issue the

PRISM4 system a password that (when enabled) must be
entered prior to accessing certain PRISM4 functions.
PRISM4 operations requiring password entry include:
• Entering a Plant Attributes, SET Attributes,
Machine Attributes, or POINT Setup dialog box.
• The Edit menu's Modify Setup and Modify by
Attribute options.
• Hierarchy list copy, move, and delete operations.
• Using the Set Speed feature in a spectrum display.
• Deleting timestamps from the Acquired Data List.
• Import and Export operations.
When the password feature is enabled, the user must enter
the proper password the first time one of the above features
is accessed. Entering the proper password disables the
system's password protection for the remainder of the
PRISM4 session (until you exit the program).
To issue a system password:

• In the User Administrator, select the Edit menu's
Password option. The Edit Password dialog box
appears.
4
User Manual
Figure E - 3.
• At the top of the Edit Password dialog box, click to

enable the Enable password checking check box.
When Password checking is enabled, the remaining three
fields become active.
• Enter the desired password in the New Password field
(the password must be between 3 and 8 characters),
and press Tab to advance to the Retry Password
field.
Ø Passwords are case sensitive. Upper and
lower case keystrokes must be re-entered
exactly as initially entered.
• Enter the system's password again in the Retry
Password field, and select the dialog box's checkmark
command button to exit the dialog box.
The specified password is immediately active.
4
User Manual
To change the system's password:

appears.
• Enter the system's current password in the Old
Password field.
• Enter the new password in the New Password field.
• Re-enter the new password in the Retry Password
field, and select the dialog box's checkmark command
button to exit the dialog box.
The new password is immediately active.
To disable password protection:

appears.
• Enter the system's current password in the Old
Password field.
• At the top of the Edit Password dialog box, click to
disable the Enable password checking check box.
The last three fields become unavailable.
• Select the dialog box's checkmark command button to
exit the dialog box.
Password protection is disabled.
4
User Manual
Appendix F
Modem Communications
Overview
Remote upload/download procedures are accomplished

using a modem link between PRISM4 and the Microlog.
For successful remote communications, you must pre-set
certain parameters on the Microlog, in the PRISM4 for
Windows version 1.30 or newer software, and on the
modem. Standard setups for each of these are discussed in
this appendix.
PRISM4 for Windows Communication Preferences
To set up PRISM4 for remote communications:

On the PRISM4 end of the modem link, use PRISM4's
File/Preferences/Communication option to display the
Communication Preferences dialog box. In the dialog
box, set:
• The Modem Mode option to Auto Answer
(recommended mode) or Originate.
• The Com Port option to the com port to which the
modem is connected.
• The Baud Rate - If you are using “voice quality”
telephone lines, baud rates of 4800 or lower are the
most successful. Voice quality lines may occasionally
handle higher baud rates depending on the time of day
and how “clean” the phone line.
PRISM4 for Windows F-1

User Manual
Microlog Communication Preference Settings
If you are using “data quality” telephone lines, baud

rates of 9600 or higher are successful.
Ø The selected Baud Rate may be adjusted
by the modem, if so, the adjusted baud
rate is saved with the setup.
• The Data Bits, Parity, and Stop Bits settings to their
default values (8, none, 1).
Ø The Command field is not used if
PRISM4’s Modem Mode is set to Auto
Answer.
Microlog Communication Preference Settings
To set up the Microlog for remote communications:

• On the Microlog end of the modem link, connect the
modem to the Microlog using the CMSS50238
modem cable.
Ø Of the cable’s two connectors, ensure the
connector with the “clip” is attached to
the Microlog.
• From the Microlog’s Main Menu, select the
Utilities/Communications option and set the Modem
Mode option to:
• Originate if PRISM4’s Modem Mode is set to
Auto Answer (recommended mode), or
• Auto Answer if PRISM4’s Modem Mode is set
to Originate.
• The Baud Rate - If you are using “voice quality”
telephone lines, baud rates of 4800 or lower are the
most successful. Voice quality lines may occasionally
handle higher baud rates depending on the time of day
and how “clean” the phone line.
F-2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Modem Communication Settings
If you are using “data quality” telephone lines, baud

rates of 9600 or higher are successful.
• In the Phone # field (with the Microlog’s Modem
Mode set to Originate) enter the phone number of the
computer/modem on the PRISM4 end of the modem
link.
Modem Communication Settings
Hayes and Hayes-compatible modems - Use all of the

modem’s default settings.
US Robotics Sportster modem - Use the following settings:
• Default dip switch settings.
• All of the modem’s default settings.
• Variable serial port rate (&B0), if not the default.
• Transmit Data flow control disabled (&H0), if not the
default.
• Ignore RTS (&R1), if not the default.
Ø When changing the modem's settings,
ensure the new settings are permanently
stored in the modem's nonvolatile
memory (NVRAM).
Supported Modems
PRISM4 and Microlog (CMVA10/30/40)

The following modems were verified as compatible with
PRISM4 / Microlog (CMVA10/30/40) operations:
Modems attached to PRISM4
Modems attached to the Microlog

User Manual
To Upload/Download From a Remote Microlog
US Robotics Sportster 28,800 Fax Modem

Practical Peripherals Pocket Modem 14,400
Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144
PRISM4 and CMVA55 Microlog

The following modems were verified as compatible with
PRISM4 / Microlog (CMVA55) operations:
All Hayes and Hayes-compatible modems.
US Robotics Sportster modem.
Once the Microlog and PRISM4’s modem communication

parameters are properly set up, The Transfer menu’s
Download, Upload, and Status operations operate
normally (as with a hardwired Microlog/PRISM4 link).
To upload data from the Microlog to PRISM4:
• On the PRISM4 end, set PRISM4’s communication
preferences as described earlier.
• On the Microlog end, set the Microlog’s
communication options as described earlier.
Ø On the Microlog, after entering the
correct Phone #, press ESCAPE to
return to the Microlog’s Main Menu.

User Manual
• In PRISM4, select the Transfer menu’s Upload

option. When communications are first established,
the Microlog Transfer dialog box displays the
modem status.
Figure F - 1.
The Modem Status should progress from CHECKING to

OK STATUS to WAITING.
• When the Status is WAITING, the person at the
PRISM4 end informs the person at the Microlog end
that WAITING Status is achieved.
• At this point, the person on the Microlog end selects
the Microlog Main Menu’s Transfer option. The
Microlog’s Transfer screen displays a Modem Status:
OK Status message, then calls the specified phone
number and establishes communications.
• On the PRISM4 end, PRISM4 automatically displays
the Upload ROUTE dialog box, which displays the
Microlog’s ROUTEs available for uploading.
• At this point, perform normal upload procedures as
described in Chapter 5, Creating, Downloading, and
Uploading PRISM4 ROUTEs.
Ø Once communications are established,
subsequent download, upload, and status
procedures operate normally (as with a
hardwired link). The Microlog
Transfer dialog box does not display for

User Manual
subsequent remote communications, only

when communications are first
established.
To download a ROUTE from PRISM4 to the remote
Microlog:
• Perform the same steps as for uploading remote data,
except select the PRISM4 Transfer menu’s Download
option. The Download ROUTE dialog box displays.
• Select the ROUTE(s), or hierarchy POINTs to
download and click OK. When communications are
first established, the Microlog Transfer dialog box
displays the modem status.
• When the Status is WAITING, the person at the
PRISM4 end informs the person at the Microlog end
that WAITING Status is achieved.
• At this point, the person on the Microlog end selects
the Microlog Main Menu’s Transfer option. The
Microlog’s Transfer screen displays a Modem Status:
OK Status message, then calls the specified phone
number, establishes communications, and the
specified ROUTEs or hierarchy POINTs download to
the Microlog.
After a download/upload operation, communications are
ended when:
• The person on the Microlog end ESCAPEs out of the
Transfer screen.
• The person on the PRISM4 end selects the Transfer
menu’s Disconnect Modem option.
• The person on the PRISM4 end exits PRISM4.

User Manual
Troubleshooting Modem Communications
PRISM4 fails to communicate with the modem. When

in Auto Answer mode, PRISM4 displays the “Modem
not working or not on” message in the Modem Status
window, then closes the window without displaying the
“OK Status” and the “WAITING” status.
• Turn the modem off and power it on again.
• Check the modem phone line and the serial cable (if
the modem is external) to ensure a good connection.
• Verify the modem is connected to the right COM port
(COM1 or COM2) and the correct COM port setting
is selected in the PRISM4’s Communication
Preferences dialog box.
• Verify the modem’s COM port is not being used by
another serial device installed in your computer. Do
not use the same COM port for your modem and serial
mouse. If your modem is on COM1, the mouse can
only use COM2 or COM4. If your modem is on
COM2, the mouse can only use COM1 or COM3.
• Run the Terminal program (located in the Windows
Program Manager/Accessories group) to ensure the
modem is configured correctly for Windows. To do
so:
• Exit PRISM4, then exit all other applications
except the Program Manager.
• Run the Terminal program and select the
Settings menu’s Communications option (to
ensure the correct Com Port setting).
• Type the command “AT” (without the quotation
marks) and press ↵ Enter. If everything is
correct, OK or 0 (zero) should appear on the
modem terminal screen.

User Manual
Ø If you do not see the text echoed back to

the screen as you type the command, use
the Settings menu’s Terminal
Preferences option to select Local Echo
as the Terminal Mode.
If the modem does not work in Terminal (OK or 0 is
not returned after typing AT), try the following:
• Disable 32-bit file access. To do so, select the
Control Panel’s 386 Enhanced, choose the
Virtual Memory button, choose the Change
button, then clear the Use 32-Bit Disk Access
check box.
• In the Windows directory, open the
SYSTEM.INI file and check the [Boot] section
for the proper communications driver. Search
for the line that reads, COMM.DRV=. The line
should read, COMM.DRV=COMM.DRV,
unless the COMM.DRV on the right side
indicates a third party driver (Windows FAX or
communication programs are applications that
might replace the standard driver with one of
their own). If COMM.DRV is set to anything
other than the standard driver (COMM.DRV),
change the line to read
COMM.DRV=COMM.DRV.
Ø Ensure the line is not commented out
(comments in the .INI files are defined
with a semicolon at the beginning of the
line).
• Also, ensure the COMM.DRV file in the
Windows SYSTEM subdirectory is dated
3/10/92 and has a file size of 9280 bytes (for
Windows 3.1), or is dated 11/1/93 with a file
size of 5968 bytes (for Windows for Workgroups
3.11). If the date or size is incorrect, perform

User Manual
the next step. Otherwise, exit all programs and

restart Windows.
• Quit Windows. Then, use the EXPAND utility
in the Windows directory to reinstall
COMM.DRV from the Windows Setup disks to
the WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory. To do so,
type the following from a DOS prompt:
expand a:\comm.dr_ c:\windows\system\comm.drv
If the Terminal program prompts that the COM port
is not supported, or is being used by another device,
the problem might be with the computer’s
configuration. Check for:
• Any TSR programs that are using the COM
port.
• Another Windows program that is using the
COM port is currently running.
• Interrupt conflicts with the COM port and
another hardware card such as a network card.
After the modem is connected successfully, PRISM4
displays the message “Microlog is not responding” and
disconnects the modem.
• Check the Microlog’s cable to ensure a good
connection.
• Check the Microlog for any error message.
• Try a lower baud rate in both PRISM4 and the
Microlog, then restart modem communications.
If the modem is still not working, perform the next step.
• In the Windows directory, open the SYSTEM.INI file
and check the [Boot] section for the proper
communications driver. Search for the line that reads,
COMM.DRV=. The line should read,
COMM.DRV=COMM.DRV, unless the

User Manual
COMM.DRV on the right side indicates a third party

driver (Windows FAX or communication programs
are applications that might replace the standard driver
with one of their own). If COMM.DRV is set to
anything other than the standard driver
(COMM.DRV), change the line to read
COMM.DRV=COMM.DRV.
Ø Ensure the line is not commented out
(comments in the .INI files are defined
with a semicolon at the beginning of the
line).
• Also, ensure the COMM.DRV file in the Windows
SYSTEM subdirectory is dated 3/10/92 and has a file
size of 9280 bytes (for Windows 3.1), or is dated
11/1/93 with a file size of 5968 bytes (for Windows for
Workgroups 3.11). If the date or size is incorrect,
perform the next step. Otherwise, exit all programs
and restart Windows.
• Quit Windows. Then, use the EXPAND utility in the
Windows directory to reinstall COMM.DRV from the
Windows Setup disks to the WINDOWS\SYSTEM
directory. To do so, type the following from a DOS
prompt:
expand a:\comm.dr_ c:\windows\system\comm.drv
F - 10 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Appendix G
Data Delete Utility
Overview
Ø The Data Delete Utility is a very

powerful tool, your database could be
permanently damaged. As there is no
undo function, it is important that you
make a backup copy of your database.
At times, you may wish to remove unwanted or
unnecessary data from your database. The PRISM4 Data
Delete Utility allows you to permanently delete data from
your database, based on date range criteria and vibration
measurement level range criteria.
The user is able to choose between deleting only overall,
deleting only dynamic (spectra, phase and time), or both
overall and dynamic data.
Deleting Data
Ø Your Administrator must configure this
utility before any users can access the
program. The Administrator should
refer to the Configuring the PRISM4
Data Delete Utility section at the end of
this appendix.
To delete data from your database:
• Make a backup copy of your database.
PRISM4 for Windows G-1

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Deleting Data
• Ensure that the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility is

installed.
• In the PRISM4 Solutions folder, click on the
PRISM4 Data Delete menu option to start the
program. The Login dialog displays.
Figure G - 1.
You must enter a valid user name and password in the

User name and Password text boxes, click OK. The
PRISM4 Data Delete Utility Warning dialog displays.
Figure G - 2.
If you have not made of backup copy of your database,

click No and make a backup copy of your database.
G-2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Deleting Data
If you have a backup copy of your database, click the Yes

command button. The PRISM4 Data Delete Utility
dialog displays.
measurement type
drop-down list box
Figure G - 3.
The PRISM4 Data Delete Utility dialog allows the user

to specify the data directory, measurement amplitude range
and/or date range in which data will be deleted, and to
select the desired POINTs from which data matching the
specified criteria will be deleted.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Deleting Data
Data Delete Utility options are:

Data Directory
A text box in which you type the directory path for the
database from which you wish to delete measurements (or
use the Browse command button and normal Windows
browse operations to specify the data directory).
Delete Criteria Checkboxes
There are two criteria checkboxes for the user to define the
desired measurement amplitude range and date range to
delete.
All Measurements Greater than
and Less than (amplitude range)
All Measurements from
to (date range)
Amplitude Range - Check the All Measurements
Greater than and Less than checkbox, the following
control boxes become active:
Ø If unchecked, all measurements display
in the POINT list.
If checked, the POINT list displays
POINTs of the specified measurement
type.
Lower amplitude limit box - Enter the value above
which data is to be deleted.
Upper amplitude limit box - Enter the value below
which data is to be deleted.
Measurement type drop-down list box - Select the
measurement type from the measurement type list or
click in this list box to change it to a text box and
enter a user defined measurement type.
Ø This option determines which POINTs
display in the POINT List area.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Deleting Data
Date Range - Determines the date range from which data

is deleted. Check the All Measurements from
to checkbox, the following control boxes become active:
Starting date - Enter the starting date of the date
range to delete.
Ending date - Enter the ending date of the date
range to delete.
POINT List - Displays all POINTs that meet the specified
criteria.
• Use standard Windows click, shift-click, and ctrl-click
operations (or click the Select All command button to
select all POINTs) to select the POINTs whose data is
to be deleted.
Ø Press the Reset commend button to
unselect all POINTs.
Once all POINTs have been selected, press the Delete
command button, the Press OK to start deleting dialog
displays.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Deleting Data
Figure G - 4.
Use this dialog to choose to delete Overall data, Dynamic

(Spectra, Phase and Time) data, or both.
Select Data to Delete checkboxes are:
Overall - Check this option to delete trend data that
falls within the specified ranges.
Dynamic (Spectra, Phase and Time) - Check this
option to delete dynamic data associated with trend
data that falls within the specified ranges.
To delete both Overall and Spectrum data from your
database that falls within the specified range, check
both checkboxes.
Data Range Parameters - Displays the amplitude and the
date ranges specified in the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility
main screen.
• Click OK to delete the selected data.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
Configuring the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility
Exit - Exits the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility program.
The PRISM4 Data Delete Utility is shipped with the

default Admin user name and Admin password.
Ø It is highly recommended that you
change your administrator password and
store a written reference to it in a safe
location.
To configure the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility:
• In the PRISM4 Solutions folder, click on the
PRISM4 Data Delete menu option to start the
program. The Login dialog displays.
Figure G - 5.
• As the administrator, enter Admin in the User name

and Password text boxes and click OK. The
PRISM4 Data Delete Utility Warning dialog
displays.
• Click the Yes command button. The PRISM4 Data
Delete Utility dialog displays.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
• To display the User Administration dialog, double-

click anywhere within the gray area of the PRISM4
Data Delete Utility’s dialog.
Ø Only the user signing on as
Administrator can access the User
Administration dialog.
Figure G - 6.
User Administration dialog options are:

User list - Displays a list of valid users.
Ø There can be only one Admin user. The
only operation that can be performed on
the Admin user is changing the
password.
Username - Enter a new user’s name.
Password - Enter a password for the user listed in the
Username text box.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
User Administration command buttons are:

Add - Click to add a new user. Enter the Username and
Password, and click the Update command button. The
new user’s name is displayed in the Users list.
Delete - Highlight a user’s name in the Users list, and
press the Delete command button to remove the user from
the Users list box.
Update - After adding new users or changing the Admin
password, press to update Users list information.
Ø To change a user’s password (other than
Admin), you must delete the user and
then add the user with a new password.
• After configuring the PRISM4 Data Delete Utility,
click the Exit button to return to the PRISM4 Data
Delete Utility dialog.

User Manual
Data Delete Utility
User Notes
G - 10 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Appendix H
Utility Programs
Overview
The following utility programs are automatically installed

with the PRISM4 for Windows software:
The Bearing Export (BRGEXPRT) and Bearing Import
(BRGIMPRT) utilities allow the user to merge updated
bearing data supplied by SKF with user defined custom
changes made to existing bearing data files.
BRGEXPRT.EXE
The Bearing Export (BRGEXPRT) utility is a PRISM4
Bearing BRG to ASCII Comma Separated Value (.CSV)
file converter. It has no command line parameters. It
cycles through every BRG file in the directory and creates
a corresponding CSV file.
For example: If BRGEXPRT.EXE is run in a directory
with SKF.BRG and RHP.BRG, the files SKF.CSV and
RHP.CSV are created. The CSV files have a header as the
first line and all bearing information following:
DoubleQuote = "
Comma =,
Line 1: DoubleQuote BEARING NAME
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote DESC
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote BPFO
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote BPFI
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote BSF
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote FTF
DoubleQuote
PRISM4 for Windows H-1

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
Line 2: DoubleQuote 1st_Bearing_Name DoubleQuote

Comma DoubleQuote 1st_Bearing_Description
DoubleQuote Comma DoubleQuote
1st_Bearing_BPFO DoubleQuote Comma
DoubleQuote 1st_Bearing_BPFI DoubleQuote
Comma DoubleQuote 1st_Bearing_BSF
1st_Bearing_BSF DoubleQuote
Line 3: DoubleQuote 2nd_Bearing_Name DoubleQuote
Comma DoubleQuote 2nd_Bearing_Description
2nd_Bearing_BPFO DoubleQuote Comma
DoubleQuote 2nd_Bearing_BPFI DoubleQuote
Comma DoubleQuote 2nd_Bearing_BSF
2nd_Bearing_BSF DoubleQuote
Line 4: NumberOfBearings + 1: Bearing 3 - N
Information
1: "BEARING NAME","DESC","BPFO","BPFI","BSF","FTF"
2: "0000\example ","Deep groove ball
",4.000000,6.000000,2.400000,0.400000
3: "0001\example ","Deep groove ball 2
",5.500000,6.600000,4.800000,0.800000
4:....
BRGIMPRT.EXE
Takes the corresponding CSV file created by BRGEXPRT
and imports it into the same named BRG file (i.e.
SKF.CSV is imported into the file SKF.BRG). All
duplicate BEARING NAME records are updated and all
new BEARING NAME records are added to the BRG
database.
H-2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
BTRIEVE.EXE
The database manager used for PRISM2 database
conversion (PRDBUP.EXE and DBUPDATE.EXE). Used
to read the bearing database.
DBCHECK.EXE
Checks the integrity of the database. Recommended use
is: DBCHECK -a -r1 PRISMDB > 033195.out (see
P4CHECK.BAT)
where
-a = all (full check)
-r1 = Report every one percent (shows activity while
processing)
PRISMDB = PRISM Database structure
> 033195.OUT =Output file named for the day
created.
This filename indicates check was
performed on March 31, 1995.
Type DBCHECK -H for a listing of options for this
utility.
DBFIX.EXE
Fixes several potential database problems. (see
P4FIX.BAT for recommended usage). CALL SKF
TECHNICAL SERVICES FOR ASSISTANCE IN
RUNNING THIS UTILITY!!!
Type DBFIX -H for a listing of options for this utility.

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
DBREV.EXE
Modified RAIMA utility used with P4PCK130.RDL to
pack (compress) PRISM4 databases. Recommended usage:
dbrev -p10 -r -c0 -x0 -a1 -i -s p4pck130.rdl [src_db]
[dest_db]
Options for this utility are:
[-s RDL_FILE] [-e "RDL_strings(s)[;RDL_string..."]
[-p#] sets the cache size (default = 48)
[-r] creates report 'old_db.REP'
[-d] stops after compilation phase (report is done
if -r)
[-q] quick option (keeps deleted records)
[-v] verbose mode (displays running status)
[-i] enables CNTL-C for quitting
[-c0 or -c1] print or not compile phase warnings/non-
fatal errors
[-x0 or -x1] print or not execute phase warnings/non-
fatal errors
[-a0 -a1] abort or not on warnings
DBUPDATE.EXE
Converts pre-1.22 PRISM2 On-Line databases to PRISM2
1.31 format. P2TOP4.EXE only converts PRISM2 1.31
databases.

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
INITDB.EXE
Creates and initializes an empty PRISM4 database.
USAGE: INITDB PRISMDB.
WARNING: RUNNING THIS UTILITY IN AN
EXISTING DATA DIRECTORY RESULTS IN THE
LOSS OF ALL DATA. CALL SKF TECHNICAL
SERVICES FOR ASSISTANCE IN RUNNING THIS
UTILITY!!!
KEYBUILD.EXE
Rebuilds the database key files from existing database
files. YOU SHOULD RUN KEYBUILD IMMEDIATELY
FOLLOWING DBFIX.
KEYPACK.EXE
Packs (compress) PRISM4 database key (PRISMDB.K##)
files.
LM.EXE
Lock Manager for DOS. Manages concurrent multi-user
database access.
LMW.EXE
Lock Manager for Windows. Manages concurrent multi-
user database access.
P2TOP4.EXE
Converts a DOS PRISM2 1.31 database to a PRISM4 for
Windows 1.3X database.
Converting a PRISM2 database to a PRISM4 database is a
two step process.

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
• First, the hierarchy, POINT setups, and data are

converted from the PRISM2 format to the PRISM4
format.
• Next, the first time a converted plant is opened in
PRISM4, alarm status for all the plant's measurements
are updated (this can take a very long time for large
databases).
It is recommended that all plants be converted at the same
time:
• Highlight all plants in the Plant List (use CTRL -
click procedures to highlight multiple plant names).
• Click the OK command button.
Converting all plants in one step can save valuable time.
P4ADMIN.EXE
Adds and deletes PRISM4 users, and establishes or
changes PRISM4's password.
P4CLN130.EXE
Converts a PRISM4 for Windows 1.2X database to a
PRISM4 for Windows 1.3X database.
P4DELDAT.EXE
Deletes data from a range of POINTs based on a date
range and / or POINT value range.
P4SRV120.EXE
Used in conjunction with P4CLN130.EXE to read PRISM4
for Windows 1.20 databases.

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
PRDBUP.EXE
Used to convert pre-1.22 PRISM2 non On-Line databases
to PRISM2 1.22 format. P2TOP4.EXE only converts
PRISM2 1.31 databases.
REV.EXE
Original RAIMA utility used to pack (compress)
databases. Use DBREV.EXE to compress PRISM4
databases.
WCONSOLE.EXE
Utility used to view Lock Manager activity from another
station.

User Manual
Utility Programs
Overview
User Notes

User Manual
Axis - The reference plane used in
Glossary of Terms plotting routines. The X-axis is
the frequency plane. The Y-axis is
Acceleration - The time rate of the amplitude plane.
change of velocity. Acceleration Balancing - A procedure for
measurements are usually made adjusting the radial mass
with accelerometers. distribution of a rotor so that the
Accelerometer - A sensor whose centerline of the mass approaches
output is directly proportional to the geometric centerline of the
acceleration. rotor.
Alarm Setpoint - Any value Band-Pass Filter - A filter with a
beyond which is considered single transmission band extending
unacceptable or dangerous to from lower to upper cutoff
machinery operation. frequencies. The width of the band
Alignment - A condition whereby is determined by the separation of
the axes of machine components frequencies at which amplitude is
are either coincident, parallel, or attenuated by 3 dB (0.707).
perpendicular, according to design Bandwidth - The spacing between
requirements. frequencies at which a band-pass
Amplitude - The magnitude of filter attenuates the signal by 3 dB.
dynamic motion or vibration. Baseline Spectrum - A vibration
Expressed in terms of spectrum taken when a machine is
peak-to-peak, zero-to-peak, or in good operating condition; used
RMS. as a reference for monitoring and
Asynchronous - Vibration analysis.
components that are not related to Baud Rate - Adjustable serial
rotating speed. communication transfer rate.
Averaging - In a dynamic signal Measured in bits per second.
analyzer, digitally averaging Bit - Smallest unit of computer
several measurements to improve information storage. Equivalent to
statistical accuracy or to reduce the a choice of a one or a zero.
level of random asynchronous Byte - A unit of computer
components. information storage usually equal
Axial - In the same direction as the to eight bits or one character.
shaft centerline. Center Frequency - For a
Axial Vibration - Vibration which bandpass filter, the center of the
is in line with a shaft centerline. transmission band.
PRISM4 for Windows Glossary - 1

User Manual
Centerline Position - The average External Sampling - In a DSA
location, relative to the radial refers to control of data sampling
bearing centerline, of the shaft by a multiplied tachometer signal.
dynamic motion. Provides a stationary display of
Channel - A sensor and the vibration with changing speed.
instrumentation hardware and Fast Fourier Transform - A
related software required to display calculation method of converting a
its output signal. time waveform to a frequency
Condition Monitoring - display that shows the relationship
Determining the condition of a of discrete frequencies and their
machine by interpretation of amplitudes.
measurements taken either Field - One data item. Examples
periodically or continuously while of fields are POINT Type,
the machine is running. Description, etc.
CPM - Cycles per minute. Filter - An electronic device
CPS - Cycles per second. Also designed to pass or reject a specific
referred to as Hertz (Hz). frequency band.
Critical Speeds - In general, any FFT - See Fast Fourier Transform.
rotating speed which is associated Flat Top Window - DSA window
with high vibration amplitude. function which provides the best
Often the rotor speeds which amplitude accuracy for measuring
correspond to natural frequencies discrete frequency components.
of the system. Frequency - The repetition rate of
Cycle - One complete sequence of a periodic event, usually expressed
values of a periodic quantity. in cycles per second (Hz), cycles
Displacement - The change in per minute (CPM), revolutions per
distance or position of an object minute (RPM), or multiples of
relative to a reference. running speed (orders). Orders are
Download - Transferring commonly referred to as 1X for
information to the measurement running speed, 2X for twice
device from the host computer. running speed, and so on.
Enable - To activate. Frequency Domain - An FFT
Engineering Units - Physical units graph (amplitude vs. frequency).
in which a measurement is Free Running - A term used to
expressed, such as in/sec, describe the operation of an
micrometers, or mils. Selected by analyzer or processor which
the user. operates continuously at a fixed
EU - See ENGINEERING UNITS.
Glossary - 2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
rate, not in synchronism with some generated by a sensor observing a
external reference event. once-per-revolution event.
Frequency Range - The frequency (Keyphasor is a Bently-Nevada
range (bandwidth) over which a trade name.)
measurement is considered valid. Linear Averaging - In a DSA,
Usually refers to upper frequency averaging of time records that
limit of analysis, considering zero results in reduction of
as the lower analysis limit. asynchronous components.
Gap - (See Probe Gap.) Lines - Common term used to
Global Bearing Defect - describe the filters of a DSA (e.g.
Relatively large damage on a 400 line analyzer).
bearing element. Low Pass Filter - A filter whose
Hanning Window - DSA window transmission band extends from an
function that provides better upper cutoff frequency down to
frequency resolution than the flat DC.
top window, but with reduced Multi-Parameter Monitoring - A
amplitude accuracy. condition monitoring method that
Hertz (Hz) - Cycles per second. uses various monitoring
CPM/60. technologies to best monitor
Hierarchy - A method of machine condition.
organizing equipment into logical Natural Frequency - The
groups or physical areas for ease of frequency of free vibration of a
access in the PRISM4 database. system. The frequency at which an
This format consists of Main SETs, undamped system with a single
Sub-SETs, machines, and degree of freedom will oscillate
measurement POINTs. upon momentary displacement
High Pass Filter - A filter with a from its rest position.
transmission band starting at a Orbit - The path of shaft
lower cutoff frequency and centerline motion during rotation.
extending to (theoretically) infinite Overlap Processing - The concept
frequency. of performing a new analysis on a
Imbalance - A condition such that segment of data in which only a
the mass of a shaft and its portion of the signal has been
geometric centerlines do not updated (some old data, some new
coincide. data).
Keyphasor Phase Reference Peak Spectra - A frequency
Sensor - A signal used in rotating domain measurement where, in a
machinery measurements, series of spectral measurements,

User Manual
the one spectrum with the highest the physical gap distance.
magnitude at a specified frequency Standard polarity convention
is retained. dictates that a decreasing gap
Phase - A measurement of the results in an increasing (less
timing relationship between two negative) output signal; increasing
signals, or between a specific gap produces a decreasing (more
vibration event and a keyphasor negative) output signal.
pulse. Radial - Direction perpendicular
Phase Reference - A signal used to the shaft centerline.
in rotating machinery Radial Position -The average
measurements, generated by a location, relative to the radial
sensor observing a bearing centerline, of the shaft
once-per-revolution event. dynamic motion.
Phase Response - The phase Radial Vibration - Vibration
difference (in degrees) between the which is perpendicular to a shaft's
filter input and output signals as centerline.
frequency varies; usually expressed Resonance - The condition of
as lead and lag referenced to the vibration amplitude and phase
input. change response caused by a
Phase Spectrum - Phase frequency corresponding system sensitivity to
diagram obtained as part of the a particular forcing frequency. A
results of a Fournier transform. resonance is typically identified by
POINT - Defines a machinery a substantial amplitude increase,
location at which measurement and related phase shift.
data is collected and the RMS - The square root of the sum
measurement type. of a set of squared instantaneous
Probe - An eddy-current sensor, values.
although sometimes used to ROUTE - A measurement POINT
describe any vibration sensor. collection sequence.
Probe Gap - The physical distance Run Up/Run Down - The
between the face of an eddy probe monitoring of machinery
tip and the observed surface. The conditions during a start up or shut
distance can be expressed in terms down process.
of displacement (mils, Sensitivity - The ratio of
micrometers) or in terms of voltage magnitude of an output to the
(millivolts), which is the value of magnitude of a quantity measured.
the (negative) dc output signal and Also the smallest input signal to
is an electronic representation of which an instrument can respond.

User Manual
Sensor - A transducer which Trigger - Any event which can be
senses and converts a physical used as a timing reference.
phenomenon to an analog Upload - Transferring data from
electrical signal. the measuring device to the host
Setpoint - (See alarm setpoint.) computer.
Signal Analysis - Process of Vibration - The behavior of a
extracting information about a machine's mechanical components
signal's behavior in the time as they react to internal or external
domain and/or frequency domain. forces. Magnitude of cyclic
Describes the entire process of motion; may be expressed as
filtering, sampling, digitizing, acceleration, velocity, or
computation, and display of results displacement. Defined by
in a meaningful format. frequency and timebased
Spectrum - A display of discrete components.
frequencies and their amplitudes. Waveform - A presentation or
Spectrum Analyzer - An display of the instantaneous
instrument which displays the amplitude of a signal as a function
frequency spectrum of an input of time.
signal.
Thermocouple - A temperature
sensing device comprised of two
dissimilar metal wires which,
when thermally affected (heated or
cooled), produce a change in
electrical potential.
Time Domain - A dynamic
amplitude vs. time graph.
Time Waveform - (See
Waveform.)
Transducer - A device which
translates a physical quantity into
an electrical output.
Trend - The measurement of a
variable vs. time.

User Manual
(This page intentionally blank)

User Manual
attribute group 4-73
Index auto answer 2-51
auto capture 4-18
always 4-18
% off 4-18
% full scale 5-38, 7-8 on overall alarm 4-18
% of free system resources 6-83 automatic upload 5-35
autoscale 2-48
averages 4-18
1
axes setup 6-39, 6-66
1X running speed 6-53
B
A
backing up B-1, B-9
A1 and A2 alarm 5-36, 7-6 ball spin frequency 4-33
acceptance regions, phase 4-50 band cursor 6-40, 6-61, 6-64, 6-71
acquired data list 6-7 bands, spectral 4-14, 4-23, 6-44, 6-
add point 53
hierarchy 4-11 deleting 4-27
alarm bar 4-62
database B-7 barcode 4-59
envelope 4-14, 4-42, 6-42 barcode scanner 6-12
level 4-22 baseline spectrum 4-14, 4-47, 6-56
setpoints 4-23, 4-64 battery, MARLIN data manager 5-
types of 4-13 21
values 4-21 battery, microlog 5-21
alarm status indicators 3-26 baud rate 2-51
alarm type 4-21 bearing
alarms adding to FAM 4-40
MARLIN 4-58 assign 4-31
always 4-18 defects 4-28
append A-9 deletion 4-41
archive database 2-55, B-7 description 4-33
ASCII export A-5 editing frequencies 4-35
ASCII file A-1 editing in FAM 4-40
assign frange 4-37
bearing 4-28 frequencies display 6-50
asterisk 6-78 frequency entry 4-36
4
PRISM for Windows Index - 1
User Manual
geometry 4-40 attended host 5-15
identifier 4-37 hard-wired 5-15
label 4-37 control menu box 3-4
label frequencies 6-50 conversion
manufacturer 4-32 data B-1, B-9
model no. 4-33 icon B-3, B-10
name 4-33 log B-8
setup 4-28 co-processor 2-1
both 5-38 copy hierarchy items 3-34, 3-35
BPFI 4-33 drag and drop 3-36
BPFO 4-33 create icons 2-14
brute force 5-32 create menu 3-16
BSF 4-33 criteria 5-35
BW, bandwidth 4-34, 4-37 current color palette 2-52
cursor
C band 6-40, 6-61, 6-64, 6-71
color 2-53
cancel command button 3-8 data box 6-18
center frequency 4-45 data box 6-18
check boxes 3-13 delete 6-19
clear speed reference 4-19 harmonic 6-33
clear, MARLIN data manager 5-21 movement C-5
clear, microlog 5-21 moving to another plot 6-28
coded notes 5-3 data box 6-18
collector routes 5-21 placement 6-19
color settings 2-52 sideband 6-35
column sequence 5-35, 5-40, 7-9 single 6-17, 6-33, 6-60, 6-64, 6-
com port 2-51 79
command buttons 3-13 curve fit 6-21
command, modem 2-51
communication settings 2-50
D
configure, MARLIN data manager
5-22 DAD 1-10, 4-11
configure, microlog 5-22 DAD setup
connecting MARLIN data manager attribute group 4-76
5-17 data
connecting microlog 5-16 delete G-1
connection data acquisition device See DAD
Index - 2 PRISM4 for Windows

User Manual
data bits 2-51 delta time 6-71
data directory 2-46, 5-21 demo database 2-44
data display range 2-49 description 4-11
data transfer description, bearing 4-33
manual 5-43 description, report 7-4
MARLIN data manager 5-15 description, route 4-77, 5-9
microlog 5-15 destination database B-3, B-5
picolog 5-27 detection 4-15, D-1
database 3-22 diagnostics B-1
archive 2-55 dialog boxes 3-9
archive data 2-55 differentiate 6-47
building 4-1 dimmed options 3-8
changing microlog's 5-22 disabled point 3-24, 4-11
data delete G-1 disconnect modem F-6
diagnostics B-1 display color settings 2-52
new 4-3 display menu 3-17
paper copy 4-1 displayed spectrum 4-44, 4-48
scheduled data 2-54 DOS 2-1
unscheduled 2-54 download 4-11, 5-22, 5-28
database conversion B-1, B-3, B-9, FAM information 5-19
B-10 from active hierarchy list 5-26
log B-8 from ROUTE list 5-18
setup B-5 spectral bands 5-19
database main menu download enabled 4-11
add point 4-11 download multiple databases 2-46
database setup report 7-27 download route 5-15
date scaling 6-67 drag and drop 3-36, 3-38
date, reset MARLIN data manager dynamic signal detection 4-15
5-22
date, reset microlog 5-22 E
days to project 5-37, 7-6
dc setup, attribute group 4-75 edit menu 3-15
defect edit parameter 4-73
vibrations 4-28 ellipsis 3-9
defects, bearing 4-28 end frequency 4-16
delete data G-1 entry, bearing frequency 4-36
delete hierarchy items 3-39 env 4-43
delta frequency 6-71 env level 4-45
4
User Manual
envelope, alarm 4-14, 4-42, 6-42 assigning a single frequency 4-41
enveloping 4-12 Fc 4-34, 4-37
(acc) 4-12 fft setup, attribute group 4-76
(vel) 4-12 fft spectrum 6-29
error messages 6-83 display menu tools 6-39
event log 3-18 harmonic markers 6-33
exception criteria 7-5 overlay 6-30, 6-56
exception criteria setup 4-49, 6-43, saving 4-16
6-80, 7-5 sideband markers 6-35
a1 and a2 alarm 5-36, 7-6 toolbar 6-31
percent change alarm 5-38, 7-7 file menu 3-14
phase angle alarm 5-36, 7-6 import points A-6
project alarm 5-36, 7-6 filter 3-30
spectral band alarms 7-7 criteria 3-30, 3-33
spectral banding alarm 5-37 filter criteria
spectrum envelope alarm 5-36, 7- deleting settings file 3-34
6 storing settings file 3-34
statistic alarm 5-37, 7-7 filter hierarchy 3-30
exception criteria setup screen 5- fixed span 4-16, 4-17
38, 7-8 flat top 4-17
exception report 5-35, 7-3, 7-22 force spectrum collection 5-19, 5-
exclude/include 6-22, C-5 29
exiting 3-41 form type 4-62
export format 5-38
data A-1, A-2 format file 5-34, 5-41, 7-4
data type A-5 save 5-41
filename A-4 frange, bearing 4-37
historical data range A-5 free RAM 5-21
machine history/notes A-6 frequency
extract function 6-61, 6-64 fault 4-28
extracted spectrum 6-63, 6-65 frequency marker 4-41
extracted trend 6-63 frequency markers 6-37
data box 6-53
F frequency scale 2-46
frequency type 4-16
FAM data 2-49 FTF, fundamental train frequency
FAM Data initially 2-49 4-33
fault frequencies 4-28, 6-53 full scale 4-15

User Manual
full scale, spread type 4-45 I
icon
G network administrator E-1
gauge 4-62 icon, creating 2-13
gear mesh frequencies 4-28 identifier 4-11
general, attribute group 4-75 identifier, bearing 4-37
global, attribute change 4-72 imbalance 4-28
graphic plot display 6-1 import A-6
grids 2-49 data A-1, A-6
data type A-8
filename A-8
H machine history/notes A-9
hanning 4-17 in window 4-22, 4-64
hard disk drive 2-1 in window, alarm 4-21
hardware requirements 2-1 information 6-17, 6-32
harmonic markers 6-33, 6-71 inner race frequency 4-33
help menu 3-21 input filter 4-12
help, on-line 3-8 input filter range 4-12
hierarchy 3-22 input mv/eu 4-12, 4-15
alarm status indicators 3-26 inspection
copying items 3-34 report 7-1
deleting items 3-39 inspection POINT 4-65
filtering 3-30 inspection report 7-16
icons 3-26 installation 1-2, 2-1
keystrokes 3-26 custom 2-11
moving items 3-37 installation CD
operations 3-25 Windows 95, Windows 98, or NT
printing 3-40 2-2
rules 4-5 instructions page 5-10
searching 3-28 instructions, route 5-10
selecting items 3-28 integrate 6-47
set level 4-7 internal clock 5-21
historical data display 2-49, 6-7 internal temperature 5-21
history report 7-22 internet 2-2
host computer 1-9
4
User Manual
K machine notes 6-10
machine search 3-28
keyboard controls 3-7 mag/phase alarms 6-79
keystrokes, important C-5 main window 3-3
keystrokes, shortcut 3-7 manual archive 2-55, 3-14
manual data transfer 5-43
L manual entry 5-43
marker, frequency 4-41
label 6-48
markers, frequency 6-37
label bearing frequencies 6-50
data box 6-53
label frequencies 6-51
MARLIN
label peaks 2-48, 6-49
alarms 4-58
label running speed 6-53
condition detector 4-52, 4-56
label, bearing 4-37
data manager 4-54
label, bearing frequency 4-36
form type 4-62
last measurement report 5-35, 7-
inspection POINT 4-65
15, 7-22
process point 4-60
level, alarm 4-21
quick connect 4-58
linear scaling 2-49, 6-39
quick connect stud 4-53
lines 4-18
temperature measurement 4-56
link speed reference 4-19
transfer 5-22
list boxes 3-12
vibration measurement 4-56
local, attribute change 4-72
MARLIN data manager
location method 4-58, 4-62
clearing 5-20
location tag 4-59
connection 5-17
logarithmic scaling 2-49, 6-39
free RAM 5-21
logic setup, attribute group 4-76
internal status 5-21
login E-2
status 5-20
low freq. limit 4-16
upload 5-30
version 5-21
M MARLIN system 4-52
machine 3-23 maximize button 3-4
adding 4-8 maximum frequency, band 4-25
attributes 4-8 MCD 4-52
identification tag 6-13 measurement type, changing 6-47
location method 6-13 memory 6-83
machine attributes 6-5 menu bar 3-5
machine history/notes A-6, A-9 microlog 1-5, 1-6

User Manual
clearing 5-20, 5-27 appearance 4-8
connection 5-16 next due date 5-9
free RAM 5-21 next point 6-20, 6-38, 6-66
internal status 5-21 next timestamp 6-38
status 5-20, 5-27 non-route 5-24, 5-31
support module 1-5, 1-12 number of days from today 7-19, 7-
transfer 5-22, 5-25 24, 7-26, 7-30
upload 5-30 number of orders 2-48
version 5-21 number of users 2-5
mimosa 2-5
MIMOSA exports A-1 O
min overalls 5-37, 7-7
minimize button 3-4 off 4-18
minimum frequency, band 4-25 OK command button 3-8
misalignment 4-28 on overall alarm 4-18
missed points 5-35, 7-21 open nodes 7-5, 7-31
modem F-1 open plant 4-6
disconnect F-6 open, route 5-14
modem mode 2-50, F-1 open, workspace 4-79
auto answer 2-51 operator ID 5-6
none 2-50 option buttons 3-13
originate 2-50 orbit 3-17, 6-4
modify order 4-51, 6-33
by attribute 4-71, 4-72 order normalization 2-47
setup 4-71 order track 4-16
mouse 3-6 orders 4-16
move hierarchy items 3-37 originate 2-50
movies, training 2-2 out of window 4-22, 4-64
MQC 4-53 out of window, alarm 4-21
multiples 4-34 outer race frequency 4-33
overall alert, band 4-26
overall danger, band 4-26
N
overall setpoints, band 5-37
name, band 4-25 overalls 5-37, 7-6, 7-7
need to process 5-33 overdrive % 4-45
network administrator E-1 overdue report 7-18
new database 4-3 overlay 6-3
new points different point types 6-4
4
User Manual
fft spectral plots 6-56 open 4-6
time waveform 6-75 plant list 6-2
trend plot 6-27 point 3-23
adding 4-9
P alarm envelope 4-14, 4-42
baseline spectrum 4-14, 4-47
P4soundbyte 6-73 bearing setup 4-14, 4-28
palogram 6-69 description 4-11
angle 2-48 disabled 4-11
paper copy database 4-1 download enabled 4-11
parity 2-51 export A-1, A-2
peak 4-15, 5-37 graphic display 6-1
peak alert, band 4-25 hierarchy level 4-9
peak danger, band 4-25 id 4-2
peak-to-peak 4-15 identifier 4-11
percent change alarm 5-38, 7-7 import A-1
% full scale 5-38, 7-8 info 6-32
percent 5-38, 7-8 next 6-20, 6-38
phase 4-14, 4-49, 6-4 phase setup 4-14
acceptance regions 4-50 previous 6-21, 6-38
angle 4-49 scalar alarms 4-14, 4-20
at cursor 6-33 setup 4-15
display 6-77 setup options 4-13
order 4-51 spectral bands 4-14, 4-23
saving 4-16 speed 4-18
set harmonic 6-79 type 4-12
phase angle alarm 5-36, 7-6 point setup dialog box 4-9
picolog point type
connection 5-28 inspection 4-65
transfer 5-27 mcd 4-56, 4-57
upload 5-41 process 4-60
picolog setup, attribute group 4-76 points downloaded 5-21
plant 3-23 points with notes 5-35, 7-21
attributes 4-6 polar vector
creating 4-4 alarms 6-79
description 4-6 asterisk 6-78
enable 4-6 display 6-77
name 4-6 toolbar 6-81

User Manual
post processing 6-47 last measurement 7-15
prdiags.exe B-1 menu 3-19
preferences 2-45, 2-47, 2-50, 2-52, overdue 7-18
3-2, E-2 printing 7-13
prefix 4-2 quick 7-2, 7-29
previous point 6-21, 6-38, 6-66 route statistics 7-23
previous timestamp 6-38 saving 7-14
prime sets B-3 set statistics 7-25
print 6-26, 6-39, 6-67, 7-1 title 5-34, 7-4
aborting 7-1 toolbar 7-12
report 7-13 UCC test id 7-28
print format 7-8 UCC test id 7-2
print hierarchy list 3-40 upload 7-20
PRISM4 sound byte 6-71 report setup 7-27
process upload data 3-2, 5-33, 5- reset date 5-22
42, 5-43, E-2 reset, MARLIN data manager 5-22
program icon 3-1 reset, microlog 5-22
program manager 3-1 resolution, lines 4-18
project alarm 5-36, 7-6 restore button 3-4
days to project 5-37, 7-6 rms 4-15
overalls 5-37, 7-6, 7-7 route 3-24
add 5-15
Q creating 5-1
delete 5-15
quick report 7-2, 7-29 description 5-9
download 5-15
R ID 5-9
instructions 5-10
RAM 2-1 modify 5-15
refresh 3-21 next due date 5-9
remote communications F-1 open 5-14
report 7-1 paper copy 5-1
database setup 7-27 schedule 5-9
exception 7-3 setup 5-14
general procedure 7-2 toolbar buttons 5-12
generation 7-11 route info dialog box 5-8
history 7-22 route statistics report 7-23
inspection 7-16 RS-232 5-28
4
User Manual
running speed 6-49, 6-53 skfm info
indicator 6-53 total number of points 5-21
label 6-53 slider 4-62
sound byte 6-71, 6-73
S source database B-3, B-5
spectra 6-4
save data 4-14, 4-16, 4-49 spectral band
scalar alarms 4-14, 4-20 alarm indicators 5-37, 7-7
attribute group 4-75 spectral band alarms 4-23, 6-44, 6-
scaling 6-26, 6-38, 6-66, 6-80 53, 7-7
scaling, lin/log 2-49 assign 4-27
scan device 6-12, 6-13 clear 4-28
scan machine 6-12 deleting 4-27
schedule 4-13 spectral banding alarm 5-37
route 5-9 spectral bands
scheduled database 2-54 trending 6-45
search 3-28 spectrum
SEE 4-15 baseline 4-14
select database 2-54 envelope alarm 6-43
select plant 4-6 from trend 6-23
button 4-5 spectrum envelope alarm 4-42, 5-
selected nodes 7-5, 7-31 36, 7-6
set 3-24 spectrum settings 2-47
create 4-7 spectrum, baseline 4-47
set harmonic 6-79 speed 4-18
set machine speed 6-55 speed label initially 2-49
set search 3-29, 3-30 speed point id 4-19
set speed 6-53 speed ratio 4-20
set statistics report 7-25 speed tagging 4-19
setup, point 4-13 spread type 4-45
shaft centerline 3-17, 6-4 spreading % 4-45
shortcut keystrokes 3-7 standard database B-7
sideband markers 6-35 standard dev 5-37, 7-7
signal detection D-1 start frequency 4-16
simultaneous database access statistic alarm 5-37, 7-7
/dbpass switch 2-22 min overalls 5-37, 7-7
single cursor 6-33, 6-60, 6-64, 6- standard dev 5-37, 7-7
79 status

User Manual
MARLIN data manager 5-20 route 5-12, C-2
status, MARLIN data manager 5- time waveform 6-75, C-3
21 trend plot 6-16, C-2
status, microlog 5-20, 5-21, 5-27 waterfall 6-59, 6-67, C-3
status, picolog 5-27 workspace C-2
stop bits 2-51 trace color items 2-52
storage depth 4-18 training 2-2
suffix 4-2 transfer menu 3-20
support module 1-12 picolog 5-41
support, technical 2-44 UCC CM20 5-42
system resources 6-83 trend plot 6-4
system settings 2-45 overlay 6-15, 6-27
single 6-15
T spectral bands 6-45
toolbar 6-16
technical support 2-44 trend projection 6-21
terminology 3-22 turbine blade pass frequencies 4-28
text boxes 3-12
threshold % 2-48, 4-46
U
tile 5-13
tile horizontal 4-78 UCC CM20 1-7, 1-8
tile vertical 4-78 particle sizes 1-8
time 6-4 point setup 4-70
resetting MARLIN data manager upload 5-42
5-22 using 1-8
resetting microlog 5-22 UCC test ID 4-71
time waveform 6-70 UCC test id report 7-2, 7-28
saving 4-16 uniform 4-17
toolbar 6-75 units, display 6-47
time waveform from trend 6-25 units, system 2-46
title bar 3-3 unscheduled database 2-54
tool bar 3-5 update A-9
plant hierarchy list 3-3 upload 5-30
toolbar C-1 report 5-33, 7-20
fft spectrum 6-31, C-3 statistics 5-35, 7-21
plant hierarchy list C-1 user administrator E-2
polar vector 6-81, C-4 user name 3-1, 3-2, E-3
report controls 7-11, C-4 utilities 2-2
4
User Manual
utility programs H-1 window menu 3-21
window, point type 4-17
V working area 3-6
workspace 3-24
version 5-21 add 4-80
video driver 2-1 creating 4-76
view menu 3-16 delete 4-80
description 4-77
W open 4-79
setup 4-79
waterfall 6-58 workspace info dialog box 4-76
multiple point plots 6-68 workspace name 4-77
slant 2-48
toolbar 6-59, 6-67
web site 2-2 Y
wildcard characters 4-75 y axis as % full scale 6-27, 6-56
window 4-17 y-scale, (lin/log) 2-49
flat top 4-17
frame 3-6
Z
Hanning 4-17
uniform 4-17 zero offset 4-63
zoom 6-20, 6-37

User Manual

E Prism4

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

E Prism4

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PRISM4 for Windows

Microsoft Windows Based

Supports Software Version 1.35

Copyright  1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000

SKF Condition Monitoring

North and South America

Europe, Africa, Middle East

Visit us at our web site

Introduction to PRISM4 for Windows 1

Installation and Setup 2

PRISM4 for Windows TOC - 1

Building Your PRISM4

Data Collection ROUTEs and

TOC - 2 PRISM4 for Windows

Displaying Graphic Plots 6

Generating and Printing PRISM4 Reports 7

PRISM4 for Windows TOC - 3

Importing / Exporting PRISM4 Data A

Database Conversion Utilities B

Toolbar Tools and Important Keystrokes C

Microlog Detection Methods D

Network Administrator Options E

TOC - 4 PRISM4 for Windows

Data Delete Utility G

PRISM4 for Windows TOC - 5

About This Manual

As you'll soon realize, PRISM4 for Windows is easy to

This User Manual is divided into 7 chapters and 8

measurements from the data collection devices, and how to

Appendix H, Utility Programs - Describes the utility

A Note to Experienced PRISM2 (DOS) Users

PRISM4 for Windows uses the Microsoft Windows

What is the PRISM4/Microlog System?

A PRISM4/Microlog System (Figure 1-1) consists of three

Along with Microlog data transfer, PRISM4 for Windows

The Microlog Collector/Analyzer

The Microlog is a lightweight, hand-held, data acquisition

The Microlog performs all the tasks required of a

Vibration measurements are collected with a hand-

What is the PRISM4/UCC CM20 Analysis System?

A PRISM4/UCC CM20 Analysis System consists of two

The UCC CM20 Collector/Analyzer

The UCC CM20 is a portable 6-channel data acquisition

Using the CM20

The Host Computer

The host computer has a Pentium 166 or higher CPU

enough free disk space to store your PRISM4 measurement

PRISM4 for Windows Software

The easy-to-use PRISM4 for Windows software works with

Trend plots, FFT spectra (including waterfall and

• Download the collection ROUTE to the Microlog,

The Support Module

The Support Module (Figure 1-4) provides a connection

Ø For more information on Microlog

Hardware and Software Requirements

We highly recommend the following hardware

PRISM4 for Windows 2-1

Launching the Installation Program

The PRISM4 1.35 installation program is available on CD

To launch the install program using Windows

2-2 PRISM4 for Windows

• To install PRISM4 1.35, select the Install Applications